WO2025181637A1 - Semiconductor device - Google Patents
Semiconductor deviceInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025181637A1 WO2025181637A1 PCT/IB2025/051857 IB2025051857W WO2025181637A1 WO 2025181637 A1 WO2025181637 A1 WO 2025181637A1 IB 2025051857 W IB2025051857 W IB 2025051857W WO 2025181637 A1 WO2025181637 A1 WO 2025181637A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- transistor
- semiconductor device
- metal oxide
- conductive layer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B53/00—Ferroelectric RAM [FeRAM] devices comprising ferroelectric memory capacitors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B99/00—Subject matter not provided for in other groups of this subclass
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D1/00—Resistors, capacitors or inductors
- H10D1/60—Capacitors
- H10D1/68—Capacitors having no potential barriers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/60—Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
- H10D30/67—Thin-film transistors [TFT]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D84/00—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers
- H10D84/80—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D84/00—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers
- H10D84/80—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs
- H10D84/82—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs of only field-effect components
- H10D84/83—Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs of only field-effect components of only insulated-gate FETs [IGFET]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D86/00—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates
- H10D86/40—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs
Definitions
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device.
- one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
- Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, and driving methods thereof or manufacturing methods thereof.
- Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1 disclose memory cells formed by stacking transistors. In addition, there is a demand for memory devices with improved data write and read speeds.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a storage device with a large storage capacity.
- an object is to provide a storage device with a small occupation area.
- an object is to provide a storage device with high storage density.
- an object is to provide a storage device with high operating speed.
- an object is to provide a storage device with high reliability.
- an object is to provide a storage device with low power consumption.
- an object is to provide a novel storage device.
- One aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device having a first capacitance element and a first transistor, comprising: a first insulating layer provided on a first conductive layer; a first opening penetrating the first insulating layer and reaching the first conductive layer; a second conductive layer having a region overlapping the first conductive layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer in the first opening; a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer; a third conductive layer having a region overlapping the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer via another portion of the second insulating layer; a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer;
- the semiconductor device includes a fourth conductive layer provided on the edge layer, a second opening that penetrates the third insulating layer and reaches the third conductive layer, a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically
- the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element
- the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element
- the third conductive layer functions as one of the source electrode or drain electrode of the first transistor
- the fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrode or drain electrode of the first transistor.
- the length in the second direction is between two and five times the length in the first direction. It is preferable that the first capacitive element and the first transistor have regions that overlap each other in a planar view.
- Another aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device having a first capacitive element, a first transistor, and a second transistor, the semiconductor device including: a first insulating layer provided on the first conductive layer; a second conductive layer having a region overlapping with the first conductive layer and a region overlapping with a side surface of the first insulating layer; a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer; a third conductive layer having a region overlapping with the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer; a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer; a fourth conductive layer provided on the third insulating layer; a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer, a channel formation region of the first transistor, and a channel formation region of the second transistor; a fourth insulating layer provided on the semiconductor layer; and a fifth conductive layer having a region overlapping with the channel formation region of the first transistor via a portion
- the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element
- the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element
- the third conductive layer functions as one of the source electrodes or drain electrodes of each of the first transistor and the second transistor
- the fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrodes or drain electrodes of each of the first transistor and the second transistor.
- the first capacitive element has a first region that overlaps with the first transistor in a planar view, and a second region that overlaps with the second transistor in a planar view.
- the semiconductor layer contains an oxide semiconductor.
- a storage device with a large storage capacity it is possible to provide a storage device with a small footprint. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with a high storage density. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with a high operating speed. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with high reliability. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with low power consumption. Or, it is possible to provide a novel storage device.
- Fig. 1A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 1B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 1C and Fig. 1D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 1E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device
- Fig. 2A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 2B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 2C and Fig. 2D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 2E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device
- Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3A is a
- FIG. 3B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3C and Fig. 3D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 3E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
- Fig. 4A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 4B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 4C and Fig. 4D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device
- Fig. 4E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
- 5A1, 5B1, and 5C1 are plan views showing an example of a semiconductor device
- FIGS. 5A2, 5B2, and 5C2 are perspective views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
- 6A and 6B are plan and cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a semiconductor device.
- 7A and 7B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
- 8A and 8B are plan and cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a semiconductor device.
- 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
- 10A to 10F are diagrams showing examples of the planar shape of the opening.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 12A and 12B are diagrams showing configuration examples of memory cells.
- 13A and 13B are diagrams showing configuration examples of memory cells.
- 14A to 14G are diagrams illustrating examples of the circuit configuration of a memory cell.
- FIG. 15A and 15B are perspective views illustrating a configuration example of a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating the CPU.
- 17A and 17B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
- 18A and 18B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 19 is a conceptual diagram illustrating the hierarchy of a storage device.
- 20A and 20B are diagrams showing configuration examples of electronic components.
- 21A to 21C are diagrams showing examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
- Fig. 22A is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a space equipment
- Fig. 22B is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a storage system.
- a semiconductor device is a device that utilizes semiconductor properties, and refers to a circuit including a semiconductor element (transistor, diode, photodiode, etc.), a device having such a circuit, etc. It also refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor properties.
- semiconductor devices for example, integrated circuits, chips equipped with integrated circuits, and electronic components that house chips in packages are examples of semiconductor devices.
- memory devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, lighting devices, electronic devices, etc. may themselves be semiconductor devices and may also include semiconductor devices.
- ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” are used to avoid confusion between components. Therefore, they do not limit the number of components or the order of the components.
- a component referred to as “first” in one embodiment of this specification may be referred to as “second” in another embodiment or in the claims.
- a component referred to as “first” in one embodiment of this specification may be omitted in another embodiment or in the claims. Even if a term does not have an ordinal number in this specification, an ordinal number may be added in the claims to avoid confusion between components. Even if a term has an ordinal number in this specification, a different ordinal number may be added in the claims. Even if a term has an ordinal number in this specification, the ordinal number may be omitted in the claims.
- electrode B on insulating layer A does not require electrode B to be formed in direct contact with insulating layer A, and does not exclude the inclusion of other components between insulating layer A and electrode B.
- electrode B overlapping insulating layer A does not limit the state in which electrode B is formed on insulating layer A, but does not exclude the state in which electrode B is formed under insulating layer A or the state in which electrode B is formed on the right (or left) side of insulating layer A.
- terms such as “film” and “layer” can be interchanged depending on the situation.
- the term “conductive layer” can be changed to the term “conductive film.”
- the term “insulating film” can be changed to the term “insulating layer.”
- terms such as “film” and “layer” can be replaced with other terms without using them.
- the term “conductive layer” or “conductive film” can be changed to the term “conductor.”
- the term “conductor” can be changed to the term “conductive layer” or “conductive film.”
- the term “insulating layer” or “insulating film” can be changed to the term “insulator.”
- the term “insulator” can be changed to the term “insulating layer” or “insulating film.”
- Electrode any component that is used as part of a “wiring,” and vice versa.
- the terms “electrode” and “wiring” include cases where multiple “electrodes” or “wirings” are formed integrally.
- a “terminal” may be used as part of a “wiring” or “electrode,” and vice versa.
- the term “terminal” includes cases where multiple “electrodes,” “wirings,” “terminals,” etc. are formed integrally.
- an “electrode” can be part of a “wiring” or “terminal,” and a “terminal” can be part of a “wiring” or “electrode.”
- terms such as “electrode,” “wiring,” and “terminal” may be replaced with terms such as “region” and “conductive layer” depending on the circumstances.
- wiring may be changed to “signal line.”
- wiring may be changed to “power line.”
- the reverse is also true; terms such as “signal line” and “power line” may be changed to “wiring.”
- a term such as “power line” may be changed to “signal line.”
- the reverse is also true; terms such as “signal line” may be changed to “power line.”
- the term “potential” applied to wiring may be changed to “signal” depending on the circumstances. The reverse is also true; terms such as “signal” may be changed to “potential.”
- source refers to a source region, source electrode, or source wiring.
- a source region refers to one of two regions in a semiconductor layer that are adjacent to a channel formation region.
- a source electrode refers to a conductive layer that includes a portion connected to the source region.
- drain refers to a drain region, drain electrode, or drain wiring.
- a drain region refers to the other of the two regions in a semiconductor layer that are adjacent to a channel formation region.
- a drain electrode refers to a conductive layer that includes a portion connected to the drain region.
- gate refers to a gate electrode or gate wiring.
- a gate electrode is an electrode that overlaps with a semiconductor layer of a transistor and has the function of controlling the resistance between the source and drain of the transistor depending on the voltage supplied to it.
- one of the source or drain of a transistor may be referred to as the "first terminal of the transistor,” and the other of the source or drain of the transistor may be referred to as the "second terminal of the transistor.”
- parallel refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of -10° or more and 10° or less. Therefore, it also includes cases where the angle is -5° or more and 5° or less.
- substantially parallel or “roughly parallel” refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of -15° or more and 15° or less.
- perpendicular refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of 80° or more and 100° or less. Therefore, it also includes cases where the angle is 85° or more and 95° or less.
- substantially perpendicular or “approximately perpendicular” refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of 60° or more and 120° or less.
- voltage often refers to the potential difference between a certain potential and a reference potential (for example, ground potential or source potential). Therefore, voltage and potential can often be used interchangeably. In this specification and elsewhere, unless otherwise specified, voltage and potential can be used interchangeably.
- VDD high power supply potential
- VSS low power supply potential
- GND ground potential GND
- the "on state” of a transistor means that the source and drain of the transistor are in a conductive state (a state in which electricity can pass through). Furthermore, the "off state” of a transistor means that the source and drain of the transistor are in a non-conductive state (a state that can be considered to be electrically cut off).
- on-state current refers to the current that flows between the source and drain when a transistor is in the on state.
- off-state current refers to the current that flows between the source and drain when a transistor is in the off state.
- potential H is a potential that turns on an n-channel field effect transistor (also referred to as an "n-type transistor") and turns off a p-channel field effect transistor (also referred to as a "p-type transistor”).
- Potential L is a potential that turns off an n-type transistor and turns on a p-type transistor. Therefore, potential H is a potential higher than potential L.
- Potential H may be equal to VDD.
- Potential L may be equal to VSS.
- the transistors shown in this specification are enhancement-type (normally-off) n-type transistors.
- an "H” indicating a high potential or an “L” indicating a low potential may be written next to the wiring, electrode, etc.
- wiring, electrodes, etc. where a potential change has occurred may be marked with a box containing "H” or "L.”
- an "x" symbol may be written over the transistor.
- an arrow may be added to indicate the direction of current flow.
- arrows indicating the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction may be used.
- the "X direction” refers to the direction along the X axis, and the forward direction and reverse direction may not be distinguished from each other unless explicitly stated.
- the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are directions that intersect with each other.
- the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are directions that are perpendicular to each other.
- one of the X direction, Y direction, or Z direction may be referred to as the "first direction” or “first direction.” Furthermore, the other may be referred to as the “second direction” or “second direction.” Furthermore, the remaining one may be referred to as the "third direction” or “third direction.”
- capacitor has a configuration in which two electrodes face each other with an insulator (dielectric) interposed between them.
- capacitor element includes the aforementioned “capacitance.” That is, in this specification, “capacitance element” includes an element having a configuration in which two electrodes face each other with an insulator interposed between them, an element having a configuration in which two wires face each other with an insulator interposed between them, or an element in which two wires are arranged with an insulator interposed between them.
- one electrode of a capacitance element may be referred to as the "first terminal of the capacitance element,” and the other electrode may be referred to as the "second terminal of the capacitance element.”
- connection includes, as an example, “electrical connection.”
- electrical connection is sometimes used to define the connection relationship between circuit elements as a physical entity.
- electrical connection includes “direct connection” and “indirect connection.”
- a and B are directly connected means that A and B are connected without the intervention of a circuit element (e.g., a transistor, a switch, etc.; note that wiring is not a circuit element).
- a and B are indirectly connected means that A and B are connected via one or more circuit elements.
- a and B are indirectly connected
- a and B are connected via the source and drain of one or more transistors.
- an example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected” is when an insulator is present in the path from A to B. Specifically, this would be the case when a capacitive element is connected between A and B, or when a transistor gate insulating film or the like is present between A and B. Therefore, it cannot be said that "the transistor gate (A) and the transistor source or drain (B) are indirectly connected.”
- the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used as, for example, a memory cell.
- FIG. 1A is a plan view of a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10A.
- FIG. 1C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 1A.
- FIG. 1D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 1A.
- FIG. 1E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10A. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10A, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, etc.
- the semiconductor device 10A includes a capacitor 110 and a transistor 120.
- One electrode of the capacitor 110 is connected to a wiring PL, and the other electrode of the capacitor 110 is connected to one of the source and drain of the transistor 120.
- the other of the source and drain of the transistor 120 is connected to a wiring BL.
- the gate of the transistor 120 is connected to a wiring WL.
- the wiring PL functions as a power supply line and has a function of supplying a fixed potential to one electrode of the capacitor 110.
- the wiring BL functions as a bit line.
- the wiring WL functions as a word line.
- Semiconductor device 10A has a conductive layer 102 on an insulating layer 101.
- the conductive layer 102 functions as wiring PL.
- An insulating layer 103 is also on the conductive layer 102.
- An opening 104 that penetrates the insulating layer 103 and reaches the conductive layer 102 is also provided in the region overlapping with the conductive layer 102.
- the planar shape of opening 104 shape as viewed from the Z direction
- the planar shape of opening 104 is an oval shape including straight and curved portions, but it can also be an oval shape (ellipse) that does not include straight portions.
- the shape of opening 104 can also be other than an oval. For example, it can be a polygon.
- a conductive layer 105 is provided covering the inner wall of the opening 104.
- the conductive layer 105 has a region that connects to the conductive layer 102 in the opening 104.
- the conductive layer 105 also has a region that overlaps with the side surface of the insulating layer 103 in the opening 104.
- the conductive layer 105 also has a region that extends on the insulating layer 103 in a direction perpendicular to the Z direction (e.g., the Y direction).
- Semiconductor device 10A also has insulating layer 106 on insulating layer 103 and conductive layer 105. Also, conductive layer 107 is on insulating layer 106, including a region that overlaps with opening 104. Conductive layer 107 has a region inside opening 104 that overlaps with conductive layer 105 via insulating layer 106. Conductive layer 107 also has a region that overlaps with the side of insulating layer 103 via insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 105. Conductive layer 107 also has a region that overlaps with conductive layer 102 via insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 105.
- the conductive layer 105 functions as one electrode of the capacitor 110.
- the conductive layer 107 functions as the other electrode of the capacitor 110.
- the capacitor 110 included in the semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention has a region that extends along the side surface of the insulating layer 103 in the opening 104. This gives the capacitor 110 a large capacitance per unit occupied area.
- the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be increased or decreased by adjusting the thickness of the insulating layer 103. In other words, the capacitance per unit occupied area can be easily adjusted.
- a capacitor whose capacitance can be adjusted mainly by the thickness of the insulating layer 103, such as the capacitor 110 included in the semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention, is also called a “vertical capacitor” or “VC (Vertical Capacitor).”
- Semiconductor device 10A also has conductive layers 109a and 109b on insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 107.
- conductive layers 109a and 109b may be collectively referred to as conductive layer 109.
- an opening 111 is provided that penetrates insulating layer 108 and reaches conductive layer 107.
- opening 111 can be said to penetrate not only insulating layer 108 but also conductive layer 109.
- the shape of opening 111 viewed from the Z direction is oval, but the shape of opening 111 can also be other than oval.
- a semiconductor layer 112 is provided covering the inner wall of the opening 111.
- the semiconductor layer 112 has a region that runs along the inside of the opening 111.
- the semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that connects to the conductive layer 107 in the opening 111.
- the semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that overlaps with the side surface of the insulating layer 108 in the opening 111.
- the semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that contacts the side surface of the conductive layer 109 in the opening 111.
- the semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that extends in the X direction on the conductive layer 109 and a region that extends in the Y direction on the insulating layer 108.
- Semiconductor device 10A also has an insulating layer 113 on insulating layer 108 and conductive layer 109. Also, on insulating layer 113, a conductive layer 114 is also provided, including a region that overlaps with opening 111. Inside opening 111, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with semiconductor layer 112 via insulating layer 113. Also, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with a side surface of insulating layer 108 via insulating layer 113 and semiconductor layer 112. Also, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with conductive layer 107 via insulating layer 113 and semiconductor layer 112.
- Insulating layer 115 is also provided on conductive layer 114 and insulating layer 113.
- the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 120.
- the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 120.
- the insulating layer 113 functions as the gate insulating layer of the transistor 120.
- the conductive layer 114 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120.
- an OS transistor (a transistor including an oxide semiconductor in a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed) as the transistor constituting the transistor 120. Since oxide semiconductors have a band gap of 2 eV or more, their off-state current is significantly low.
- OS memory a memory cell using an OS transistor or a storage device using an OS transistor.
- the transistor 120 which is a vertical transistor
- the capacitor 110 which is a vertical capacitor
- ⁇ Vertical transistor> 6A is a plan view of a transistor 120 applicable to a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- Fig. 6B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A2 indicated by the dashed dotted line in Fig. 6A. Note that Fig. 6A illustrates a case where the shape of the opening 111 is circular when viewed from the Z direction.
- the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120
- the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120.
- the region of the semiconductor layer 112 in contact with the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain regions of the transistor 120
- the region of the semiconductor layer 112 in contact with the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain regions of the transistor 120.
- the region of the semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of the insulating layer 108 functions as a channel formation region. Therefore, the length from the conductive layer 107 to the conductive layer 109 on the side surface of the insulating layer 108 becomes the channel length L of the transistor 120 (see Figure 6B).
- the channel length L of the transistor 120 which is a vertical transistor, is determined by the thickness ta of the insulating layer 108.
- the insulating layer 108 may also be referred to as a spacer layer.
- the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 112 is formed in a cylindrical shape along the side surface of the insulating layer 108 within the opening 111. Therefore, the perimeter of the opening 111 when viewed from the Z direction is the channel width W of the transistor 120 (see Figure 6A). Note that, if necessary, the perimeter of any position of the opening 111 can be set to the channel width W. For example, the perimeter of the bottom of the opening can be set to the channel width W, or the perimeter of the top of the opening 111 can be set to the channel width W. Furthermore, for example, the perimeter of the opening 111 can be set to a position halfway through the thickness ta of the insulating layer 108.
- the planar shape of the opening 111 is shown as a circle in Figure 6A, this is not limiting. For example, the planar shape of the opening 111 when viewed from the Z direction can be an oval, polygon, or the like.
- the side surface of the opening 111 has a slope.
- the side surface of the opening 111 has a slope, it is possible to improve the coverage of the semiconductor layer 112, the insulating layer 113, and the conductive layer 114, including the region formed inside the opening 111.
- the side surfaces of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 exposed by the formation of the opening 111 have a slope.
- the angle between the bottom surface and the side surface of a layer is referred to as the "taper angle ⁇ .”
- the coverage of the semiconductor layer 112, insulating layer 113, and conductive layer 114 to be formed later can be improved. That is, the semiconductor layer 112, insulating layer 113, and conductive layer 114 can be easily formed on the inner wall of the opening 111.
- the smaller the taper angle ⁇ the larger the area occupied by the opening 111. Therefore, the area occupied by the transistor 120 increases, making it difficult to miniaturize and highly integrate the transistor 120.
- the taper angle ⁇ of each of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 is preferably 45° or greater and less than 90°, and more preferably 50° or greater and 75° or less.
- the taper angles ⁇ of the side surfaces of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 can be the same or different.
- a portion of the conductive layer 107 may be removed.
- the bottom of the opening 111 may also include a curved portion.
- the curved portion at the bottom of the opening 111 may also cause the semiconductor layer 112, the insulating layer 113, and other layers formed on the curved portion to also have curved portions. This reduces electric field concentration in the insulating layer 113 near the curved portion when a voltage is applied to the conductive layer 114, improving the dielectric strength of the transistor 120 and suppressing electrostatic breakdown of the transistor 120. Therefore, the reliability of the semiconductor device can be improved.
- the conductive layer 114 which functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120, and the conductive layer 107, which functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120, preferably have an overlapping region.
- an electric field can be applied from the conductive layer 114 to the entire semiconductor layer 112 that overlaps with the insulating layer 108, which improves the electrical characteristics of the transistor 120.
- the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be increased.
- Vertical transistors can occupy a smaller area than transistors in which the channel formation region, source region, and drain region are provided separately on the XY plane (also called “horizontal transistors"). Therefore, by using vertical channel transistors in a semiconductor device, the area occupied by the semiconductor device can be reduced. Furthermore, by using vertical channel transistors in a semiconductor device, high integration of the semiconductor device can be achieved.
- the channel length is limited by the exposure limit of photolithography.
- the channel length can be set by the film thickness of the insulating layer 108. Therefore, the channel length of the transistor can be made into an extremely fine structure that is equal to or less than the exposure limit of photolithography (e.g., 60 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 40 nm or less, 30 nm or less, 20 nm or less, or 10 nm or less, and 1 nm or more or 5 nm or more). This increases the on-state current of the transistor, thereby improving frequency characteristics.
- a vertical channel transistor a semiconductor device with high operating speed can be provided.
- Fig. 8A is a plan view of a capacitor 110 applicable to a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- Fig. 8B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A2 indicated by the dashed dotted line in Fig. 8A. Note that Fig. 8A illustrates a case where the shape of the opening 104 is circular when viewed from the Z direction.
- the conductive layer 105 functions as one electrode of the capacitor 110
- the conductive layer 107 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the capacitor 110.
- the region where the conductive layer 105 and the conductive layer 107 overlap with each other with the insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween functions as the capacitor 110.
- the capacitance of the capacitance element 110 is determined by the relative dielectric constant of the insulating layer 106, the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap, and the distance at which the conductive layers 105 and 107 face each other. That is, in this embodiment, the capacitance is determined by the sum of the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap at the bottom of the opening 104, the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap on the insulating layer 103, and the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap along the side of the insulating layer 103.
- the capacitance of the vertical capacitance element 110 can be determined primarily by the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap along the side of the insulating layer 103. In other words, it can be determined by the product of the thickness tb of the insulating layer 103 and the perimeter (length Wc) of the opening 104 when viewed from the Z direction.
- the perimeter of any position on the opening 111 can be set to length Wc.
- the perimeter of the bottom of the opening 104 can be set to length Wc, or the perimeter of the top of the opening 104 can be set to length Wc.
- the perimeter of the opening 104 can be set to a position halfway through the thickness tb of the insulating layer 103.
- the planar shape of the opening 104 is shown as a circle in Figure 8A, this is not limited to this.
- the planar shape of the opening 104 can be an oval, a polygon, or the like.
- the taper angle ⁇ (not shown) of the side surface of the opening 104 is preferably 45° or more and 90° or less, and more preferably 50° or more and 75° or less.
- part of the conductive layer 102 may be removed.
- the bottom of the opening 104 may include a curved portion. Removing part of the conductive layer 102 increases the area of the region of the capacitance element 110 corresponding to the bottom of the opening 104, thereby increasing the capacitance of the capacitance element 110. Also, including a curved portion in the bottom of the opening 104 increases the area of the region of the capacitance element 110 corresponding to the bottom of the opening 104, thereby increasing the capacitance of the capacitance element 110.
- the capacitor element 110 can be configured as shown in Figure 9B.
- the end 121 of the conductive layer 105 is located lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 103. This makes it possible to suppress electric field concentration in the insulating layer 106 near the end 121, compared to when the end 121 is located on the insulating layer 103. By suppressing electric field concentration in the insulating layer 106, dielectric breakdown of the insulating layer 106 can be suppressed, and a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided.
- Figure 9B shows an example in which region 122 between the upper surface of insulating layer 103 and the side surface of opening 104 has a curved portion.
- region 122 By having region 122 have a curved portion, it is possible to suppress electric field concentration in insulating layer 106 near region 122.
- electric field concentration in insulating layer 106 By suppressing electric field concentration in insulating layer 106, it is possible to suppress dielectric breakdown of insulating layer 106 and provide a highly reliable semiconductor device.
- ⁇ Plane shape of openings and number of openings> As described above, increasing the perimeter of the opening 111 can increase the on-current of the transistor 120. Increasing the perimeter of the opening 104 can increase the capacitance of the capacitor 110. For example, if the planar shape of the opening 111 or the opening 104 is circular when viewed from the Z direction and its diameter is 60 nm, the circumference is 188.5 nm. As shown in FIG. 1A , making the opening 111 an oval that is elongated in the Y direction can increase the on-current of the transistor 120. In addition, making the opening 104 an oval that is elongated in the Y direction can increase the capacitance of the capacitor 110.
- Increasing the on-state current of the transistor 120 increases the operating speed of the semiconductor device 10A.
- Increasing the capacitance of the capacitor 110 also increases the data retention capability of the semiconductor device 10A.
- Increasing the capacitance of the capacitor 110 also reduces the effect of the parasitic capacitance of the bit line, thereby improving the accuracy of reading retained data. This improves the reliability of the semiconductor device 10A.
- the circumference is 349 nm. Therefore, the circumference can be made approximately 1.9 times that of a circle with a diameter of 60 nm. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be increased by approximately 1.9 times. Furthermore, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be increased by approximately 1.9 times.
- the on-current of the transistor 120 can be increased by making the length 151 of the opening 111 in the first direction different from the length 152 in the second direction perpendicular to the first direction.
- the first direction is the X direction
- the second direction corresponds to the Y direction.
- the shape of the opening 111 viewed in a plan view i.e., the planar shape of the opening 111
- the length in the first direction corresponds to the length in the direction of the minor axis
- the length in the second direction corresponds to the length in the direction of the major axis.
- the planar shape of the opening 111 is rectangular, the length in the first direction corresponds to the length of the opposite sides in the shorter direction, and the length in the second direction corresponds to the length of the opposite sides in the longer direction.
- the capacitance of the capacitive element 110 can be increased.
- the first direction corresponds to the direction of the minor axis
- the second direction corresponds to the direction of the major axis.
- the planar shape of the opening 104 is rectangular, the length in the first direction corresponds to the direction in which the distance between opposing sides is shorter, and the second direction corresponds to the direction in which the distance is longer.
- the length in the first direction and the length in the second direction can be determined based on the above concept.
- first direction length 151 and second direction length 152 of the opening 111 can be the length at the top of the opening 111, the length at the bottom of the opening 111, or the length from the top to the bottom of the opening 111.
- first direction length 151 and second direction length 152 of the opening 104 can be the length at the top of the opening 104, the length at the bottom of the opening 104, or the length from the top to the bottom of the opening 104.
- the length 152 in the second direction is preferably 1.5 to 10 times the length 151 in the first direction, and more preferably 2 to 5 times.
- opening 111 or opening 104 is fixed at 60 nm x 140 nm.
- the area occupied by opening 111 or opening 104 is fixed at 60 nm x 140 nm.
- the total perimeter of the two openings is 379 nm, which is longer than when an ellipse is used. This further increases the on-state current of transistor 120.
- the capacitance of capacitor 110 can be increased compared to when an ellipse is used.
- the total perimeter of the ten openings is 751 nm. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be further increased.
- the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be further increased.
- FIGS. 10D to 10F show the relationship between the number of openings and the total perimeter when the planar shape of openings 111 or openings 104 is a rectangle.
- opening 111 or opening 104 when opening 111 or opening 104 is a rectangle measuring 60 nm x 140 nm, the perimeter is 400 nm.
- Figure 10E if two square openings 111 or openings 104 with a side length of 60 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the two openings is 480 nm.
- Figure 10F if ten square openings 111 or openings 104 with a side length of 24 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the ten openings is 960 nm.
- the total perimeter can be increased even with the same occupied area. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 per unit occupied area can be increased. Similarly, by dividing the opening 104 into multiple parts, the total perimeter can be increased even with the same occupied area. Therefore, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 per unit occupied area can be increased. Therefore, the operating speed, reliability, and the like of the semiconductor device 10A can be improved without increasing the occupied area. Furthermore, the occupied area of the transistor 120 can be reduced without reducing the on-state current of the transistor 120. Furthermore, the occupied area of the capacitor 110 can be reduced without reducing the capacitance of the capacitor 110. Therefore, the memory density of a memory device using the semiconductor device 10A as a memory cell can be increased. Furthermore, the memory capacity of a memory device using the semiconductor device 10A as a memory cell can be increased.
- FIG. 2A is a plan view of the semiconductor device 10B according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10B.
- FIG. 2C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2A .
- FIG. 2D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2A .
- FIG. 2E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10B. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10B, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, and the like.
- Semiconductor device 10B differs from semiconductor device 10A in that it has two openings 111 and two transistors 120. To reduce repetition, the following description will mainly focus on the differences between semiconductor device 10B and semiconductor device 10A.
- Semiconductor device 10B has opening 111[1] that overlaps with a portion of conductive layer 107 and opening 111[2] that overlaps with another portion of conductive layer 107. Semiconductor device 10B also has transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2].
- semiconductor layer 112 is provided to cover opening 111[1] and opening 111[2].
- Semiconductor layer 112 also has a region along the inside of opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of opening 111[2].
- the channel formation region of transistor 120[1] is formed in semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of insulating layer 108 in opening 111[1].
- the channel formation region of transistor 120[2] is formed in semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of insulating layer 108 in opening 111[2].
- the insulating layer 113 is provided to cover the semiconductor layer 112.
- the insulating layer 113 has a region along the inside of the opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of the opening 111[2]. Therefore, a part of the insulating layer 113 functions as the gate insulating layer for the transistor 120[1], and another part functions as the gate insulating layer for the transistor 120[2].
- the conductive layer 114 has a region along the inside of the opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of the opening 111[2].
- the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[1] and one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[2].
- the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[1] and the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[2].
- the conductive layer 114 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120[1] and the gate electrode of the transistor 120[2].
- semiconductor device 10B has a configuration in which transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2] are connected in parallel.
- Transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2] connected in parallel essentially function as a single transistor.
- Vertical transistors are easier to form than horizontal transistors, allowing multiple transistors to be connected in parallel. Furthermore, vertical transistors allow multiple transistors to be connected in parallel in a smaller area than horizontal transistors.
- Semiconductor device 10B can achieve a higher operating speed than semiconductor device 10A without increasing the occupied area.
- this embodiment shows an example configuration of the semiconductor device 10B having two openings 111 on the conductive layer 107
- the semiconductor device 10B according to one embodiment of the present invention can have three or more openings 111.
- FIG. 3A is a plan view of the semiconductor device 10C according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 3B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10C.
- FIG. 3C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 3A .
- FIG. 3D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 3A .
- FIG. 3E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10C. Note that to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10C, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, and the like.
- Semiconductor device 10C differs from semiconductor device 10A in that it has two openings 104. To reduce repetition, the following description will mainly focus on the differences between semiconductor device 10C and semiconductor device 10A.
- Semiconductor device 10C has opening 104[1] that overlaps with a portion of conductive layer 102 and opening 104[2] that overlaps with another portion of conductive layer 102.
- conductive layer 105 is provided to cover opening 104[1] and opening 104[2].
- Conductive layer 105 also has a region along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region along the inside of opening 104[2].
- insulating layer 106 is provided to cover conductive layer 105.
- insulating layer 106 has a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[2].
- conductive layer 107 is provided on insulating layer 106. Furthermore, conductive layer 107 has a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[2].
- semiconductor device 10C if the region inside opening 104[1] where conductive layer 105 and conductive layer 107 overlap each other with insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween is defined as capacitance element 110[1], and the region inside opening 104[2] where conductive layer 105 and conductive layer 107 overlap each other with insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween is defined as capacitance element 110[2], then semiconductor device 10C can be said to have a configuration in which capacitance element 110[1] and capacitance element 110[2] are connected in parallel (see Figure 3E). Capacitance elements 110[1] and 110[2] connected in parallel essentially function as a single capacitance element 110.
- the semiconductor device 10C can improve data retention capability compared to the semiconductor device 10A without increasing the occupied area. It can also improve data read accuracy compared to the semiconductor device 10A. Therefore, it can achieve higher reliability than the semiconductor device 10A.
- this embodiment shows an example configuration of the semiconductor device 10C having two openings 104 on the conductive layer 102
- the semiconductor device 10C according to one embodiment of the present invention can have three or more openings 104.
- a configuration example of a semiconductor device 10D which is a modification of the semiconductor device 10A, will be described.
- the semiconductor device 10D has a configuration that combines the semiconductor device 10B and the semiconductor device 10C. Therefore, the semiconductor device 10D is a modification of both the semiconductor device 10B and the semiconductor device 10C.
- Figure 4A is a plan view of a semiconductor device 10D according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- Figure 4B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10D.
- Figure 4C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in Figure 4A.
- Figure 4D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in Figure 4A.
- Figure 4E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10D. Note that to make the configuration of the semiconductor device 10D easier to understand, some components are omitted from the perspective view, plan view, etc.
- Semiconductor device 10D differs from semiconductor devices 10A, 10B, and 10C in that it has two openings 111 and two openings 104. By increasing the number of both openings 104 and openings 111, it is possible to increase both the on-state current of transistor 120 and the capacitance of capacitive element 110. By configuring semiconductor device 10D, it is possible to achieve improved operating speed and reliability without increasing the occupied area.
- planar shapes of the openings 104 and 111 are not limited to circular or elliptical.
- the planar shapes of the openings 104 and 111 may be rectangular (see FIGS. 10D to 10F).
- Figure 5A1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Ar.
- Figure 5A2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Ar.
- Semiconductor device 10Ar has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10A are rectangular.
- Figure 5B1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Br.
- Figure 5B2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Br.
- Semiconductor device 10Br has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10B are rectangular.
- Figure 5C1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Dr.
- Figure 5C2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Dr.
- Semiconductor device 10Dr has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10D are rectangular.
- the material used for the substrate is not particularly limited.
- the material used for the substrate is determined depending on the purpose, taking into consideration the presence or absence of light-transmitting properties and heat resistance sufficient to withstand heat treatment.
- an insulating substrate, a semiconductor substrate, or a conductive substrate can be used as the substrate.
- insulating substrates that can be used include glass substrates such as barium borosilicate glass and aluminoborosilicate glass, ceramic substrates, quartz substrates, sapphire substrates, and stabilized zirconia substrates (such as yttria-stabilized zirconia substrates).
- semiconductor substrates, flexible substrates, resin substrates, and the like can also be used as the substrate.
- Semiconductor substrates include, for example, semiconductor substrates made of silicon or germanium, or compound semiconductor substrates made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide (also called zinc oxide), or gallium oxide. Furthermore, there are semiconductor substrates that have an insulating region inside the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrates. Furthermore, the semiconductor substrate can be a single-crystal semiconductor or a polycrystalline semiconductor.
- Conductor substrates include graphite substrates, metal substrates, alloy substrates, and conductive resin substrates. Other examples include substrates containing metal nitrides and substrates containing metal oxides. Furthermore, there are substrates in which a conductive layer or semiconductor layer is provided on an insulator substrate, substrates in which a conductive layer or insulating layer is provided on a semiconductor substrate, and substrates in which a semiconductor layer or insulating layer is provided on a conductive substrate.
- polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyacrylonitrile, acrylic resin, polyimide, polymethyl methacrylate, polycarbonate (PC), polyethersulfone (PES), polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polysiloxane, cycloolefin resin, polystyrene, polyamideimide, polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), ABS resin, cellulose nanofiber, etc.
- PET polyethylene terephthalate
- PEN polyethylene naphthalate
- PES polyethersulfone
- polyamide nylon, aramid, etc.
- polysiloxane polystyrene
- polyamideimide polyurethane
- polyvinyl chloride polyvinylidene chloride
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- ABS resin
- a lightweight semiconductor device can be provided. Furthermore, by using the above materials for the substrate, a semiconductor device that is resistant to impact can be provided. Furthermore, by using the above materials for the substrate, a semiconductor device that is less likely to break can be provided. Furthermore, these substrates can be used with elements provided on them. Elements that can be provided on the substrate include capacitance elements, resistance elements, switching elements, light-emitting elements, and memory elements.
- the insulating layers can each include an inorganic insulating film.
- inorganic insulating films include an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, and a nitride oxide insulating film.
- oxide insulating films include a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a tantalum oxide film, a cerium oxide film, a gallium zinc oxide film, and a hafnium aluminate film.
- nitride insulating films include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- Examples of oxynitride insulating films include a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, a gallium oxynitride film, an yttrium oxynitride film, and a hafnium oxynitride film.
- Examples of nitride oxide insulating films include a silicon nitride oxide film and an aluminum nitride oxide film.
- an organic insulating film can also be used for the insulating layers of a semiconductor device.
- an oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- a nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen
- silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen.
- gate insulating layers can cause problems such as leakage current.
- EOT equivalent oxide thickness
- using a material with a low dielectric constant for insulating layers that function as interlayer films can reduce the parasitic capacitance that occurs between wiring. Therefore, it is important to select materials according to the function of the insulating layer. Materials with a low dielectric constant also have high dielectric strength.
- high-dielectric-constant (high-k) materials include aluminum oxide, gallium oxide, hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, zirconium oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, oxides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxynitrides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxides containing silicon and hafnium, oxynitrides containing silicon and hafnium, and nitrides containing silicon and hafnium.
- materials with a low relative dielectric constant include inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, and silicon nitride oxide, and resins such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polyimide, polycarbonate, and acrylic resin.
- inorganic insulating materials with a low relative dielectric constant include, for example, silicon oxide doped with fluorine, silicon oxide doped with carbon, and silicon oxide doped with carbon and nitrogen. Another example is silicon oxide with vacancies. Note that these silicon oxides may contain nitrogen.
- a material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity can be used for the insulating layer of a semiconductor device.
- materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include metal oxides such as hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, and hafnium zirconium oxide.
- materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element J1 (here, element J1 is one or more selected from zirconium, silicon, aluminum, gadolinium, yttrium, lanthanum, strontium, etc.) to hafnium oxide.
- the ratio of the number of hafnium atoms to the number of element J1 atoms can be set appropriately; for example, the ratio of the number of hafnium atoms to the number of element J1 atoms can be set to 1:1 or close to that.
- materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element J2 (here, element J2 is one or more selected from hafnium, silicon, aluminum, gadolinium, yttrium, lanthanum, strontium, etc.) to zirconium oxide.
- the ratio of the number of zirconium atoms to the number of atoms of element J2 can be set as appropriate, for example, the ratio of the number of zirconium atoms to the number of atoms of element J2 can be set to or near 1:1.
- piezoelectric ceramics having a perovskite structure such as lead titanate (PbTiO x (X is a real number greater than 0)), barium strontium titanate (BST), strontium titanate, lead zirconate titanate (PZT), strontium bismuthate tantalate (SBT), bismuth ferrite (BFO), or barium titanate can be used.
- Examples of materials that can have ferroelectricity include aluminum scandium nitride (Al1 - aScaNb (where a is a real number greater than 0 and less than 0.5, and b is 1 or a value close to 1; hereinafter, this may be referred to simply as "AlScN”)), Al-Ga-Sc nitride, and Ga-Sc nitride.
- AlScN aluminum scandium nitride
- Al-Ga-Sc nitride Al-Ga-Sc nitride
- Ga-Sc nitride examples include metal nitrides containing an element M1, an element M2, and nitrogen.
- the element M1 is one or more elements selected from aluminum, gallium, indium, and the like.
- the element M2 is one or more elements selected from boron, scandium, yttrium, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, europium, titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, and the like.
- the ratio of the number of atoms of the element M1 to the number of atoms of the element M2 can be set as appropriate.
- a metal oxide containing element M1 and nitrogen may exhibit ferroelectricity even without containing element M2. Examples of materials that may exhibit ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element M3 to the above-mentioned metal nitrides.
- the element M3 is one or more elements selected from magnesium, calcium, strontium, zinc, cadmium, and the like.
- the ratio of the number of atoms of element M1, the number of atoms of element M2, and the number of atoms of element M3 can be appropriately set. Since the above-mentioned metal nitrides contain at least a Group 13 element and nitrogen, which is a Group 15 element, the metal nitrides may be referred to as Group 13-15 ferroelectrics, Group 13 nitride ferroelectrics, etc.
- materials that can have ferroelectricity include perovskite-type oxynitrides such as SrTaO 2 N and BaTaO 2 N, and GaFeO 3 with a ⁇ -alumina structure.
- metal oxides and metal nitrides have been exemplified in the above explanation, the present invention is not limited to these.
- metal oxide nitrides in which nitrogen is added to the aforementioned metal oxides, or metal oxynitrides, in which oxygen is added to the aforementioned metal nitrides, can be used.
- a material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity for example, a mixture or compound made up of multiple materials selected from the materials listed above can be used.
- the insulating layer 106 can have a layered structure made up of multiple materials selected from the materials listed above.
- a material that exhibits ferroelectricity is not only called a ferroelectric, but also called a material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity.
- Metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in thin films of a few nanometers. Furthermore, metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in very small areas. Therefore, by using metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium, miniaturization of semiconductor devices can be achieved.
- a representative example of a metal oxide containing hafnium and zirconium is HfZrO X.
- a metal oxide in which Y (yttrium) is added to HfZrO X can also be used. Adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO X can enhance ferroelectricity.
- ferroelectric material a material that can exhibit ferroelectricity
- a layer of ferroelectric material may be referred to as a ferroelectric layer, a metal oxide film, or a metal nitride film.
- a device having such a ferroelectric layer, metal oxide film, or metal nitride film may be referred to as a ferroelectric device in this specification.
- Ferroelectricity is believed to be manifested when an external electric field displaces oxygen or nitrogen in crystals contained in the ferroelectric layer. It is also believed that the manifestation of ferroelectricity depends on the crystalline structure of the crystals contained in the ferroelectric layer. Therefore, for an insulating layer to manifest ferroelectricity, the insulating layer must contain crystals. It is particularly preferable for an insulating layer to contain crystals with an orthorhombic crystalline structure, as this will manifest ferroelectricity.
- the crystalline structure of the crystals contained in the insulating layer may be one or more selected from the group consisting of tetragonal, orthorhombic, monoclinic, and hexagonal.
- the insulating layer may also have an amorphous structure. In this case, the insulating layer may have a composite structure having both an amorphous structure and a crystalline structure.
- the content of the Group 3 element in an oxide containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium is preferably 0.1 atomic% to 10 atomic%, more preferably 0.1 atomic% to 5 atomic%, and even more preferably 0.1 atomic% to 3 atomic%.
- the content of the Group 3 element refers to the ratio of the number of atoms of the Group 3 element to the sum of the number of atoms of all metal elements contained in the layer.
- the Group 3 element is preferably one or more selected from scandium, lanthanum, and yttrium, and more preferably one or both of lanthanum and yttrium.
- the film thickness of the insulating layer 106 is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, even more preferably 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 10 nm or less (typically, 2 nm to 9 nm).
- metal oxides containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in a small area, making them preferable for the insulating layer 106.
- the ferroelectric layer can exhibit ferroelectricity even when its area (occupied area) in a plan view is 100 ⁇ m 2 or less, 10 ⁇ m 2 or less, 1 ⁇ m 2 or less, or 0.1 ⁇ m 2 or less.
- the ferroelectric layer may exhibit ferroelectricity even when its area is 10,000 nm 2 or less, or 1,000 nm 2 or less.
- Ferroelectrics are insulators that are polarized internally when an external electric field is applied, and the polarization remains even when the electric field is removed. For this reason, ferroelectric materials can be used as dielectrics to form non-volatile memory elements. Non-volatile memory elements that use ferroelectric materials are sometimes called "ferroelectric memory.”
- the method for forming the insulating layer is not particularly limited, and various methods can be used, such as vapor deposition, atomic layer deposition (ALD), CVD, sputtering, and spin coating.
- a metal element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, zinc, tantalum, nickel, titanium, iron, cobalt, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, iridium, strontium, lanthanum, etc., or an alloy containing the above-mentioned metal element as a component, or an alloy combining the above-mentioned metal elements.
- a nitride of the alloy or an oxide of the alloy can be used as the alloy containing the above-mentioned metal element as a component.
- a nitride of the alloy or an oxide of the alloy can be used.
- a semiconductor with high electrical conductivity typified by polycrystalline silicon containing an impurity element such as phosphorus, or a silicide such as nickel silicide.
- conductive materials containing nitrogen such as nitrides containing tantalum, nitrides containing titanium, nitrides containing molybdenum, nitrides containing tungsten, nitrides containing ruthenium, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, and nitrides containing titanium and aluminum;
- conductive materials containing oxygen such as ruthenium oxide, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel; and materials containing metal elements, such as titanium, tantalum, and ruthenium, are preferred because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation, have the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion, or maintain conductivity even after absorbing oxygen.
- Examples of conductive materials containing oxygen include indium oxide containing tungsten oxide (also referred to as indium oxide), indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide (also referred to as ITO), indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide doped with silicon (also referred to as ITSO), indium zinc oxide (also referred to as IZO (registered trademark)), and indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide.
- a conductive layer formed using a conductive material containing oxygen may be referred to as an oxide conductive layer.
- Conductive materials primarily composed of tungsten, copper, or aluminum are preferred due to their high conductivity.
- a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing oxygen. Also, a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing nitrogen. Also, a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing oxygen and a conductive material containing nitrogen.
- a conductive layer that functions as a gate electrode such as the conductive layer 114, may have a stacked structure that combines a material containing the metal element described above and a conductive material containing oxygen.
- the conductive material containing oxygen may be provided on the semiconductor layer 112 side.
- the conductive layers 107 and 109 are each conductive layers in contact with the semiconductor layer 112. Therefore, it is preferable to use a conductive material that is resistant to oxidation, a conductive material that maintains low electrical resistance even when oxidized, a metal oxide having conductivity (also referred to as an oxide conductor), or a conductive material that has the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion.
- a conductive material that is resistant to oxidation a conductive material that maintains low electrical resistance even when oxidized
- a metal oxide having conductivity also referred to as an oxide conductor
- a conductive material that has the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion examples include a conductive material containing nitrogen and a conductive material containing oxygen. This can suppress a decrease in the conductivity of the conductive layer 107 and the conductive layer 109.
- the conductive layers 107 and 109 can maintain their conductivity even when they absorb oxygen.
- a conductive material containing oxygen for the conductive layers 107 and 109, the conductive layers 107 and 109 can maintain their conductivity even when they absorb oxygen.
- an insulating layer containing excess oxygen is used as an insulating layer in contact with the conductive layers 107 and 109, this is preferable because the conductive layers 107 and 109 can maintain their conductivity.
- ITO, ITSO, IZO (registered trademark), etc. can be used for the conductive layers 107 and 109, respectively.
- the method for forming the conductive layer is not particularly limited, and various methods such as vapor deposition, ALD, CVD, sputtering, and spin coating can be used.
- semiconductor layer 112 As the semiconductor layer 112, a single crystal semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, an amorphous semiconductor, or the like can be used alone or in combination.
- semiconductor materials that can be used include silicon and germanium. Compound semiconductors such as silicon germanium, silicon carbide, gallium arsenide, and nitride semiconductors can also be used. Organic materials having semiconductor properties can also be used as compound semiconductors. Metal oxides (also referred to as oxide semiconductors) having semiconductor properties can also be used as compound semiconductors. Note that these semiconductor materials can also contain impurities as dopants.
- the semiconductor layer can be made of a semiconductor made of a single element or a compound semiconductor.
- semiconductors made of a single element include silicon and germanium.
- compound semiconductors include gallium arsenide and silicon germanium.
- Other examples of compound semiconductors include organic semiconductors and nitride semiconductors. Note that oxide semiconductors are also a type of compound semiconductor. Note that it is also possible to include impurities as dopants in these semiconductor materials.
- silicon that can be used for the semiconductor layer includes single-crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon, and amorphous silicon.
- polycrystalline silicon is low-temperature polysilicon (LTPS).
- the transistor can function as an n-type transistor.
- the transistor can function as a p-type transistor. Note that when the source and drain regions of the semiconductor layer 112 contain both n-type and p-type dopants, the conductivity type with the higher dopant concentration is more likely to be expressed.
- a two-dimensional material that functions as a semiconductor can be used for the semiconductor layer 112.
- Two-dimensional materials are also called layered materials and are a general term for a group of materials that have a layered crystal structure.
- a layered crystal structure is a structure in which layers formed by covalent or ionic bonds are stacked via bonds weaker than covalent or ionic bonds, such as van der Waals bonds.
- Layered materials have high electrical conductivity within each layer, that is, high two-dimensional electrical conductivity.
- Examples of the layered material include graphene, silicene, and chalcogenides.
- Chalcogenides are compounds containing chalcogen (an element belonging to Group 16).
- Examples of chalcogenides include transition metal chalcogenides and Group 13 chalcogenides.
- transition metal chalcogenides that can be used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor include molybdenum sulfide (typically MoS 2 ), molybdenum selenide (typically MoSe 2 ), molybdenum tellurium (typically MoTe 2 ), tungsten sulfide (typically WS 2 ), tungsten selenide (typically WSe 2 ), tungsten tellurium (typically WTe 2 ) , hafnium sulfide (typically HfS 2 ), hafnium selenide (typically HfSe 2 ), zirconium sulfide (typically ZrS 2 ), and zirconium selenide (typically ZrSe 2 ).
- MoS 2 molybdenum sulfide
- MoSe 2 molybdenum selenide
- MoTe 2 moly MoTe 2
- tungsten sulfide typically WS 2
- tungsten selenide
- the band gap of the metal oxide is preferably larger than the band gap of silicon (typically 1.1 eV), preferably 2.0 eV or more, and more preferably 2.5 eV or more.
- the off-state current of the transistor can be significantly reduced. Because an OS transistor has a small off-state current, the power consumption of the semiconductor device can be reduced. Note that the metal oxide used for the semiconductor layer will be described in detail in Embodiment 2.
- the method for forming the semiconductor layer is not particularly limited, and various methods such as vapor deposition, ALD, CVD, sputtering, and spin coating can be used.
- a metal oxide that can be used for a semiconductor layer of a transistor will be described.
- a layer containing a metal oxide can be used as a single layer or a stacked layer. Note that in a metal oxide having a stacked structure, the boundaries between stacked layers may be unclear, as will be described later.
- the metal oxide preferably contains at least indium (In) or zinc (Zn), and particularly preferably contains indium as the main component.
- the metal oxide preferably contains two or three elements selected from indium, element M, and zinc, and particularly preferably contains indium and zinc as the main components.
- the metal oxide contains indium and zinc as the main components and may further contain element M.
- the element M is a metal element or a metalloid element having a high bond energy with oxygen, for example, a metal element or a metalloid element having a bond energy with oxygen higher than that of indium.
- element M examples include aluminum, gallium, tin, yttrium, titanium, vanadium, chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, zirconium, molybdenum, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium, boron, silicon, germanium, and antimony.
- the element M contained in the metal oxide is preferably one or more of the above elements, more preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, tin, and yttrium, and even more preferably one or more selected from gallium and tin.
- the metal oxide preferably contains one or more selected from indium, gallium, and zinc.
- metal elements and metalloid elements may be collectively referred to as "metal elements," and the “metal elements” described in this specification and the like may include metalloid elements.
- metal oxides include indium zinc oxide (In-Zn oxide, also referred to as IZO (registered trademark)), indium tin oxide (In-Sn oxide, also referred to as ITO), indium titanium oxide (In-Ti oxide), indium gallium oxide (In-Ga oxide), indium gallium aluminum oxide (In-Ga-Al oxide), indium gallium tin oxide (In-Ga-Sn oxide, also referred to as IGTO), and indium aluminum zinc oxide (In-Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as IAZO).
- In-Zn oxide also referred to as IZO (registered trademark)
- ITO indium titanium oxide
- In-Ga oxide indium gallium oxide
- In-Ga-Al oxide indium gallium aluminum oxide
- IAZO indium aluminum zinc oxide
- IAZO indium aluminum zinc oxide
- Examples of usable metal oxides include indium tin zinc oxide (In-Sn-Zn oxide), indium titanium zinc oxide (In-Ti-Zn oxide), indium gallium zinc oxide (In-Ga-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGZO), indium tin oxide containing silicon oxide (ITSO), indium gallium tin zinc oxide (In-Ga-Sn-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGZTO), and indium gallium aluminum zinc oxide (In-Ga-Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGAZO or IAGZO).
- examples of usable metal oxides include gallium zinc oxide (Ga-Zn oxide, also referred to as GZO), aluminum zinc oxide (Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as AZO), gallium tin oxide (Ga-Sn oxide), and aluminum tin oxide (Al-Sn oxide).
- Ga-Zn oxide also referred to as GZO
- Al-Zn oxide also referred to as AZO
- Ga-Sn oxide gallium tin oxide
- Al-Sn oxide aluminum tin oxide
- Indium oxide can be used as the metal oxide.
- Gallium oxide, zinc oxide, and the like can also be used.
- the transistor By increasing the indium content in the metal oxide, the transistor can achieve a large on-state current and high frequency characteristics.
- the metal oxide can contain one or more metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table.
- the metal oxide can contain, in addition to indium, one or more metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table.
- Examples of metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table include metal elements belonging to the fifth period and the sixth period.
- metal elements include yttrium, zirconium, silver, cadmium, tin, antimony, barium, lead, bismuth, lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, and europium.
- Lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, and europium are called light rare earth elements.
- metal oxides can contain one or more nonmetallic elements.
- nonmetallic elements include carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and hydrogen.
- the metal oxide becomes highly crystalline, which can suppress the diffusion of impurities in the metal oxide. This therefore suppresses fluctuations in the electrical characteristics of the transistor and improves reliability.
- the formation of oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide can be suppressed. Therefore, carrier generation due to oxygen vacancies is suppressed, resulting in a transistor with a small off-state current. Furthermore, fluctuations in the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be suppressed, improving reliability.
- a structural example of a metal oxide that can increase the field-effect mobility of a transistor will be described.
- the metal oxide has indium oxide and IGZO on the indium oxide.
- IGZO containing nitrogen as the metal oxide.
- IGZO containing nitrogen can be formed by performing N 2 O plasma treatment during or after film formation.
- In-M-Zn oxide may be used as an example of a metal oxide.
- the metal oxide preferably has crystallinity.
- crystalline metal oxide structures include a c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC) structure, a polycrystalline (Poly-crystal) structure, and a nanocrystalline (nc) structure.
- CAAC c-axis aligned crystal
- Poly-crystal Poly-crystal
- nc nanocrystalline
- the crystallinity of the metal oxide used in the semiconductor layer is not particularly limited.
- the semiconductor layer may contain one or more of an amorphous semiconductor (a semiconductor having an amorphous structure), a single-crystal semiconductor (a semiconductor having a single-crystal structure), or a semiconductor having crystallinity other than single crystal (a microcrystalline semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, or a semiconductor having a crystalline region in part).
- the crystallinity of the semiconductor layer may help prevent deterioration of transistor characteristics.
- the crystallinity of the semiconductor layer can be analyzed, for example, by X-ray diffraction (XRD), transmission electron microscopy (TEM), or electron diffraction (ED). Alternatively, analysis can be performed by combining multiple of these techniques.
- XRD X-ray diffraction
- TEM transmission electron microscopy
- ED electron diffraction
- the metal oxide used in the semiconductor layer preferably has a CAAC structure.
- a CAAC structure is a crystal structure in which multiple microcrystals (typically multiple microcrystals having a hexagonal crystal structure) have a c-axis orientation and are connected without being oriented in the a-b plane. Furthermore, when a cross section of a metal oxide having a CAAC structure is observed using a high-resolution TEM image (also called a multi-beam interference image), it can be confirmed that metal atoms are arranged in layers in the crystalline portion. Therefore, a metal oxide having a CAAC structure can also be said to have a structure having layered crystalline portions.
- the CAAC structure is formed, for example, so that the c-axis is perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the surface or surface of the metal oxide on which it is formed.
- metal atoms are arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which it is formed.
- the c-axis is preferably within 90° ⁇ 20° (70° or more and 110° or less) relative to the surface on which it is formed, more preferably within 90° ⁇ 15° (75° or more and 105° or less), more preferably within 90° ⁇ 10° (80° or more and 100° or less), and even more preferably within 90° ⁇ 5° (85° or more and 95° or less).
- a group of bright spots that reflect the layered arrangement of metal atoms are observed in a cross-section of the metal oxide observed using a TEM image. Specifically, bright spots are observed to be arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which they are formed.
- spots (bright spots) indicating c-axis orientation are observed in the electron diffraction pattern.
- the FFT pattern obtained by performing fast Fourier transform (FFT) processing on the TEM image reflects reciprocal lattice spatial information similar to that of an electron diffraction pattern.
- a cross-sectional TEM image of a metal oxide having a CAAC structure is acquired, and an FFT pattern is created by performing FFT processing on each region within the cross-sectional TEM image.
- the crystal axis direction of each region can then be calculated from the created FFT pattern. Specifically, the direction of the line segment connecting two spots observed in the created FFT pattern that are high in brightness and approximately equidistant from the center is defined as the crystal axis direction.
- Regions where the crystal axis direction of each region calculated from the FFT pattern is preferably 70° to 110° (within 90° ⁇ 20°) relative to the surface to be formed, more preferably 75° to 105° (within 90° ⁇ 15°), more preferably 80° to 100° (within 90° ⁇ 10°), and even more preferably 85° to 95° (within 90° ⁇ 5°) can be considered to have a CAAC structure.
- metal oxides with a CAAC structure are viewed using TEM images in a direction perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed, triangular or hexagonal atomic arrangements are observed in the a-b plane, and the oxides are crystalline.
- the metal oxide preferably contains indium (In), and more preferably has a high In content.
- In indium
- In indium
- the metal oxide may also contain zinc.
- the metal oxide contains zinc, it becomes a highly crystalline metal oxide, for example, a metal oxide having a CAAC structure.
- In-Zn oxide can be used as the semiconductor layer.
- the metal oxide may contain element M.
- the metal oxide contains element M, the formation of oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide can be suppressed. This can improve the reliability of transistors that use metal oxide as semiconductor layers.
- the semiconductor layer can be made of In-Zn oxide containing a trace amount of element M.
- an In-Zn oxide containing element M can be used as the semiconductor layer.
- the composition of the formed metal oxide may differ from the composition of the sputtering target.
- the zinc content in the formed metal oxide may decrease to about 50% compared to the sputtering target.
- the ratio of the number of cycles of precursors containing each metal element can be set to match the target composition.
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- the ratio of the number of cycles of precursors containing each metal element can be set to match the target composition.
- the ratio of the number of cycles of precursors containing each metal element and the atomic ratio of each metal element in the deposited metal oxide film may not match.
- EDX EDX
- XPS inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry
- ICP-AES inductively coupled plasma atomic emission spectrometry
- analysis can be performed by combining multiple of these techniques. Note that for elements with low content, the actual content and the content obtained by analysis may differ due to analytical accuracy. For example, if the content of element M is low, the content of element M obtained by analysis may be lower than the actual content.
- Metal oxides can also be formed into a stacked structure of two or more layers.
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer has a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer, it is preferable that the second layer have a different composition from the first layer.
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer has a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer, it is preferable that the second layer have a different composition from the first and third layers.
- the first layer can have the same composition as the third layer.
- the first and third layers can have different compositions.
- the first to third layers can each be made of the metal oxides mentioned above.
- the second layer can be made of, for example, indium oxide, In-Zn oxide, or In-Zn oxide containing a trace amount of element M.
- Increasing the In content in the second layer can increase the on-state current and improve the frequency characteristics.
- the conduction band minimum of each of the first layer and the third layer is preferably located closer to the vacuum level than the conduction band minimum of the second layer.
- the energy of the conduction band minimum of each of the first layer and the third layer is preferably lower than the energy of the conduction band minimum of the second layer.
- the second layer is sandwiched between the first layer and the third layer, whose conduction band minimums are located closer to the vacuum level, and can function mainly as a current path (channel).
- the channel By sandwiching the second layer between the first and third layers, it is possible to reduce carriers trapped at the interface of the second layer and its vicinity. Furthermore, the channel can be moved away from the surface of the gate insulating layer, reducing the effects of surface scattering. This makes it possible to realize a buried channel transistor in which the channel is moved away from the insulating layer interface, thereby increasing field-effect mobility. Furthermore, the effects of interface states that may form on the back channel side are reduced, suppressing light degradation of the transistor (e.g., negative bias light degradation) and improving transistor reliability.
- the effects of interface states that may form on the back channel side are reduced, suppressing light degradation of the transistor (e.g., negative bias light degradation) and improving transistor reliability.
- the first and third layers can be made of a metal oxide with a higher Ga content than the second layer.
- Ga-Zn oxide or gallium oxide can be used.
- Increasing the Ga content of the first and third layers can position the conduction band minimum of each of the first and third layers closer to the vacuum level than the conduction band minimum of the second layer.
- the barrier properties of the first layer and the third layer against hydrogen can be improved. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of hydrogen from below the first layer or above the third layer into the second layer. Furthermore, by increasing the Ga content in the first layer and the third layer, it is possible to reduce impurities such as hydrogen or water contained in the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer due to heat or the like applied after its formation. Note that a similar effect may be achieved by using a metal oxide with a lower In content for the first layer and the third layer compared to the second layer.
- the third layer contains indium and gallium.
- the oxygen barrier properties of the first and third layers can be improved. This prevents oxygen from being released from the second layer where the channel is formed, and prevents the formation of oxygen vacancies in the second layer or an increase in the amount of oxygen vacancies in the second layer. This improves the electrical characteristics of the transistor.
- the resistivity of the first layer it may be possible to make the resistivity of the first layer higher than that of the second layer.
- the first layer is provided on the back channel side, providing a layer with high resistivity as the first layer can suppress a negative shift in threshold voltage or a decrease in on-current. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transistor is shifted positively, making it possible to make the transistor normally off. As a result, the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be improved, and the reliability of the transistor can be improved.
- the electron affinity or conduction band minimum can be determined from the ionization potential, which is the energy difference between the vacuum level and the top of the valence band, and the band gap.
- ultraviolet photoelectron spectroscopy UPS
- the first and third layers may be made of a metal oxide having a higher In content than the second layer. Also, one of the first and third layers may be made of a metal oxide having a higher In content than the second layer, and the other may be made of a metal oxide having a higher Ga content than the second layer.
- the first layer, second layer, and third layer can each be a stack of layers having the composition described above.
- the first layer can be configured by stacking a metal oxide with a high In content on a metal oxide with a high Ga content.
- the third layer can be configured by stacking a metal oxide with a high Ga content on a metal oxide with a high In content.
- the metal oxide can be formed using a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method, a vacuum deposition method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a pulsed laser deposition (PLD) method, an ALD method, or the like.
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- MBE molecular beam epitaxy
- PLD pulsed laser deposition
- ALD ALD method
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can be produced using two different film formation methods.
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can be produced using a first film formation method and a second film formation method.
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can have a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer.
- the metal oxide can be produced by forming the first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, and then forming the second layer on top of the first layer using a second film formation method.
- the first film formation method preferably causes less damage to the surface on which the metal oxide is formed than the second film formation method. This makes it possible to suppress the formation of a mixed layer at the interface between the metal oxide and the layer on which the metal oxide is formed. Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the incorporation of impurities such as silicon into the second layer formed on the first layer, the crystallinity of the metal oxide layer may be increased.
- Examples of the first film formation method include ALD, CVD, and MBE.
- Examples of CVD methods include plasma-enhanced CVD (PECVD), thermal CVD, photo-assisted CVD, and MOCVD.
- the MBE method is a film formation method that grows a thin film with a crystalline structure that reflects the crystalline system of the substrate, and is one of the film formation methods that causes minimal damage to the surface on which the film is formed.
- a wet method can also be used as the first film formation method.
- the wet method is one of the film formation methods that causes minimal damage to the surface on which the film is formed. Examples of wet methods include spray coating.
- the second film formation method is preferably a method capable of forming a crystalline metal oxide film. It is particularly preferable that the metal oxide film formed in this case has a CAAC structure. Examples of the second film formation method include sputtering and PLD. Because metal oxide films formed using sputtering tend to be crystalline, sputtering is preferred as the second film formation method.
- a metal oxide When a metal oxide is formed on a surface using the second film formation method, damage to the surface may cause alloying between components contained in the metal oxide and components contained in the layer on the surface. This alloying may result in the formation of a mixed layer at the interface between the metal oxide and the layer on the surface. This mixed layer may also be referred to as an alloyed region. The formation of a mixed layer may also be referred to as alloying.
- a mixed layer may be formed by particles (also called sputtering particles) emitted from a target or the like, or by energy imparted to the substrate by the sputtering particles.
- a metal oxide film is formed using the second deposition method on a silicon-containing insulating layer, such as a silicon oxide film, as the deposition surface, silicon may be mixed into the metal oxide.
- impurities such as silicon in the metal oxide may inhibit the crystallization of the metal oxide.
- using a metal oxide layer containing impurities in a transistor may adversely affect the initial characteristics or reliability of the transistor.
- even when the heat treatment described below is performed it is difficult to improve the crystallinity of the alloyed region.
- the metal oxide using the first film formation method before forming a metal oxide using the second film formation method, it is possible to prevent impurities from being mixed into the metal oxide layer. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent alloying with the layer on which the metal oxide is to be formed. This improves the initial characteristics and reliability of the transistor. Furthermore, it is possible to further increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer.
- a mixed layer may be formed at the interface between the first layer and the second layer.
- the mixed layer contains the components contained in the first layer and the components contained in the second layer.
- gallium oxide is used for the first layer
- a metal oxide containing indium is used for the second layer
- the mixed layer contains gallium and indium.
- the indium content in the second layer is higher than the indium content in the first layer
- the indium content in the mixed layer will be equal to or greater than the indium content in the first layer and equal to or less than the indium content in the second layer.
- the ALD method is suitable as the first film formation method because it can reduce damage to the surface to be formed compared to the sputtering method. Furthermore, the ALD method is a film formation method with superior coverage compared to the sputtering method, and using the ALD method as the film formation method for the first layer can improve the coverage of the metal oxide. Therefore, the metal oxide can be well coated on steps, openings, and the like with high aspect ratios.
- the first layer may be formed, for example, as a metal oxide with a microcrystalline or amorphous structure, which has lower crystallinity than a CAAC structure.
- the crystallinity of the first layer may be increased, with the second layer acting as a nucleus. This may increase the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide layer, including the area near the interface with the surface on which it is formed.
- the layer on which the film is formed is, for example, an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, or a hafnium oxide film.
- the film may be a conductive film such as a titanium nitride film, a tungsten film, or an ITSO film.
- the layer on which the film is formed does not need to be crystalline. If the layer is crystalline, it preferably has a crystal structure with low lattice matching with the metal oxide in the metal oxide layer.
- the first layer is preferably formed using the ALD method.
- ALD method we will explain a method for forming In-M-Zn oxide as the first layer using the ALD method.
- a source gas containing an indium-containing precursor is introduced into a reaction chamber, and the precursor is adsorbed onto the surface to be formed.
- an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant, and reacts with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than indium while leaving indium adsorbed to the substrate, forming a layer in which indium and oxygen are combined.
- a source gas containing a precursor containing element M is introduced into the reaction chamber and adsorbed onto the layer of indium and oxygen.
- an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant and reacted with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than element M while leaving element M adsorbed on the substrate, thereby forming a layer of element M and oxygen.
- a source gas containing a zinc-containing precursor is introduced into the reaction chamber and adsorbed onto the layer of combined element M and oxygen.
- an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant and reacts with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than zinc while leaving zinc adsorbed on the substrate, thereby forming a layer of combined zinc and oxygen.
- In-M-Zn oxide can be formed as a metal oxide on the layer to be formed using the ALD method.
- ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), water ( H2O ), etc. can be used as an oxidizing agent.
- Ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), etc. that do not contain hydrogen as an oxidizing agent, the amount of hydrogen mixed into the metal oxide can be reduced.
- the precursor-containing source gas after the precursor is adsorbed, it is preferable to stop the introduction of the precursor-containing source gas, purge the reaction chamber, and then discharge excess precursor and reaction products, etc. from the reaction chamber.
- it is also preferable to stop the introduction of the oxidant after the adsorbed precursor is reacted with the oxidant, purge the reaction chamber, and then discharge excess reactant and reaction products, etc. from the reaction chamber.
- ozone, oxygen, or water when used as a reactant or oxidant, this is not limited to the gas or molecular state, but also includes the plasma state, radical state, and ion state.
- the second layer is preferably formed using a sputtering method.
- In-M-Zn oxide can be used as a target for sputtering.
- oxygen or a mixture of oxygen and a noble gas can be used as the sputtering gas.
- the proportion of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas the amount of excess oxygen in the oxide film formed can be increased.
- the higher the ratio of the flow rate of oxygen gas to the total film-forming gas used during formation (hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow rate ratio), the more crystalline the metal oxide may be formed.
- oxygen-excess metal oxide When metal oxide is formed by sputtering, if the percentage of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas is more than 30% and less than 100%, preferably 70% to 100%, oxygen-excess metal oxide may be formed. A transistor using oxygen-excess metal oxide in the channel formation region can achieve relatively high reliability. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this. If the percentage of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas is 1% to 30%, preferably 5% to 20%, oxygen-deficient metal oxide is formed. A transistor using oxygen-deficient metal oxide in the channel formation region can achieve relatively high field-effect mobility.
- the substrate heating temperature is preferably, for example, 100°C or higher and 400°C or lower, and more preferably 200°C or higher and 300°C or lower.
- the thickness of the mixed layer formed at the interface between the layer on which the layer is formed and the metal oxide can be reduced, or the alloyed region formed at the interface between the layer on which the layer is formed and the metal oxide can be made thin enough to be difficult to observe.
- the thickness of the alloyed region can be set to 0 nm or more and 3 nm or less, preferably 0 nm or more and 2 nm or less, more preferably 0 nm or more and 1 nm or less, and even more preferably 0 nm or more and less than 0.3 nm.
- the thickness of the alloyed region can be calculated by performing a line analysis of the composition of the region and its surroundings using secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) or energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX).
- SIMS secondary ion mass spectrometry
- EDX energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy
- EDX line analysis is performed on the alloyed region and its surroundings, with the direction perpendicular to the surface on which the first layer is to be formed as the depth direction.
- the depth at which the quantitative value of a metal that is the main component of the first layer but is not the main component of the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed In if the first layer contains In
- the depth (position) of the interface between the region and the first layer is defined as the depth (position) of the interface between the region and the first layer.
- the depth at which the quantitative value of an element that is the main component of the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed but is not the main component of the first layer (e.g., Si) reaches half its maximum is defined as the depth (position) of the interface between the region and the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed. From the above, the thickness of the alloyed region can be calculated.
- the thickness is, for example, 0 nm or more and 3 nm or less, preferably 0 nm or more and 2 nm or less, more preferably 0 nm or more and 1 nm or less, and even more preferably 0 nm or more and less than 0.3 nm.
- the depth at which the silicon concentration is 50% of the maximum concentration of the silicon oxide film is defined as the interface, and the distance between the interface and the depth at which the silicon concentration decreases to 1.0 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm , preferably 5.0 ⁇ 10 atoms/ cm , more preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm , is defined as the thickness t.
- the thickness t is preferably 3 nm or less, more preferably 2 nm or less.
- the thickness t can be set within the above range.
- the alloyed region By reducing the alloyed region, it becomes possible to form a CAAC structure near the surface on which the structure is to be formed.
- Near the surface on which the structure is to be formed refers to, for example, a region that is more than 0 nm and less than 3 nm, preferably more than 0 nm and less than 2 nm, and more preferably 1 nm or more and less than 2 nm, approximately perpendicular to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed.
- the CAAC structure near the surface to be formed can sometimes be confirmed by observation using a TEM.
- a TEM For example, when observing a cross section of a metal oxide using a high-resolution TEM, bright spots arranged in layers parallel to the surface to be formed can be confirmed near the surface to be formed.
- the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can have a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer.
- the metal oxide When the metal oxide has a three-layer structure, the metal oxide can be produced by forming a first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, then forming a second layer using a second film formation method, and finally forming a third layer using the first film formation method.
- the CAAC structure can be formed in the region spanning the second layer and regions including at least a portion of each of the first and third layers.
- the first and third layers can have suitable crystallinity for use as semiconductor layers in transistors.
- metal oxides used as semiconductor layers increasing the In content can improve the on-state characteristics of the transistor, while achieving improved reliability by using a highly crystalline CAAC structure.
- the first and third layers use metal oxides with the same composition as the second layer. Using the same composition may make it easier for CAAC to form after heat treatment.
- the third layer can grow using the crystals of the second layer as nuclei or seeds. Therefore, even if a film formation method that is likely to impart crystallinity is not used as the film formation method for the third layer, the third layer can be crystallized.
- the metal oxide can have both high crystallinity and high coverage throughout the entire layer.
- the influence of the surface on which the second layer is formed is reduced, thereby increasing the crystallinity of the second layer and resulting in extremely excellent crystallinity. Therefore, even in the third layer, which is crystallized using the second layer as a nucleus or seed, a layer with extremely excellent crystallinity is formed.
- the third layer which is the uppermost layer of the metal oxide, may be in contact with the gate insulating layer.
- the crystallinity of the layer in contact with the gate insulating layer it is possible to increase carrier mobility when the transistor is in the on state.
- the first layer and the third layer each have high crystallinity, using the highly crystalline second layer as a nucleus or seed.
- the crystallinity of the first layer may be increased by heat treatment during the deposition of the second layer or after the deposition of the third layer.
- the crystallinity of the third layer may be increased by heat treatment during the deposition of the third layer or after the deposition of the third layer.
- the heat treatment described above has the function of assisting in increasing crystallinity.
- the second layer having a highly crystalline metal oxide serves as a nucleus or seed to increase the crystallinity of the upper and lower metal oxides (here, the first and third layers). This increases the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide.
- the second layer serves as a nucleus or seed to cause solid-phase growth of the upper and lower metal oxides, forming a highly crystalline metal oxide.
- the metal oxide formed using this film formation method here a CAAC film, can be referred to as Axial Growth CAAC (AG CAAC).
- a region having a CAAC structure be widely present throughout the entire layer.
- the region having a CAAC structure in the first layer is crystalline connected to a region having a CAAC structure in the second layer.
- the region having a CAAC structure in the third layer is crystalline connected to a region having a CAAC structure in the second layer.
- each of the first to third layers in the region having the CAAC structure, for example, cross-sectional observation using a high-resolution TEM confirms bright spots aligned parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is formed. Furthermore, it is preferable that the c-axis of the CAAC structure in each of the first to third layers is parallel or approximately parallel to the normal direction of the surface on which the metal oxide is formed.
- parts of the first layer or third layer may not crystallize.
- the metal oxide when the metal oxide has a three-layer structure, the metal oxide can also be produced by forming a first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, then forming a second layer using the first film formation method, and then forming a third layer using a second film formation method.
- metal oxides with a high In content tend to have a cubic crystal structure. Therefore, by using a metal oxide with a high In content in the second layer that contacts the third layer, it is possible to form crystals that reflect the crystal orientation of the third layer.
- the lattice mismatch between the crystals of the third layer and the crystals of the second layer is small. This allows the second layer to form crystals that reflect the orientation of the crystals of the third layer. In this case, for example, when observing a cross section of the metal oxide using a high-resolution TEM, bright spots arranged in layers parallel to the surface on which they are formed are observed in the second layer.
- the crystal structure of the second layer may be any of cubic, tetragonal, orthorhombic, hexagonal, monoclinic, and trigonal.
- the second layer is a layer containing indium oxide or a metal oxide containing a trace amount of the aforementioned element M
- the first layer contains gallium.
- the indium content in the first layer is lower than the gallium content.
- the indium content in the second layer is higher than the indium content in the third layer.
- the first layer and the second layer are formed using the first film formation method
- productivity can be increased.
- impurities typically moisture, etc.
- the first to third layers can have multiple stacked layers with different compositions.
- the first layer can be produced by forming a layer containing a metal oxide with a high Ga content using the first film formation method, and then forming a layer containing a metal oxide with a higher In content than the first layer using the first film formation method.
- microwave plasma treatment After forming a layer using the first film formation method, it is preferable to perform microwave plasma treatment.
- microwaves refer to electromagnetic waves having a frequency of 300 MHz or more and 300 GHz or less.
- microwave plasma processing refers to processing using, for example, a device with a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves.
- Microwave plasma processing can also be referred to as microwave-excited high-density plasma processing.
- the impurity concentration in the metal oxide can be reduced.
- impurities include hydrogen and carbon.
- the above example illustrates a configuration in which microwave plasma treatment is performed on a metal oxide in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, the present invention is not limited to this.
- the impurity concentration in the metal oxide can be reduced.
- the heat generated during microwave plasma treatment may increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide layer.
- Microwave plasma treatment is preferably carried out under reduced pressure, with the pressure preferably being 10 Pa or higher and 1000 Pa or lower, more preferably 50 Pa or higher and 700 Pa or lower, and even more preferably 100 Pa or higher and 400 Pa or lower.
- the treatment temperature is preferably room temperature (25°C) or higher and 750°C or lower, more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower, and can be 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
- the heating temperature of the substrate is preferably from room temperature (25°C) to 750°C, more preferably from 300°C to 500°C, and even more preferably from 400°C to 450°C.
- the heating temperature of the substrate is preferably from room temperature (25°C) to 750°C, more preferably from 300°C to 500°C, and even more preferably from 400°C to 450°C.
- Microwave plasma treatment can be performed using, for example, oxygen gas and argon gas.
- the main oxygen radicals can take three states: triplet oxygen (O( 3Pj )), singlet oxygen ( O ( 1D2 )), and oxygen ions ( O2 + ).
- oxygen ions act effectively in reducing the hydrogen concentration in metal oxides by microwave plasma treatment.
- the amount of oxygen radicals in each state varies depending on the oxygen flow rate ratio or pressure in the microwave plasma treatment. For example, under conditions of a low oxygen flow rate ratio and a low pressure, the amount of oxygen ions tends to increase.
- the oxygen flow rate ratio ( O2 /( O2 +Ar)) in microwave plasma processing is preferably greater than 0% and less than 10%, more preferably 0.5% to 5%, more preferably 0.5% to 3%, and typically more preferably 1%.
- the microwave plasma treatment time is preferably 1 minute or more and 60 minutes or less, more preferably 1 minute or more and 30 minutes or less, and even more preferably 1 minute or more and 10 minutes or less.
- oxygen gas By performing microwave plasma treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, oxygen gas can be converted into plasma using microwaves or high-frequency waves such as RF, and the oxygen radicals generated by converting the oxygen gas into plasma can act on the metal oxide.
- the action of plasma, microwaves, oxygen radicals, or the like can separate defects in the metal oxide where hydrogen has entered oxygen vacancies (hereinafter sometimes referred to as VOH ) into oxygen vacancies and hydrogen, thereby removing the impurity hydrogen from the metal oxide.
- VOH oxygen vacancies
- carbon bonded to oxygen, hydrogen, or the like can also be removed in some cases.
- microwave plasma treatment can reduce impurities such as carbon and hydrogen.
- oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide layer can be further reduced.
- microwave plasma treatment can improve the crystallinity of a layer formed using the first film formation method.
- active species such as oxygen radicals excited by microwaves arrive at the metal oxide surface, and a substitution reaction occurs between the active species and oxygen in the metal oxide.
- nuclei or seeds are formed.
- lateral growth of the nuclei or seeds is induced.
- oxygen typically oxygen ions
- Microwave plasma treatment causes the formation of nuclei or seeds and the lateral growth of the nuclei or seeds, improving the crystallinity of the metal oxide.
- a reaction occurs between some of the oxygen in the metal oxide that was present before the microwave plasma treatment and hydrogen in the metal oxide, in other words, the reaction "2H + O ⁇ H 2 O ⁇ " occurs, and the hydrogen can be removed as H 2 O (also referred to as dehydration or dehydrogenation). Since H 2 O is one of the factors that inhibit improvement of crystallinity, it is preferable to remove it from the metal oxide. By removing hydrogen in the metal oxide as H 2 O and reducing the hydrogen concentration in the metal oxide, it is also possible to promote improvement of crystallinity. Note that the hydrogen concentration in the metal oxide can be further reduced by increasing the temperature during microwave plasma treatment.
- the temperature for the heat treatment is, for example, preferably 100°C or higher and 750°C or lower, more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower, and even more preferably 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
- crystallinity can also be improved by plasma treatment containing oxygen gas.
- the crystallinity of the layer formed using the first film formation method By increasing the crystallinity of the layer formed using the first film formation method, the crystallinity of the layer formed on top of that layer can be further increased. Therefore, the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide can be increased.
- Oxygen supplied to metal oxides can take various forms, including oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, oxygen ions (charged oxygen atoms or oxygen molecules), and oxygen radicals (oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, or oxygen ions with an unpaired electron). It is preferable that the oxygen injected into the metal oxide be in one or more of the above forms, with oxygen radicals being particularly preferred.
- Heat treatment can increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide.
- the heat treatment referred to here is not limited to heat treatment.
- heat applied during the manufacturing process can be replaced with the above heat treatment.
- the heat treatment temperature can be, for example, 100°C to 800°C, preferably 250°C to 650°C, and more preferably 350°C to 550°C.
- a typical temperature is 400°C ⁇ 25°C (375°C to 425°C).
- the treatment time can be 10 hours or less, for example, 1 minute to 5 hours, or 1 minute to 2 hours. When an RTA apparatus is used, the treatment time can be, for example, 1 second to 5 minutes. It is expected that this heat treatment will repair atomic-level crystalline gaps in the CAAC structure of the second layer formed using the second film formation method with the third layer formed using the first film formation method.
- heating device used for heat treatment any device that heats the workpiece by thermal conduction or thermal radiation from a heating element such as a resistance heating element can be used.
- a heating element such as a resistance heating element
- an electric furnace or an RTA (Rapid Thermal Anneal) device such as an LRTA (Lamp Rapid Thermal Anneal) device or a GRTA (Gas Rapid Thermal Anneal) device can be used.
- An LRTA device is a device that heats the workpiece by radiating light (electromagnetic waves) emitted from a lamp such as a halogen lamp, metal halide lamp, xenon arc lamp, carbon arc lamp, high-pressure sodium lamp, or high-pressure mercury lamp.
- a GRTA device is a device that performs heat treatment using high-temperature gas.
- This heat treatment process may increase the crystallinity of the region having the CAAC structure in the third layer formed using the first film formation method. Furthermore, if this region is formed only below the third layer after film formation using the ALD method, this heat treatment process may cause this region to expand upward. In other words, this heat treatment may result in the formation of a region having the CAAC structure throughout the entire third layer.
- the heat treatment step converts at least a portion of the first layer or second layer formed using the first film formation method into CAAC. It is expected that the CAAC conversion is more likely to occur when the mixed layer formed in the first layer or second layer during the formation of the layer formed using the second film formation method acts as a nucleus or seed. It is preferable that the region in the first layer or second layer that converts into CAAC is wide, and it is preferable that the CAAC conversion extend to the vicinity of the surface on which it is formed.
- the CAAC conversion occurs from the top to the bottom of the first or second layer, it can be converted to CAAC up to the vicinity of the layer, regardless of the material or crystallinity of the layer on which it is formed. For example, even if the layer has an amorphous structure, the crystallinity of the first or second layer can be increased. Therefore, the method for manufacturing a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer is particularly suitable when the layer on which it is formed has an amorphous structure.
- the crystallinity of the metal oxide as a whole can be increased. It also reduces impurities in the metal oxide. By performing crystal growth in a state where the impurity concentration in the metal oxide has been reduced, further improvement in crystallinity can be achieved.
- metal oxides By increasing the crystallinity of metal oxides, it is possible to suppress an increase in the electrical resistance of transistors that use metal oxides as semiconductor layers, or to improve the initial characteristics of the transistors (particularly the on-state current), thereby realizing transistors suitable for high-speed operation. It is also possible to improve the reliability of the transistors and increase their on-state current.
- microwave plasma treatment and the heat treatment can be performed directly on the formed metal oxide, or can be performed after forming an insulating film or the like on the metal oxide.
- Examples of treatments for supplying oxygen include heat treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere or plasma treatment (including microwave plasma treatment) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere.
- oxygen can be supplied to the first or second layer formed using the first film formation method by forming a metal oxide film in an oxygen-containing atmosphere by sputtering. The formed metal oxide film can be removed immediately or left as is. When the formed metal oxide film is left as is, the metal oxide film can be used as a layer (second or third layer) provided on the first or second layer.
- the oxygen-containing atmosphere includes not only oxygen gas (O 2 ) but also an atmosphere containing a gas of an oxygen-containing compound such as ozone (O 3 ) or dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O).
- the substrate temperature during the plasma treatment is set to be from room temperature (25° C.) to 450° C.
- the metal oxide formed by the above manufacturing method has high crystallinity throughout the entire layer. Therefore, in the metal oxide, the boundaries between the stacked films of the first to third layers may not be visible. In particular, after heat treatment, it may be difficult to identify the boundaries between the stacked films. The presence or absence of boundaries between the stacked films can be confirmed using, for example, cross-sectional TEM or cross-sectional STEM (scanning transmission electron microscope), etc.
- metal oxides having a CAAC structure formed using the two aforementioned film formation methods may have higher film relative permittivity, film density, and film hardness than metal oxides having a CAAC structure formed using a single film formation method.
- a metal oxide having a CAAC structure formed using the two film formation methods described above in the channel formation region of a transistor it is possible to realize a transistor with excellent characteristics (e.g., a transistor with a large on-state current, a transistor with high field-effect mobility, a transistor with a small S value, a transistor with high frequency characteristics (also called f characteristics), a highly reliable transistor, etc.).
- a transistor with excellent characteristics e.g., a transistor with a large on-state current, a transistor with high field-effect mobility, a transistor with a small S value, a transistor with high frequency characteristics (also called f characteristics), a highly reliable transistor, etc.
- metal oxides can sometimes be formed by using the first film formation method and one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment.
- metal oxides can sometimes be formed without using the second film formation method.
- the crystallinity of the first layer can be increased by performing one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment. Therefore, the crystallinity of a second layer formed on the first layer using the first film formation method can be increased using the first layer as a nucleus or seed.
- the crystallinity of the metal oxide can be increased by performing one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment. Therefore, a CAAC structure can be formed in the metal oxide.
- the first layer formed using the first film formation method can be used as a nucleus or seed to cause solid-phase growth of the upper metal oxide, forming a highly crystalline metal oxide.
- Metal oxides formed using such film formation methods can also be referred to as AG CAAC.
- the metal oxide when it has a stacked structure of two or more layers, it can be produced by forming the metal oxide using a single film formation method.
- the metal oxide when the metal oxide has a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer, the metal oxide can be produced, for example, by forming the first layer and the second layer in this order using a sputtering method.
- Sputtering has a higher film formation rate than ALD, and therefore can improve productivity.
- the metal oxide when the metal oxide has a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer, the first layer to the third layer can be produced using a sputtering method.
- portions of the first layer to the third layer can also be deposited using ALD.
- one or both of the second layer and the third layer can be deposited using ALD.
- Metal oxide layer of transistor The metal oxide of this embodiment can be used as a semiconductor layer of a transistor, for example, as the semiconductor layer 112 of the transistor 120.
- Metal oxides used as semiconductor layers of transistors preferably have a CAAC structure.
- metal oxides with a CAAC structure metal atoms in the crystalline portion are arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which they are formed.
- Metal oxides with a CAAC structure are presumed to exhibit current anisotropy.
- current flows more easily in the a-axis direction than in the c-axis direction.
- metal oxides with a CAAC structure current flows more easily in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction.
- metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner parallel to or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed (e.g., the side surface of the insulating layer 108). It can also be expressed as the a-b plane of the CAAC structure being provided parallel to or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed. With this structure, the a-b plane of the CAAC structure can be provided along the direction of current flow in the channel of the transistor. This allows the on-state current of the transistor to be increased.
- the thickness of the metal oxide is, for example, preferably 3 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 5 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 10 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 10 nm to 70 nm, even more preferably 15 nm to 70 nm, even more preferably 15 nm to 50 nm, and even more preferably 20 nm to 50 nm.
- the thickness of the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer is preferably 1 nm to 20 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 15 nm, even more preferably 5 nm to 12 nm, and even more preferably 5 nm to 10 nm. Furthermore, the average thickness of the metal oxide in the channel formation region of the transistor is particularly preferably 2 nm to 15 nm.
- the first layer preferably has a thickness of, for example, 0.5 nm or more and 50 nm or less, more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 30 nm or less, even more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 50 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 30 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 2 nm or more and 20 nm or less. Furthermore, the first layer preferably has a thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 3 nm or less.
- the first layer preferably has a region with a film thickness of 0.1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, and more preferably has a region with a film thickness of 0.1 nm or more and 2 nm or less.
- the first layer has a region with a film thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 3 nm or less, and even more preferable that the first layer has a region with a film thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 2 nm or less.
- the second layer preferably has a thickness of, for example, 200 nm or less. Furthermore, if the second layer is layer-like, it preferably has a thickness of, for example, 1 nm or more and 200 nm or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and 100 nm or less, and more preferably 2 nm or more and 100 nm or less.
- the second layer can function as a crystal nucleus
- the second layer may not exist in a layered structure, but may be a collection of island-like regions. In such cases, for example, the island-like regions of the second layer exist discretely.
- oxygen vacancies ( VO ) and impurities are present in the channel formation region of a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer of a transistor, the electrical characteristics of the transistor are likely to fluctuate, which may result in poor reliability. Therefore, in order to stabilize the electrical characteristics of an OS transistor, it is effective to reduce the impurity concentration in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer. Furthermore, in order to reduce the impurity concentration in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer, it is preferable to also reduce the impurity concentration in a nearby film. Examples of impurities in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer include hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen. Note that the impurities in the metal oxide refer to, for example, elements other than the main component constituting the metal oxide. For example, an element with a concentration of less than 0.1 atomic % can be considered an impurity.
- the carbon concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm or less, preferably 5 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm or less, more preferably 3 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 atoms/ cm or less, more preferably 3 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm or less, and even more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 atoms/cm or less .
- the silicon concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is 1 ⁇ 10 20 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 3 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 3 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, and even more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the nitrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1 ⁇ 10 20 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- hydrogen contained in the metal oxide may react with oxygen bonded to metal atoms to form water, thereby forming oxygen vacancies. Hydrogen entering the oxygen vacancies may generate electrons as carriers. Furthermore, some of the hydrogen may bond with oxygen bonded to metal atoms to generate electrons as carriers. Therefore, a transistor using a metal oxide containing hydrogen is likely to exhibit normally-on characteristics. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce hydrogen as much as possible in the channel formation region of the metal oxide.
- the hydrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is less than 1 ⁇ 10 20 atoms/cm 3 , preferably less than 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 , and even more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 .
- the concentration of the alkali metal or alkaline earth metal in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2 ⁇ 10 16 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the semiconductor device 900 can function as a memory device.
- Figure 11 shows a block diagram illustrating an example configuration of a semiconductor device 900.
- the semiconductor device 900 shown in Figure 11 has a driver circuit 910 and a memory array 920.
- the memory array 920 has a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 that function as memory cells.
- Figure 11 shows an example in which the memory array 920 has a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 arranged in a matrix of p rows and q columns (p and q are each an integer of 2 or greater). By arranging a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 in a matrix, a memory device with a large storage capacity can be realized.
- the semiconductor device 10 in the first row and first column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[1,1]
- the semiconductor device 10 in the pth row and qth column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[p,q]
- the semiconductor device 10 in the pth row and first column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[p,1]
- the semiconductor device 10 in the first row and qth column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[1,q]
- the semiconductor device 10 in the rth row and sth column (r is an integer of 1 to p inclusive indicating an arbitrary row, and s is an integer of 1 to q inclusive indicating an arbitrary column) is indicated as semiconductor device 10[r,s].
- rows and columns extend in directions perpendicular to each other.
- the X direction (direction along the X axis) is referred to as a "row” and the Y direction (direction along the Y axis) as a "column,” but it is also possible to refer to the X direction as a “column” and the Y direction as a "row.”
- FIGS. 12A and 13A are block diagrams showing a portion of the memory array 920.
- FIGS. 12B and 13B are schematic perspective views showing a portion of the memory array 920.
- multiple semiconductor devices 10 functioning as memory cells can be aligned in the row and column directions within the memory array 920.
- multiple semiconductor devices 10 functioning as memory cells can be staggered within the memory array 920.
- the drive circuit 910 includes a PSW 931 (power switch), a PSW 932, and a peripheral circuit 915.
- the peripheral circuit 915 includes a peripheral circuit 911, a control circuit 912, and a voltage generation circuit 928.
- each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals can be added.
- Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside.
- Signal CLK is a clock signal.
- signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals.
- Signal CE is a chip enable signal
- signal GW is a global write enable signal
- signal BW is a byte write enable signal.
- Signal ADDR is an address signal.
- Signal WDA is write data
- signal RDA is read data.
- Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 can also be generated by control circuit 912.
- the control circuit 912 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the semiconductor device 900. For example, the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900. Alternatively, the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
- the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900.
- the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
- the voltage generation circuit 928 has the function of generating a negative voltage.
- the signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of the signal CLK to the voltage generation circuit 928. For example, when an H-level signal is given as the signal WAKE, the signal CLK is input to the voltage generation circuit 928, and the voltage generation circuit 928 generates a negative voltage.
- the peripheral circuit 911 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory array 920.
- the peripheral circuit 911 includes a row decoder 941, a column decoder 942, a row driver 923, a column driver 924, an input circuit 925, an output circuit 926, and a sense amplifier 927.
- the row decoder 941 and column decoder 942 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR.
- the row decoder 941 is a circuit for specifying the row to be accessed
- the column decoder 942 is a circuit for specifying the column to be accessed.
- the row driver 923 has the function of selecting the row specified by the row decoder 941.
- the column driver 924 has the function of writing data to the memory array 920, reading data from the memory array 920, and retaining the read data.
- the input circuit 925 has the function of holding the signal WDA.
- the data held by the input circuit 925 is output to the column driver 924.
- the output data of the input circuit 925 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory array 920.
- the data (Dout) read from the memory array 920 by the column driver 924 is output to the output circuit 926.
- the output circuit 926 has the function of holding Dout.
- the output circuit 926 also has the function of outputting Dout externally from the semiconductor device 900.
- the data output from the output circuit 926 is the signal RDA.
- PSW931 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 915.
- PSW932 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 923.
- the high power supply potential of the semiconductor device 900 is VDD
- the low power supply potential is GND (ground potential).
- VHM is a high power supply potential used to set the word line to a high level and is higher than VDD.
- the on/off of PSW931 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW932 is controlled by signal PON2.
- the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 915 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.
- [DOSRAM] 14A shows an example of a circuit configuration of a memory cell of a dynamic random access memory (DRAM).
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- a DRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as a dynamic oxide semiconductor random access memory (DOSRAM).
- Memory cell 951 has the same circuit configuration as semiconductor device 10. Therefore, semiconductor device 10 functions as DRAM or DOSRAM.
- Memory cell 951 includes a transistor M1 and a capacitor CA.
- a transistor having a front gate (sometimes simply referred to as a gate) and a back gate can be used as transistor M1.
- the back gate can be connected to a wiring that supplies a constant potential or a signal, or the front gate and back gate can be connected to each other.
- the first terminal of transistor M1 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CA, the second terminal of transistor M1 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M1 is connected to wiring WL.
- the second terminal of capacitor CA is connected to wiring CAL.
- the wiring BL functions as a bit line
- the wiring WL functions as a word line.
- the wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of the capacitor CA. When writing and reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to the wiring CAL.
- Data is written and read by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on the transistor M1, and bringing the wiring BL and the first terminal of the capacitor CA into a conductive state (a state in which current can flow).
- circuit configuration that can be applied to the memory cells of the semiconductor device 900 is not limited to the circuit configuration shown as memory cell 951.
- OS transistors have the characteristic of having an extremely low off-state current.
- the leakage current of transistor M1 can be made extremely low. That is, written data can be held by transistor M1 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cell can be made unnecessary.
- the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be held in memory cell 951.
- [NOSRAM] 14B shows an example circuit configuration of a two-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell memory cell.
- the memory cell 953 includes a transistor M2, a transistor M3, and a capacitor CB.
- a memory device having a gain cell memory cell in which the transistor M2 is an OS transistor is referred to as a nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM (NOSRAM).
- NOSRAM nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM
- the first terminal of transistor M2 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CB, the second terminal of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WBL, and the gate of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WL.
- the second terminal of capacitor CB is connected to wiring CAL.
- the first terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring RBL, the second terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring SL, and the gate of transistor M3 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CB.
- Wiring WBL functions as a write bit line
- wiring RBL functions as a read bit line
- wiring WL functions as a word line.
- Wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of capacitance CB.
- a low-level potential sometimes called a reference potential
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on transistor M2, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring WBL and the first terminal of the capacitor CB. Specifically, when transistor M2 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring WBL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitor CB and the gate of transistor M3. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WL, turning off transistor M2, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CB and the potential of the gate of transistor M3.
- Data is read by applying a predetermined potential to the wiring SL.
- the current flowing between the source and drain of transistor M3 and the potential of the first terminal of transistor M3 are determined by the potential of the gate of transistor M3 and the potential of the second terminal of transistor M3. Therefore, by reading the potential of the wiring RBL connected to the first terminal of transistor M3, the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3).
- FIG. 14C An example circuit configuration of such a memory cell is shown in Figure 14C.
- memory cell 954 the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL of memory cell 953 are combined into a single wiring BL, and the second terminal of transistor M2 and the first terminal of transistor M3 are connected to the wiring BL.
- memory cell 954 is configured to operate as a write bit line and a read bit line using a single wiring BL.
- Memory cell 955 shown in Figure 14D is an example in which the capacitance CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 953 have been omitted.
- memory cell 956 shown in Figure 14E is an example in which the capacitance CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 954 have been omitted. This configuration allows for increased integration of the memory cells.
- OS transistor for at least transistor M2.
- OS transistors for transistors M2 and M3.
- OS transistors have an extremely low off-state current, which allows written data to be retained by transistor M2 for a long time, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refresh operations of the memory cell can be eliminated. Furthermore, because the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be retained in each of memory cells 953, 954, 955, and 956.
- Memory cell 953, memory cell 954, memory cell 955, and memory cell 956, in which an OS transistor is used as transistor M2, are one embodiment of NOSRAM.
- Si transistor can be used as transistor M3.
- Si transistors can increase field-effect mobility and can also be used as p-channel transistors, allowing for greater freedom in circuit design.
- the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
- Figure 14F also shows a three-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell type memory cell 957.
- Memory cell 957 has transistors M4 to M6 and a capacitor CC.
- Memory cell 957 is also a form of NOSRAM.
- the first terminal of transistor M4 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CC, the second terminal of transistor M4 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M4 is connected to wiring WL.
- the second terminal of capacitor CC is connected to the first terminal of transistor M5 and wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of transistor M6, and the gate of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CC.
- the second terminal of transistor M6 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M6 is connected to wiring RWL.
- the wiring BL functions as a bit line
- the wiring WL functions as a write word line
- the wiring RWL functions as a read word line.
- the wiring GNDL is a wiring that applies a low-level potential.
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on transistor M4, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring BL and the first terminal of the capacitor CC. Specifically, when transistor M4 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitor CC and the gate of transistor M5. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WL, turning off transistor M4, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CC and the potential of the gate of transistor M5.
- Data is read by precharging the wiring BL to a predetermined potential, electrically floating the wiring BL, and applying a high-level potential to the wiring RWL. Because the wiring RWL is at a high-level potential, the transistor M6 is turned on, and the wiring BL and the second terminal of the transistor M5 are electrically connected. At this time, the potential of the wiring BL is applied to the second terminal of the transistor M5. The potential of the second terminal of the transistor M5 and the potential of the wiring BL change depending on the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5). By reading the potential of the wiring BL, the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5).
- Si transistors can be used as transistors M5 and M6. As mentioned above, Si transistors may have higher field-effect mobility than OS transistors depending on the crystalline state of the silicon used in the semiconductor layer.
- the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
- OS-SRAM 14G shows an example of a static random access memory (SRAM) using an OS transistor.
- SRAM static random access memory
- OS-SRAM oxide semiconductor SRAM
- a memory cell 958 shown in FIG. 14G is a memory cell of an SRAM capable of backing up data.
- Memory cell 958 includes transistors M7 to M10, transistors MS1 to MS4, and capacitors CD1 and CD2. Note that transistors MS1 and MS2 are p-channel transistors, and transistors MS3 and MS4 are n-channel transistors.
- the first terminal of transistor M7 is connected to wiring BL, and the second terminal of transistor M7 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS1, the first terminal of transistor MS3, the gate of transistor MS2, the gate of transistor MS4, and the first terminal of transistor M10.
- the gate of transistor M7 is connected to wiring WL.
- the first terminal of transistor M8 is connected to wiring BLB, and the second terminal of transistor M8 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS2, the first terminal of transistor MS4, the gate of transistor MS1, the gate of transistor MS3, and the first terminal of transistor M9.
- the gate of transistor M8 is connected to wiring WL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS1 is connected to the wiring VDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS2 is connected to the wiring VDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS3 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS4 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor M9 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD1, and the gate of transistor M9 is connected to wiring BRL.
- the second terminal of transistor M10 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD2, and the gate of transistor M10 is connected to wiring BRL.
- the second terminal of capacitor CD1 is connected to wiring GNDL, and the second terminal of capacitor CD2 is connected to wiring GNDL.
- Wiring BL and wiring BLB function as bit lines
- wiring WL functions as a word line
- wiring BRL is a wiring that controls the on/off states of transistors M9 and M10.
- the wiring VDL is a wiring that supplies a high-level potential
- the wiring GNDL is a wiring that supplies a low-level potential.
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL. Specifically, when the transistor M10 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BL, and the potential is written to the second terminal of the transistor M10.
- memory cell 958 forms an inverter loop using transistors MS1 and MS2, an inverted signal of the data signal corresponding to the potential is input to the second terminal of transistor M8. Because transistor M8 is on, the potential applied to wiring BL, i.e., the inverted signal of the signal input to wiring BL, is output to wiring BLB. Because transistors M9 and M10 are on, the potentials of the second terminals of transistors M7 and M8 are held in the first terminals of capacitors CD2 and CD1, respectively. Subsequently, a low-level potential is applied to wiring WL and a low-level potential is applied to wiring BRL, turning off transistors M7 to M10, thereby holding the potentials of the first terminals of capacitors CD1 and CD2.
- Data is read by precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to a predetermined potential, then applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL.
- the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CD1 is refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BLB.
- the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CD2 is also refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BL.
- the potentials of the wiring BL and wiring BLB change from the precharged potentials to the potentials of the first terminal of the capacitor CD2 and the first terminal of the capacitor CD1, respectively, so the potential held in the memory cell can be read from the potential of the wiring BL or wiring BLB.
- OS transistors as transistors M7 to M10. This allows written data to be held for a long time by transistors M7 to M10, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cells can be eliminated.
- Si transistors can be used as transistors MS1 to MS4.
- the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 can be provided on the same plane. It is also preferable to provide the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 in an overlapping manner, as shown in Figure 15A. By providing the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 in an overlapping manner, the signal propagation distance can be shortened. It is also possible to provide multiple layers of memory arrays 920 on top of the drive circuit 910, as shown in Figure 15B.
- Figure 16 shows a block diagram of the arithmetic unit 960.
- the arithmetic unit 960 shown in Figure 16 can be applied to, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
- the arithmetic unit 960 can also be applied to processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
- processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
- the arithmetic device 960 shown in Figure 16 has an ALU 991 (ALU: Arithmetic logic unit, arithmetic circuit), an ALU controller 992, an instruction decoder 993, an interrupt controller 994, a timing controller 995, a register 996, a register controller 997, a bus interface 998, a cache 999, and a cache interface 989 on a substrate 990.
- the substrate 990 may be a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, or the like. It may also have a rewritable ROM and a ROM interface.
- the cache 999 and cache interface 989 may also be provided on separate chips.
- the cache 999 is connected to the main memory provided on a separate chip via a cache interface 989.
- the cache interface 989 has the function of supplying a portion of the data held in the main memory to the cache 999.
- the cache interface 989 also has the function of outputting a portion of the data held in the cache 999 to the ALU 991 or register 996, etc. via the bus interface 998.
- a memory array 920 can be provided stacked on the arithmetic unit 960.
- the memory array 920 can be used as a cache.
- the cache interface 989 may have the function of supplying data held in the memory array 920 to the cache 999.
- a drive circuit 910 be included as part of the cache interface 989.
- the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 16 is merely one example of a simplified configuration, and actual arithmetic devices 960 have a wide variety of configurations depending on their applications.
- a multi-core configuration with 16 or more, preferably 32 or more, and even more preferably 64 or more cores is preferable.
- the number of bits that the arithmetic device 960 can handle in its internal computation circuit, data bus, etc. can be, for example, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, 64 bits, etc.
- Instructions input to the arithmetic unit 960 via the bus interface 998 are input to the instruction decoder 993, decoded, and then input to the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995.
- the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995 perform various controls based on the decoded instructions. Specifically, the ALU controller 992 generates signals to control the operation of the ALU 991. Furthermore, while the arithmetic unit 960 is executing a program, the interrupt controller 994 determines and processes interrupt requests from external input/output devices, peripheral circuits, etc. based on their priority, mask status, etc. The register controller 997 generates the address of the register 996 and performs read and write operations on the register 996 depending on the state of the arithmetic unit 960.
- the timing controller 995 also generates signals that control the timing of the operations of the ALU 991, ALU controller 992, instruction decoder 993, interrupt controller 994, and register controller 997.
- the timing controller 995 includes an internal clock generation unit that generates an internal clock signal based on a reference clock signal, and supplies the internal clock signal to the various circuits mentioned above.
- the register controller 997 selects the holding operation in the register 996 in accordance with instructions from the ALU 991. That is, it selects whether the memory cells in the register 996 will hold data using flip-flops or capacitance. If holding data using flip-flops is selected, power is supplied to the memory cells in the register 996. If holding data using capacitance is selected, the data is rewritten to the capacitance, and the power supply to the memory cells in the register 996 can be stopped.
- FIGS 17A and 17B show perspective views of a semiconductor device 970A.
- the semiconductor device 970A has an element layer 930 on which a memory array is provided above the computing device 960.
- the element layer 930 is provided with memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3.
- the computing device 960 and each memory array have overlapping regions.
- Figure 17B shows the computing device 960 and element layer 930 separated.
- connection distance between them can be shortened. This increases the communication speed between them. In addition, the short connection distance reduces power consumption.
- the element layer 930 having a memory array and the arithmetic device 960 As a method for stacking the element layer 930 having a memory array and the arithmetic device 960, it is possible to use a method in which the element layer 930 having a memory array is stacked directly on the arithmetic device 960 (also known as monolithic stacking), or a method in which the arithmetic device 960 and the element layer 930 are formed on different substrates, the two substrates are bonded together, and the connection is made using through-vias or conductive film bonding technology (such as Cu-Cu bonding).
- the former method does not require consideration of misalignment during bonding, and therefore not only can the chip size be reduced, but manufacturing costs can also be reduced.
- the arithmetic device 960 does not have a cache 999, and the memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3 provided in the element layer 930 can each be used as a cache.
- memory array 920L1 can be used as an L1 cache (also called a level 1 cache)
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- L1 cache also called a level 1 cache
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- L1 cache also called a level 1 cache
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- each memory array provided in the element layer 930 can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory.
- Main memory has a larger capacity than the cache and is accessed less frequently.
- drive circuits 910L1, 910L2, and 910L3 are provided.
- Drive circuit 910L1 is connected to memory array 920L1 via connection electrode 940L1.
- drive circuit 910L2 is connected to memory array 920L2 via connection electrode 940L2, and drive circuit 910L3 is connected to memory array 920L3 via connection electrode 940L3.
- the drive circuit 910L1 can function as part of the cache interface 989. It is also possible to configure the drive circuit 910L1 to be connected to the cache interface 989. Similarly, the drive circuit 910L2 and the drive circuit 910L3 can also function as part of the cache interface 989 or be configured to be connected to it.
- the control circuit 912 of each drive circuit 910 determines whether the memory array 920 functions as a cache or as main memory. Based on a signal supplied from the arithmetic device 960, the control circuit 912 can cause part of the memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 to function as RAM.
- the semiconductor device 900 can cause part of the memory array 920 to function as a cache, and the other part to function as main memory. In other words, the semiconductor device 900 can function as both a cache and a main memory.
- the semiconductor device 900 according to one aspect of the present invention can function as, for example, a universal memory.
- Figure 18A shows a perspective view of the semiconductor device 970B.
- one memory array 920 can be divided into multiple areas, each of which can be used for different functions.
- Figure 18A shows an example in which area L1 is used as an L1 cache, area L2 as an L2 cache, and area L3 as an L3 cache.
- the capacity of each of areas L1 to L3 can be changed depending on the situation. For example, if you want to increase the capacity of the L1 cache, you can achieve this by increasing the area of area L1. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the efficiency of calculation processing and increase processing speed.
- Figure 18B shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 970C.
- Semiconductor device 970C has an element layer 930L1 having memory array 920L1 stacked on top of it, an element layer 930L2 having memory array 920L2 on top of that, and an element layer 930L3 having memory array 920L3 on top of that.
- Memory array 920L1 which is physically closest to the computing device 960, can be used as a higher-level cache, and memory array 920L3, which is farthest, can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. With this configuration, the capacity of each memory array can be increased, thereby further improving processing power.
- Figure 19 shows a conceptual diagram explaining the hierarchy of memory devices used in semiconductor devices such as computers.
- the conceptual diagram explaining the hierarchy of memory devices is represented by a triangle, with memory devices located higher in the triangle requiring faster operating speeds, and memory devices located lower in the triangle requiring larger memory capacities and higher recording densities.
- FIG 19 from the top layer of the triangle, there are memories integrated as registers into the CPU, GPU, and NPU processing units, cache memory (sometimes simply referred to as cache, and typically L1, L2, and L3 caches), main memory such as DRAM, and storage memory such as 3D NAND and hard disks (also known as HDDs: hard disk drives).
- cache memory sometimes simply referred to as cache, and typically L1, L2, and L3 caches
- main memory such as DRAM
- storage memory such as 3D NAND and hard disks (also known as HDDs: hard disk drives).
- Registers are used for temporary storage of calculation results, and is therefore frequently accessed by the arithmetic processing unit. Therefore, fast operating speeds are required rather than large storage capacities. Registers also have the function of storing setting information for the arithmetic processing unit.
- Cache memory has the function of duplicating and storing a portion of the data stored in DRAM. By duplicating frequently used data and storing it in cache memory, it is possible to increase the speed of access to the data. Cache memory requires less storage capacity than DRAM, but is required to have a faster operating speed than DRAM. Data rewritten in cache memory is duplicated and supplied to DRAM. Note that while Figure 19 only shows up to the L3 cache, the cache memory is not limited to this. For example, an OS memory according to one aspect of the present invention is also suitable for the LLC (Last Level cache) or FLC (Final Level cache), which are the lowest level caches.
- LLC Last Level cache
- FLC Fluor Level cache
- DRAM has the function of storing programs, data, etc. read from 3D NAND.
- 3D NAND has the ability to store data that requires long-term storage, various programs used in computing devices (for example, artificial neural network models), and more. Therefore, 3D NAND requires large storage capacity and high recording density rather than fast operating speeds.
- Hard disks have large storage capacity and are non-volatile.
- SSDs solid-state drives
- the OS memory according to one embodiment of the present invention is capable of long-term data retention. Therefore, it is suitable for the Target 1 area shown in Figure 19.
- Target 1 also includes part of the cache (L1, L2, L3) and part of the 3D NAND.
- Target 1 includes the boundary area between the DRAM and 3D NAND, and the boundary area between the DRAM and the cache (L1, L2, L3).
- the OS memory according to one embodiment of the present invention has a high operating speed, it can achieve excellent write and read operations. Therefore, it can also be used for the Target 2 area shown in Figure 19.
- DRAM requires refresh operations and is a destructive readout storage device, so it consumes more power than other storage devices. Therefore, a configuration that does not use DRAM can reduce power consumption. This configuration can reduce power consumption to one-hundredth or even one-thousandth of that of a configuration that uses DRAM. Therefore, by deploying information processing devices, including supercomputers (also called high performance computers (HPCs)), computers, servers, and the like, that employ such a configuration worldwide, global warming can be mitigated.
- supercomputers also called high performance computers (HPCs)
- HPCs high performance computers
- the OS memory according to one aspect of the present invention can be applied to a wide range of memories, from memories integrated as registers in arithmetic processing units such as CPUs, GPUs, and NPUs, to memories in the boundary area between DRAM and 3D NAND.
- the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)).
- the electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.
- FIG. 20A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted.
- Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 20A has semiconductor device 710 inside mold 711.
- FIG. 20A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700.
- Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714.
- Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.
- the semiconductor device 710 also includes a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716.
- the memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other.
- the stacked configuration of the drive circuit layer 715 and the memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration.
- the layers can be connected without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
- TSV Through Silicon Via
- bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
- the semiconductor device 900 can be used as the semiconductor device 710. Therefore, the driver circuit 910 can be used as the driver circuit layer 715.
- the memory array 920 can be used as the memory layer 716.
- the semiconductor device 970A, the semiconductor device 970B, the semiconductor device 970C, or the like can be used as the semiconductor device 710.
- connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins.
- Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).
- the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked.
- OS transistors By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency.
- the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time
- the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange.
- Si transistors when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.
- the semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die.
- a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes.
- Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN).
- Si silicon
- SiC silicon carbide
- GaN gallium nitride
- a die obtained from a silicon substrate also called a silicon wafer
- a silicon die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.
- Figure 20B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730.
- Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module).
- Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.
- Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM).
- Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), NPU (Neural Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
- CPU Central Processing Unit
- GPU Graphics Processing Unit
- NPU Neurological Processing Unit
- FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
- the package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate.
- the interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.
- the interposer 731 has multiple wiring lines and functions to connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches.
- the multiple wiring lines are provided in a single layer or multiple layers.
- the interposer 731 also functions to connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732.
- the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate” or "intermediate substrate.”
- through electrodes are provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 are connected using these through electrodes.
- TSVs can also be used as through electrodes.
- the interposer on which the HBM is mounted must have fine, high-density wiring. Therefore, it is preferable to use a silicon interposer for the interposer on which the HBM is mounted.
- SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.
- heat sink heat sink
- the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.
- electrodes 733 can also be provided on the bottom of the package substrate 732.
- Figure 20B shows an example in which the electrodes 733 are formed from solder balls. By providing solder balls in a matrix on the bottom of the package substrate 732, BGA (Ball Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.
- the electrodes 733 can also be formed from conductive pins. By providing conductive pins in a matrix on the bottom of the package substrate 732, PGA (Pin Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.
- Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA.
- mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).
- [Large computer] 21A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600.
- the mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620.
- the mainframe computer 5600 is sometimes called a supercomputer.
- Figure 21B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620.
- the computer 5620 is mounted on a motherboard 5630.
- the motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals.
- a PC card 5621 is inserted into the slot 5631.
- the PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to the motherboard 5630.
- FIG 21C shows an example of a PC card 5621.
- PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, storage device, etc.
- PC card 5621 has board 5622 and connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629 mounted on board 5622. Note that Figure 21C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.
- connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630.
- the connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.
- Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621.
- Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface).
- Examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).
- the electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and the electronic component 5626 can be connected to the board 5622 by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on the board 5622.
- Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering.
- Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs.
- Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730.
- Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device.
- Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.
- the mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for, for example, artificial intelligence learning and inference.
- the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitable for space equipment.
- a semiconductor device for use in space equipment preferably includes an OS transistor.
- OS transistors exhibit small changes in electrical characteristics due to radiation exposure. That is, they have high radiation resistance and are therefore suitable for environments where radiation may be incident.
- OS transistors are suitable for use in outer space.
- OS transistors can be used as transistors constituting semiconductor devices installed in space shuttles, artificial satellites, or space probes.
- Examples of radiation include X-rays and neutron rays.
- outer space refers to an altitude of 100 km or higher, for example, and the outer space described in this specification includes one or more of the thermosphere, mesosphere, and stratosphere.
- Figure 22A shows an artificial satellite 6800 as an example of space equipment.
- the artificial satellite 6800 has a body 6801, a solar panel 6802, an antenna 6803, a secondary battery 6805, and a control device 6807. Note that Figure 22A also shows a planet 6804 in space.
- the secondary battery 6805 can also be provided with a battery management system (also referred to as BMS) or a battery control circuit.
- a battery management system also referred to as BMS
- a battery control circuit Using an OS transistor in the battery management system or battery control circuit described above is preferable because it consumes low power and has high reliability even in space.
- outer space is an environment with radiation levels more than 100 times higher than on Earth.
- radiation include electromagnetic waves (electromagnetic radiation) such as X-rays and gamma rays, as well as particle radiation such as alpha rays, beta rays, neutron rays, proton rays, heavy ion rays, and meson rays.
- the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate is generated.
- the amount of power generated is small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate will not be generated.
- a secondary battery 6805 be provided on the satellite 6800.
- the solar panel is sometimes called a solar cell module.
- Satellite 6800 can generate a signal.
- the signal is transmitted via antenna 6803, and can be received, for example, by a receiver located on the ground or by another satellite.
- the position of the receiver that received the signal can be determined.
- satellite 6800 can constitute a satellite positioning system.
- the control device 6807 also has a function of controlling the satellite 6800.
- the control device 6807 is configured using, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device.
- a semiconductor device including an OS transistor which is one embodiment of the present invention, is preferably used for the control device 6807.
- the electrical characteristics of an OS transistor change less when exposed to radiation than those of a Si transistor. In other words, an OS transistor is highly reliable and suitable even in an environment where radiation may be incident.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can be configured to include a sensor.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting sunlight reflected off an object on the ground.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting thermal infrared rays emitted from the earth's surface.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can function as, for example, an Earth observation satellite.
- an artificial satellite is used as an example of space equipment; however, the present invention is not limited thereto.
- a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitable for space equipment such as a spaceship, a space capsule, or a space probe.
- OS transistors have the advantages of being able to achieve a wider memory bandwidth and having higher radiation resistance compared to Si transistors.
- a semiconductor device is suitable for a storage system applied to, for example, a data center.
- Data centers are required to perform long-term management of data, such as ensuring the immutability of data.
- Managing long-term data requires larger buildings, such as installing storage and servers for storing huge amounts of data, ensuring a stable power supply for maintaining the data, and ensuring cooling equipment required for maintaining the data.
- a semiconductor device in a storage system applied to a data center, it is possible to reduce the power required to store data and to miniaturize the semiconductor device that stores the data. This makes it possible to miniaturize the storage system, the power supply for storing data, and the cooling equipment. This allows for space savings in the data center.
- the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention consumes less power, and therefore heat generation from the circuit can be reduced. This reduces adverse effects of the heat generation on the circuit itself, peripheral circuits, and modules. Furthermore, by using a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention, a data center that operates stably even in a high-temperature environment can be realized. This improves the reliability of the data center.
- Figure 22B shows a storage system applicable to a data center.
- the storage system 6000 shown in Figure 22B has multiple servers 6001sb as hosts 6001 (illustrated as Host Computers). It also has multiple storage devices 6003md as storage 6003 (illustrated as Storage).
- the host 6001 and storage 6003 are shown connected via a storage area network 6004 (illustrated as SAN: Storage Area Network) and a storage control circuit 6002 (illustrated as Storage Controller).
- SAN Storage Area Network
- the host 6001 corresponds to a computer that accesses data stored in the storage 6003.
- the hosts 6001 can be connected to each other via a network.
- Storage 6003 uses flash memory to reduce data access speed, i.e., the time required to store and output data, but this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage.
- data access speed i.e., the time required to store and output data
- this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage.
- storage systems typically provide cache memory within the storage to reduce the time required to store and output data.
- the aforementioned cache memory is used within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003. Data exchanged between the host 6001 and storage 6003 is stored in the cache memory within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003, and then output to the host 6001 or storage 6003.
- OS transistors as transistors for storing data in the cache memory and maintaining a potential corresponding to the data
- the frequency of refreshes can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced.
- stacking the memory cell array miniaturization is possible.
- a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention to one or more selected from electronic components, electronic devices, mainframe computers, space equipment, and data centers, it is expected that power consumption can be reduced. Therefore, while energy demand is expected to increase with the improvement in performance or integration of semiconductor devices, the use of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can also reduce emissions of greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide (CO 2 ). Furthermore, the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is effective as a countermeasure against global warming due to its low power consumption.
- CO 2 greenhouse gases
Landscapes
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本発明の一態様は、半導体装置に関する。 One aspect of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device.
なお、本発明の一態様は、上記の技術分野に限定されない。本明細書等で開示する本発明の一態様の技術分野としては、半導体装置、表示装置、発光装置、蓄電装置、記憶装置、電子機器、照明装置、入力装置、入出力装置、それらの駆動方法、又はそれらの製造方法、を一例として挙げることができる。 Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, and driving methods thereof or manufacturing methods thereof.
近年、LSI、CPU、メモリ(記憶装置)などの半導体装置の開発が進められている。これらの半導体装置は、コンピュータ、携帯情報端末など様々な電子機器に使用されている。また、メモリは、演算処理実行時の一時記憶、データの長期記憶など、用途に応じて様々な記憶方式のメモリが開発されている。代表的な記憶方式のメモリとして、DRAM、SRAM、フラッシュメモリなどがある。 In recent years, development of semiconductor devices such as LSIs, CPUs, and memory (storage devices) has progressed. These semiconductor devices are used in a variety of electronic devices, including computers and personal digital assistants. Furthermore, various memory storage methods have been developed to suit different applications, such as temporary storage during processing and long-term data storage. Typical memory storage methods include DRAM, SRAM, and flash memory.
また、扱われるデータ量の増大に伴って、より大きな記憶容量を有する記憶装置が求められている。特許文献1および非特許文献1では、トランジスタを積層して形成したメモリセルが開示されている。加えて、記憶装置には、データの書き込み速度及び読み出し速度の向上が求められている。 Furthermore, as the amount of data handled increases, there is a demand for memory devices with larger storage capacities. Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1 disclose memory cells formed by stacking transistors. In addition, there is a demand for memory devices with improved data write and read speeds.
本発明の一態様は、記憶容量が大きい記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、占有面積が小さい記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、記憶密度の高い記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、動作速度の速い記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、信頼性が高い記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、消費電力が少ない記憶装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、新規な記憶装置を提供することを課題の一つとする。 An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a storage device with a large storage capacity. Alternatively, an object is to provide a storage device with a small occupation area. Alternatively, an object is to provide a storage device with high storage density. Alternatively, an object is to provide a storage device with high operating speed. Alternatively, an object is to provide a storage device with high reliability. Alternatively, an object is to provide a storage device with low power consumption. Alternatively, an object is to provide a novel storage device.
なお、上記課題の記載は、他の課題の存在を妨げるものではない。他の課題は、当業者であれば明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと見いだせるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、他の課題を抽出することが可能である。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの課題(上記課題及び他の課題)の全てを解決する必要はないものとする。 Note that the description of the above problems does not preclude the existence of other problems. Those skilled in the art would naturally find these other problems from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc., and it is possible to extract these other problems from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc. Note that one aspect of the present invention does not necessarily need to solve all of these problems (the above problems and other problems).
(1)本発明の一態様は、第1容量素子と、第1トランジスタと、を有する半導体装置であって、第1導電層上に設けられた第1絶縁層と、第1絶縁層を貫通し第1導電層に達する第1開口と、第1導電層と重なる領域及び第1開口において第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第2導電層と、第2導電層上に設けられた第2絶縁層と、第2絶縁層の一部を介して第2導電層と重なる領域及び第2絶縁層の他の一部を介して第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第3導電層と、第3導電層上に設けられた第3絶縁層と、第3絶縁層上に設けられた第4導電層と、第3絶縁層を貫通し第3導電層に達する第2開口と、第3導電層と電気的に接続する領域、第4導電層と電気的に接続する領域及び第2開口において第3絶縁層の側面に沿うチャネル形成領域を有する半導体層と、半導体層上に設けられた第4絶縁層と、第4絶縁層の一部を介してトランジスタのチャネル形成領域と重なる領域を有する第5導電層と、を有し、第1開口及び第2開口それぞれの平面視において、第1方向の長さと、第1方向と直交する第2方向の長さが異なる半導体装置である。 (1) One aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device having a first capacitance element and a first transistor, comprising: a first insulating layer provided on a first conductive layer; a first opening penetrating the first insulating layer and reaching the first conductive layer; a second conductive layer having a region overlapping the first conductive layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer in the first opening; a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer; a third conductive layer having a region overlapping the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer via another portion of the second insulating layer; a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer; The semiconductor device includes a fourth conductive layer provided on the edge layer, a second opening that penetrates the third insulating layer and reaches the third conductive layer, a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer, and a channel formation region along the side of the third insulating layer in the second opening, a fourth insulating layer provided on the semiconductor layer, and a fifth conductive layer having a region that overlaps with the channel formation region of the transistor via a portion of the fourth insulating layer, and the first opening and the second opening have different lengths in a first direction and a second direction perpendicular to the first direction when viewed in plan.
また、(1)において、例えば、第2導電層は第1容量素子の一方の電極として機能し、第3導電層は第1容量素子の他方の電極として機能し、第3導電層は第1トランジスタのソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、第4導電層は第1トランジスタのソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。 Furthermore, in (1), for example, the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element, the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element, the third conductive layer functions as one of the source electrode or drain electrode of the first transistor, and the fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrode or drain electrode of the first transistor.
また、(1)において、第2方向の長さは、第1方向の長さの2倍以上5倍以下であることが好ましい。第1容量素子と第1トランジスタは、平面視においてと互いに重なる領域を有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in (1), it is preferable that the length in the second direction is between two and five times the length in the first direction. It is preferable that the first capacitive element and the first transistor have regions that overlap each other in a planar view.
(2)本発明の別の一態様は、第1容量素子と、第1トランジスタと、第2トランジスタと、を有する半導体装置であって、第1導電層上に設けられた第1絶縁層と、第1導電層と重なる領域及び第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第2導電層と、第2導電層上に設けられた第2絶縁層と、第2絶縁層の一部を介して第2導電層と重なる領域を有する第3導電層と、第3導電層上に設けられた第3絶縁層と、第3絶縁層上に設けられた第4導電層と、第3導電層と電気的に接続する領域、第4導電層と電気的に接続する領域、第1トランジスタのチャネル形成領域及び第2トランジスタのチャネル形成領域を有する半導体層と、半導体層上に設けられた第4絶縁層と、第4絶縁層の一部を介して第1トランジスタのチャネル形成領域と重なる領域及び第4絶縁層の他の一部を介して第2トランジスタのチャネル形成領域を有する第5導電層と、を有する半導体装置である。 (2) Another aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device having a first capacitive element, a first transistor, and a second transistor, the semiconductor device including: a first insulating layer provided on the first conductive layer; a second conductive layer having a region overlapping with the first conductive layer and a region overlapping with a side surface of the first insulating layer; a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer; a third conductive layer having a region overlapping with the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer; a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer; a fourth conductive layer provided on the third insulating layer; a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer, a channel formation region of the first transistor, and a channel formation region of the second transistor; a fourth insulating layer provided on the semiconductor layer; and a fifth conductive layer having a region overlapping with the channel formation region of the first transistor via a portion of the fourth insulating layer and a channel formation region of the second transistor via another portion of the fourth insulating layer.
また、(2)において、例えば、第2導電層は第1容量素子の一方の電極として機能し、第3導電層は第1容量素子の他方の電極として機能し、第3導電層は第1トランジスタ及び第2トランジスタそれぞれのソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、第4導電層は第1トランジスタ及び第2トランジスタそれぞれのソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。 Furthermore, in (2), for example, the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element, the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element, the third conductive layer functions as one of the source electrodes or drain electrodes of each of the first transistor and the second transistor, and the fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrodes or drain electrodes of each of the first transistor and the second transistor.
また、(2)において、第1容量素子は、平面視において第1トランジスタと互いに重なる第1領域と、平面視において第2トランジスタと互いに重なる第2領域と、を有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in (2), it is preferable that the first capacitive element has a first region that overlaps with the first transistor in a planar view, and a second region that overlaps with the second transistor in a planar view.
また、(1)又は(2)において、半導体層は酸化物半導体を含むことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in (1) or (2), it is preferable that the semiconductor layer contains an oxide semiconductor.
本発明の一態様によれば、記憶容量が大きい記憶装置を提供できる。または、占有面積が小さい記憶装置を提供できる。または、記憶密度の高い記憶装置を提供できる。または、動作速度の速い記憶装置を提供できる。または、信頼性が高い記憶装置を提供できる。または、消費電力が少ない記憶装置を提供できる。または、新規な記憶装置を提供できる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a storage device with a large storage capacity. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with a small footprint. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with a high storage density. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with a high operating speed. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with high reliability. Or, it is possible to provide a storage device with low power consumption. Or, it is possible to provide a novel storage device.
なお、上記効果の記載は、他の効果の存在を妨げるものではない。他の効果は、当業者であれば明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと見いだせるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、他の効果を抽出することが可能である。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの効果(上記効果及び他の効果)の全てを有する必要はない。 Note that the description of the above effects does not preclude the existence of other effects. Those skilled in the art would naturally find these other effects from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc., and it is possible to extract these other effects from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc. Note that one embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily have all of these effects (the above effects and other effects).
図1Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図1Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す斜視図である。図1C及び図1Dは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。図1Eは半導体装置の等価回路図である。
図2Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図2Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す斜視図である。図2C及び図2Dは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。図2Eは半導体装置の等価回路図である。
図3Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図3Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す斜視図である。図3C及び図3Dは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。図3Eは半導体装置の等価回路図である。
図4Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図4Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す斜視図である。図4C及び図4Dは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。図4Eは半導体装置の等価回路図である。
図5A1、図5B1及び図5C1は、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図5A2、図5B2及び図5C2は、半導体装置の一例を示す斜視図である。
図6Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図6Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図7A及び図7Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図8Aは、半導体装置の一例を示す平面図である。図8Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図9A及び図9Bは、半導体装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図10A乃至図10Fは、開口の平面形状の一例を示す図である。
図11は、半導体装置の構成例を説明するブロック図である。
図12A及び図12Bは、メモリセルの構成例を示す図である。
図13A及び図13Bは、メモリセルの構成例を示す図である。
図14A乃至図14Gは、メモリセルの回路構成例を説明する図である。
図15A及び図15Bは、半導体装置の構成例を説明する斜視図である。
図16は、CPUを説明するブロック図である。
図17A及び図17Bは、半導体装置の斜視図である。
図18A及び図18Bは、半導体装置の斜視図である。
図19は、記憶装置の階層を説明する概念図である。
図20A及び図20Bは、電子部品の構成例を示す図である。
図21A乃至図21Cは、大型計算機の構成例を示す図である。
図22Aは、宇宙用機器の構成例を示す図である。図22Bは、ストレージシステムの構成例を示す図である。
Fig. 1A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 1B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 1C and Fig. 1D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device, and Fig. 1E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
Fig. 2A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 2B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 2C and Fig. 2D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device, and Fig. 2E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
Fig. 3A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 3B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 3C and Fig. 3D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device, and Fig. 3E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
Fig. 4A is a plan view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 4B is a perspective view showing an example of a semiconductor device, Fig. 4C and Fig. 4D are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device, and Fig. 4E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device.
5A1, 5B1, and 5C1 are plan views showing an example of a semiconductor device, and FIGS. 5A2, 5B2, and 5C2 are perspective views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
6A and 6B are plan and cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a semiconductor device.
7A and 7B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
8A and 8B are plan and cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a semiconductor device.
9A and 9B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a semiconductor device.
10A to 10F are diagrams showing examples of the planar shape of the opening.
FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
12A and 12B are diagrams showing configuration examples of memory cells.
13A and 13B are diagrams showing configuration examples of memory cells.
14A to 14G are diagrams illustrating examples of the circuit configuration of a memory cell.
15A and 15B are perspective views illustrating a configuration example of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating the CPU.
17A and 17B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
18A and 18B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 19 is a conceptual diagram illustrating the hierarchy of a storage device.
20A and 20B are diagrams showing configuration examples of electronic components.
21A to 21C are diagrams showing examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
Fig. 22A is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a space equipment, and Fig. 22B is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a storage system.
以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら説明する。ただし、実施の形態は多くの異なる態様で実施することが可能であり、趣旨及びその範囲から逸脱することなくその形態及び詳細を様々に変更し得ることは当業者であれば容易に理解される。従って、本発明は、以下の実施の形態の記載内容に限定して解釈されるものではない。 Embodiments will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, those skilled in the art will readily understand that the embodiments can be implemented in many different ways, and that various changes in form and details can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be interpreted as being limited to the description of the following embodiments.
本明細書等において、半導体装置とは、半導体特性を利用した装置であり、半導体素子(トランジスタ、ダイオード、フォトダイオード等)を含む回路、同回路を有する装置等をいう。また、半導体特性を利用することで機能しうる装置全般をいう。例えば、集積回路、集積回路を備えたチップ、パッケージにチップを収納した電子部品は半導体装置の一例である。また、記憶装置、表示装置、発光装置、照明装置及び電子機器等は、それ自体が半導体装置であり、かつ、半導体装置を有している場合がある。 In this specification, a semiconductor device is a device that utilizes semiconductor properties, and refers to a circuit including a semiconductor element (transistor, diode, photodiode, etc.), a device having such a circuit, etc. It also refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor properties. For example, integrated circuits, chips equipped with integrated circuits, and electronic components that house chips in packages are examples of semiconductor devices. Furthermore, memory devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, lighting devices, electronic devices, etc. may themselves be semiconductor devices and may also include semiconductor devices.
本明細書に係る図面等において、大きさ、層の厚さ又は領域は、明瞭化のために誇張されている場合がある。よって、必ずしもその大きさもしくは縦横比などに限定されない。なお図面は、理想的な例を模式的に示したものであり、図面に示す形状又は値などに限定されない。 In the drawings and other information pertaining to this specification, sizes, layer thicknesses, or regions may be exaggerated for clarity. Therefore, the sizes or aspect ratios are not necessarily limited. Note that the drawings are schematic illustrations of ideal examples, and the shapes or values shown in the drawings are not limited.
なお、実施の形態の発明の構成において、同一部分又は同様な機能を有する部分には同一の符号を異なる図面間で共通して用い、その繰り返しの説明は省略する場合がある。また、同様の機能を指す場合には、ハッチングパターンを同じくし、特に符号を付さない場合がある。また、図面を理解しやすくするため、平面図又は斜視図などにおいて、一部の構成要素の記載を省略している場合がある。 In the configuration of the invention of the embodiments, the same parts or parts with similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals in different drawings, and repeated explanations may be omitted. Furthermore, when referring to similar functions, the same hatching pattern may be used and no particular reference numeral may be assigned. Furthermore, to make the drawings easier to understand, the illustration of some components may be omitted in plan views, perspective views, etc.
本明細書等において、「第1」、「第2」などの序数詞は、構成要素の混同を避けるために付したものである。従って、構成要素の数を限定するものではない。また、構成要素の順序を限定するものではない。例えば、本明細書などの実施の形態の一において「第1」に言及された構成要素が、他の実施の形態、あるいは特許請求の範囲などにおいて「第2」に言及された構成要素とすることもありうる。また例えば、本明細書等の実施の形態の一において「第1」に言及された構成要素を、他の実施の形態、あるいは特許請求の範囲などにおいて省略することもありうる。また、本明細書において序数詞が付されていない用語であっても、構成要素の混同を避けるため、特許請求の範囲において序数詞が付される場合がある。また、本明細書において序数詞が付されている用語であっても、特許請求の範囲において異なる序数詞が付される場合がある。また、本明細書において序数詞が付されている用語であっても、特許請求の範囲などにおいて序数詞を省略する場合がある。 In this specification, ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" are used to avoid confusion between components. Therefore, they do not limit the number of components or the order of the components. For example, a component referred to as "first" in one embodiment of this specification may be referred to as "second" in another embodiment or in the claims. For example, a component referred to as "first" in one embodiment of this specification may be omitted in another embodiment or in the claims. Even if a term does not have an ordinal number in this specification, an ordinal number may be added in the claims to avoid confusion between components. Even if a term has an ordinal number in this specification, a different ordinal number may be added in the claims. Even if a term has an ordinal number in this specification, the ordinal number may be omitted in the claims.
本明細書等において、「上に」、「下に」、「上方に」又は「下方に」などの配置を示す語句は、構成要素同士の位置関係を、図面を参照して説明するために、便宜上用いている場合がある。また、構成要素同士の位置関係は、各構成を描写する方向に応じて適宜変化するものである。従って、明細書等で説明した語句に限定されず、状況に応じて適切に言い換えることができる。例えば、「導電体の上面に位置する絶縁体」の表現では、示している図面の向きを180度回転することによって、「導電体の下面に位置する絶縁体」と言い換えることができる。 In this specification, terms indicating position, such as "above," "below," "upward," or "belowward," may be used for convenience in describing the relative positions of components with reference to the drawings. Furthermore, the relative positions of components will change as appropriate depending on the direction in which each configuration is depicted. Therefore, terms are not limited to those used in the specification, and can be rephrased appropriately depending on the situation. For example, the expression "insulator located on the upper surface of a conductor" can be rephrased as "insulator located on the lower surface of a conductor" by rotating the orientation of the drawing 180 degrees.
また、「上」及び「下」の用語は、構成要素の位置関係が直上又は直下で、かつ、直接接していることを限定するものではない。例えば、「絶縁層A上の電極B」の表現であれば、絶縁層Aの上に電極Bが直接接して形成されている必要はなく、絶縁層Aと電極Bとの間に他の構成要素を含むものを除外しない。 Furthermore, the terms "above" and "below" do not limit the positional relationship of components to being directly above or below, and being in direct contact with each other. For example, the expression "electrode B on insulating layer A" does not require electrode B to be formed in direct contact with insulating layer A, and does not exclude the inclusion of other components between insulating layer A and electrode B.
本明細書等において、「重なる」などの用語は、構成要素の積層順などの状態を限定するものではない。例えば、「絶縁層Aに重なる電極B」の表現であれば、絶縁層Aの上に電極Bが形成されている状態に限らず、絶縁層Aの下に電極Bが形成されている状態又は絶縁層Aの右側(もしくは左側)に電極Bが形成されている状態などを除外しない。 In this specification, terms such as "overlap" do not limit the state of the stacking order of components. For example, the expression "electrode B overlapping insulating layer A" does not limit the state in which electrode B is formed on insulating layer A, but does not exclude the state in which electrode B is formed under insulating layer A or the state in which electrode B is formed on the right (or left) side of insulating layer A.
本明細書等において、「膜」、「層」などの語句は、状況に応じて、互いに入れ替えることが可能である。例えば、「導電層」という用語を、「導電膜」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。又は、例えば、「絶縁膜」という用語を、「絶縁層」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。又は、場合によっては又は、状況に応じて、「膜」、「層」などの語句を使わずに、別の用語に入れ替えることが可能である。例えば、「導電層」又は「導電膜」という用語を、「導電体」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。又は、「導電体」という用語を、「導電層」又は「導電膜」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。又は、例えば、「絶縁層」又は「絶縁膜」という用語を、「絶縁体」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。又は、「絶縁体」という用語を、「絶縁層」又は「絶縁膜」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。 In this specification and the like, terms such as "film" and "layer" can be interchanged depending on the situation. For example, the term "conductive layer" can be changed to the term "conductive film." Or, for example, the term "insulating film" can be changed to the term "insulating layer." Or, depending on the situation or circumstances, terms such as "film" and "layer" can be replaced with other terms without using them. For example, the term "conductive layer" or "conductive film" can be changed to the term "conductor." Or, the term "conductor" can be changed to the term "conductive layer" or "conductive film." Or, for example, the term "insulating layer" or "insulating film" can be changed to the term "insulator." Or, the term "insulator" can be changed to the term "insulating layer" or "insulating film."
本明細書等において「電極」「配線」「端子」などの用語は、これらの構成要素を機能的に限定するものではない。例えば、「電極」は「配線」の一部として用いられることがあり、その逆もまた同様である。さらに、「電極」又は「配線」の用語は、複数の「電極」又は「配線」が一体となって形成されている場合なども含む。また、例えば、「端子」は「配線」又は「電極」の一部として用いられることがあり、その逆もまた同様である。更に、「端子」の用語は、複数の「電極」「配線」「端子」などが一体となって形成されている場合なども含む。そのため、例えば、「電極」は「配線」又は「端子」の一部とすることができ、また、例えば、「端子」は「配線」又は「電極」の一部とすることができる。また、「電極」「配線」「端子」などの用語は、場合によって、「領域」、「導電層」などの用語に置き換える場合がある。 In this specification, terms such as "electrode," "wiring," and "terminal" do not functionally limit these components. For example, an "electrode" may be used as part of a "wiring," and vice versa. Furthermore, the terms "electrode" and "wiring" include cases where multiple "electrodes" or "wirings" are formed integrally. Furthermore, for example, a "terminal" may be used as part of a "wiring" or "electrode," and vice versa. Furthermore, the term "terminal" includes cases where multiple "electrodes," "wirings," "terminals," etc. are formed integrally. Therefore, for example, an "electrode" can be part of a "wiring" or "terminal," and a "terminal" can be part of a "wiring" or "electrode." Furthermore, terms such as "electrode," "wiring," and "terminal" may be replaced with terms such as "region" and "conductive layer" depending on the circumstances.
本明細書等において、「配線」、「信号線」、「電源線」などの用語は、場合によっては又は、状況に応じて、互いに入れ替えることが可能である。例えば、「配線」という用語を、「信号線」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。また、例えば、「配線」という用語を、「電源線」などの用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。また、その逆も同様で、「信号線」「電源線」などの用語を、「配線」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。「電源線」などの用語は、「信号線」などの用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。また、その逆も同様で「信号線」などの用語は、「電源線」などの用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。また、配線に印加されている「電位」という用語を、場合によっては又は、状況に応じて、「信号」などという用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。また、その逆も同様で、「信号」などの用語は、「電位」という用語に変更することが可能な場合がある。 In this specification, terms such as "wiring," "signal line," and "power line" may be interchangeable depending on the circumstances. For example, the term "wiring" may be changed to "signal line." For example, the term "wiring" may be changed to "power line." The reverse is also true; terms such as "signal line" and "power line" may be changed to "wiring." A term such as "power line" may be changed to "signal line." The reverse is also true; terms such as "signal line" may be changed to "power line." The term "potential" applied to wiring may be changed to "signal" depending on the circumstances. The reverse is also true; terms such as "signal" may be changed to "potential."
本明細書において、「ソース」とは、ソース領域、ソース電極又はソース配線のことをいう。ソース領域とは、半導体層のうち、チャネル形成領域に隣接する2つの領域のうち一方の領域のことをいう。ソース電極とは、ソース領域に接続される部分を含む導電層のことをいう。 In this specification, "source" refers to a source region, source electrode, or source wiring. A source region refers to one of two regions in a semiconductor layer that are adjacent to a channel formation region. A source electrode refers to a conductive layer that includes a portion connected to the source region.
本明細書において、「ドレイン」とは、ドレイン領域、ドレイン電極又はドレイン配線のことをいう。ドレイン領域とは、半導体層のうち、チャネル形成領域に隣接する2つの領域のうち他方の領域のことをいう。ドレイン電極とは、ドレイン領域に接続される部分を含む導電層のことをいう。 In this specification, "drain" refers to a drain region, drain electrode, or drain wiring. A drain region refers to the other of the two regions in a semiconductor layer that are adjacent to a channel formation region. A drain electrode refers to a conductive layer that includes a portion connected to the drain region.
本明細書において、「ゲート」とは、ゲート電極又はゲート配線のことをいう。ゲート電極とは、トランジスタの半導体層と重なり、供給される電圧によってトランジスタのソースとドレインの間の抵抗値を制御する機能を有する電極をいう。 In this specification, "gate" refers to a gate electrode or gate wiring. A gate electrode is an electrode that overlaps with a semiconductor layer of a transistor and has the function of controlling the resistance between the source and drain of the transistor depending on the voltage supplied to it.
本明細書において、トランジスタのソース又はドレインの一方を「トランジスタの第1端子」と呼び、トランジスタのソース又はドレインの他方を「トランジスタの第2端子」と呼ぶ場合がある。 In this specification, one of the source or drain of a transistor may be referred to as the "first terminal of the transistor," and the other of the source or drain of the transistor may be referred to as the "second terminal of the transistor."
本明細書において、「平行」とは、二つの直線が−10°以上10°以下の角度で配置されている状態をいう。したがって、−5°以上5°以下の場合も含まれる。また、「略平行」又は「概略平行」とは、二つの直線が−15°以上15°以下の角度で配置されている状態をいう。また、「垂直」とは、二つの直線が80°以上100°以下の角度で配置されている状態をいう。したがって、85°以上95°以下の場合も含まれる。また、「略垂直」又は「概略垂直」とは、二つの直線が60°以上120°以下の角度で配置されている状態をいう。 In this specification, "parallel" refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of -10° or more and 10° or less. Therefore, it also includes cases where the angle is -5° or more and 5° or less. Furthermore, "substantially parallel" or "roughly parallel" refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of -15° or more and 15° or less. Furthermore, "perpendicular" refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of 80° or more and 100° or less. Therefore, it also includes cases where the angle is 85° or more and 95° or less. Furthermore, "substantially perpendicular" or "approximately perpendicular" refers to a state in which two straight lines are arranged at an angle of 60° or more and 120° or less.
また、電圧は、ある電位と、基準の電位(例えば接地電位又はソース電位)との電位差のことを示す場合が多い。よって、電圧と電位は互いに言い換えることが可能な場合が多い。本明細書などでは、特段の明示が無いかぎり、電圧と電位を言い換えることができるものとする。 Furthermore, voltage often refers to the potential difference between a certain potential and a reference potential (for example, ground potential or source potential). Therefore, voltage and potential can often be used interchangeably. In this specification and elsewhere, unless otherwise specified, voltage and potential can be used interchangeably.
また、本明細書等において、高電源電位VDD(以下、単に「VDD」ともいう。)とは、低電源電位VSSよりも高い電位の電源電位を示す。また、低電源電位VSS(以下、単に「VSS」ともいう。)とは、高電源電位VDDよりも低い電位の電源電位を示す。また、接地電位GND(以下、単に「GND」ともいう。)をVDD又はVSSとして用いることもできる。例えばVDDがGNDの場合には、VSSはGNDより低い電位であり、VSSがGNDの場合には、VDDはGNDより高い電位である。 Furthermore, in this specification, high power supply potential VDD (hereinafter simply referred to as "VDD") refers to a power supply potential that is higher than low power supply potential VSS. Furthermore, low power supply potential VSS (hereinafter simply referred to as "VSS") refers to a power supply potential that is lower than high power supply potential VDD. Furthermore, ground potential GND (hereinafter simply referred to as "GND") can also be used as VDD or VSS. For example, if VDD is GND, VSS is a lower potential than GND, and if VSS is GND, VDD is a higher potential than GND.
本明細書において、トランジスタの「オン状態」とは、トランジスタのソースとドレインが導通状態(通電可能な状態)であることをいう。また、トランジスタの「オフ状態」とは、トランジスタのソースとドレインが非導通状態(電気的に遮断しているとみなせる状態)であることをいう。 In this specification, the "on state" of a transistor means that the source and drain of the transistor are in a conductive state (a state in which electricity can pass through). Furthermore, the "off state" of a transistor means that the source and drain of the transistor are in a non-conductive state (a state that can be considered to be electrically cut off).
また、本明細書等において、「オン電流」とは、トランジスタがオン状態の時にソースとドレイン間に流れる電流を示す。また、「オフ電流」とは、トランジスタがオフ状態である時にソースとドレイン間に流れる電流を示す。 Furthermore, in this specification, "on-state current" refers to the current that flows between the source and drain when a transistor is in the on state. Furthermore, "off-state current" refers to the current that flows between the source and drain when a transistor is in the off state.
本明細書等において、電位Hはnチャネル型電界効果トランジスタ(「n型トランジスタ」ともいう。)をオン状態にする電位であり、pチャネル型電界効果トランジスタ(「p型トランジスタ」ともいう。)をオフ状態にする電位である。また、電位Lはn型トランジスタをオフ状態にする電位であり、p型トランジスタをオン状態にする電位である。よって、電位Hは電位Lよりも高い電位である。電位HはVDDと等しい場合がある。電位LはVSSと等しい場合がある。また、本明細書に示すトランジスタは、明示されている場合を除き、エンハンスメント型(ノーマリオフ型)のn型トランジスタとする。 In this specification, potential H is a potential that turns on an n-channel field effect transistor (also referred to as an "n-type transistor") and turns off a p-channel field effect transistor (also referred to as a "p-type transistor"). Potential L is a potential that turns off an n-type transistor and turns on a p-type transistor. Therefore, potential H is a potential higher than potential L. Potential H may be equal to VDD. Potential L may be equal to VSS. Unless otherwise specified, the transistors shown in this specification are enhancement-type (normally-off) n-type transistors.
また、図面などにおいて、配線及び電極などの電位をわかりやすく示すため、配線及び電極などに隣接して電位Hを示す“H”又は電位Lを示す“L”を付記する場合がある。また、電位変化が生じた配線及び電極などには、“H”又は“L”を囲み文字で付記する場合がある。また、トランジスタがオフ状態である場合、当該トランジスタに重ねて“×”記号を付記する場合がある。また、電流が流れる向きを示す矢印を付記する場合がある。 Furthermore, in drawings and the like, to clearly indicate the potential of wiring, electrodes, etc., an "H" indicating a high potential or an "L" indicating a low potential may be written next to the wiring, electrode, etc. Furthermore, wiring, electrodes, etc. where a potential change has occurred may be marked with a box containing "H" or "L." Furthermore, when a transistor is in an off state, an "x" symbol may be written over the transistor. Furthermore, an arrow may be added to indicate the direction of current flow.
本明細書等において、計数値及び計量値に関して「同一」、「同じ」、「等しい」又は「均一」(これらの同意語を含む)などと言う場合は、明示されている場合を除き、プラスマイナス10%の誤差を含むものとする。 In this specification, when referring to counting values and measurement values, terms such as "same," "equal," or "uniform" (including synonyms thereof) are used, unless otherwise specified, and include an error of plus or minus 10%.
また、本明細書に係る図面等において、X方向、Y方向及びZ方向を示す矢印を付す場合がある。本明細書等において、「X方向」とはX軸に沿う方向であり、明示する場合を除き順方向と逆方向を区別しない場合がある。「Y方向」及び「Z方向」についても同様である。また、X方向、Y方向及びZ方向は、それぞれが互いに交差する方向である。例えば、X方向、Y方向及びZ方向は、それぞれが互いに直交する方向である。本明細書などでは、X方向、Y方向又はZ方向の1つを「第1方向」又は「第1の方向」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、他の1つを「第2方向」又は「第2の方向」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、残りの1つを「第3方向」又は「第3の方向」と呼ぶ場合がある。 Furthermore, in the drawings and the like relating to this specification, arrows indicating the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction may be used. In this specification, the "X direction" refers to the direction along the X axis, and the forward direction and reverse direction may not be distinguished from each other unless explicitly stated. The same applies to the "Y direction" and "Z direction." Furthermore, the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are directions that intersect with each other. For example, the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are directions that are perpendicular to each other. In this specification and the like, one of the X direction, Y direction, or Z direction may be referred to as the "first direction" or "first direction." Furthermore, the other may be referred to as the "second direction" or "second direction." Furthermore, the remaining one may be referred to as the "third direction" or "third direction."
一般に、「静電容量」は、2つの電極が絶縁体(誘電体)を介して向かい合う構成を有する。本明細書等において、「容量素子」とは、前述の「静電容量」である場合が含まれる。すなわち、本明細書等において、「容量素子」とは、2つの電極が絶縁体を介して向かい合う構成を有したもの、2本の配線が絶縁体を介して向かい合う構成を有したもの又は、2本の配線が絶縁体を介して配置されたもの、である場合が含まれる。また、本明細書において、容量素子の一方の電極を「容量素子の第1端子」と呼び、他方の電極を「容量素子の第2端子」と呼ぶ場合がある。 Generally, "capacitance" has a configuration in which two electrodes face each other with an insulator (dielectric) interposed between them. In this specification, "capacitance element" includes the aforementioned "capacitance." That is, in this specification, "capacitance element" includes an element having a configuration in which two electrodes face each other with an insulator interposed between them, an element having a configuration in which two wires face each other with an insulator interposed between them, or an element in which two wires are arranged with an insulator interposed between them. Also, in this specification, one electrode of a capacitance element may be referred to as the "first terminal of the capacitance element," and the other electrode may be referred to as the "second terminal of the capacitance element."
本明細書において、複数の要素に同じ符号を用いる場合、特に、それらを区別する必要があるときには、符号に“A”、“b”、“_1”、“[n]”、“[m,n]”などの識別用の符号を付記して記載する場合がある。 In this specification, when the same reference numeral is used for multiple elements, and particularly when it is necessary to distinguish between them, an identifying symbol such as "A", "b", "_1", "[n]", or "[m, n]" may be added to the reference numeral.
本明細書における「接続」は、一例としては、「電気的接続」を含む。なお、回路素子の接続関係を物として規定するために「電気的接続」と表現する場合がある。また、「電気的接続」は、「直接接続」と「間接接続」とを含む。「AとBとが直接的に接続されている」とは、AとBとが回路素子(例えば、トランジスタ、スイッチなど。なお、配線は回路素子ではない。)を介さずに接続されていることを言う。一方、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」とは、AとBとが一つ以上の回路素子を介して接続されていることを言う。 In this specification, "connection" includes, as an example, "electrical connection." Note that the term "electrical connection" is sometimes used to define the connection relationship between circuit elements as a physical entity. Furthermore, "electrical connection" includes "direct connection" and "indirect connection." "A and B are directly connected" means that A and B are connected without the intervention of a circuit element (e.g., a transistor, a switch, etc.; note that wiring is not a circuit element). On the other hand, "A and B are indirectly connected" means that A and B are connected via one or more circuit elements.
例えば、AとBとを含む回路が動作していると仮定した場合において、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生するタイミングがある場合は、物として「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」、と規定することが出来る。なお、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生しないタイミングがあっても、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生するタイミングがあれば、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」と規定することが出来る。 For example, assuming that a circuit including A and B is operating, if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when an electrical signal is exchanged or an electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, then it can be defined that "A and B are indirectly connected" as objects. Furthermore, even if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when no electrical signal is exchanged or an electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when an electrical signal is exchanged or an electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, then it can still be defined that "A and B are indirectly connected."
「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」場合の例としては、AとBとが一つ以上のトランジスタのソース及びドレインを介して接続されている場合がある。一方で、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」とは言えない場合の例としては、AからBまでの経路に絶縁物が介在する場合がある。具体的には、AとBの間に容量素子が接続されている場合、AとBの間にトランジスタのゲート絶縁膜などが介在している場合などがある。よって、「トランジスタのゲート(A)と、トランジスタのソースまたはドレイン(B)とは、間接的に接続されている」とは言えない。 An example of a case where "A and B are indirectly connected" is when A and B are connected via the source and drain of one or more transistors. On the other hand, an example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected" is when an insulator is present in the path from A to B. Specifically, this would be the case when a capacitive element is connected between A and B, or when a transistor gate insulating film or the like is present between A and B. Therefore, it cannot be said that "the transistor gate (A) and the transistor source or drain (B) are indirectly connected."
「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」と言えない場合の別の例としては、AからBまでの経路に、複数のトランジスタがソース及びドレインを介して接続されており、かつ、トランジスタと他のトランジスタの間のノードに、電源、GNDなどから一定の電位Vが供給されている場合がある。 Another example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected" is when multiple transistors are connected via their sources and drains to the path from A to B, and a constant potential V is supplied to a node between one transistor and another from a power supply, GND, etc.
(実施の形態1)
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置について図面を用いて説明する。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置は、例えばメモリセルに用いることができる。
(Embodiment 1)
A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used as, for example, a memory cell.
<半導体装置の構成例>
図1Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aの平面図である。図1Bは、半導体装置10Aの斜視図である。図1Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面構造例を図1Cに示す。図1Aに一点鎖線で示すA3−A4間の断面構造例を図1Dに示す。図1Eは、半導体装置10Aの等価回路図である。なお、半導体装置10Aの構成を理解し易くするため、斜視図又は平面図などにおいて、一部の構成要素の記載を省略している。
<Configuration example of semiconductor device>
FIG. 1A is a plan view of a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10A. FIG. 1C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 1A. FIG. 1D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 1A. FIG. 1E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10A. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10A, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, etc.
図1Eの回路図で示すように、半導体装置10Aは、容量素子110及びトランジスタ120を含む。容量素子110の一方の電極は配線PLと接続され、容量素子110の他方の電極はトランジスタ120のソース又はドレインの一方と接続される。トランジスタ120のソース又はドレインの他方は配線BLと接続される。トランジスタ120のゲートは配線WLと接続される。配線PLは、電源線として機能し、容量素子110の一方の電極に固定電位を供給する機能を有する。配線BLはビット線として機能する。配線WLはワード線として機能する。 As shown in the circuit diagram of Figure 1E, the semiconductor device 10A includes a capacitor 110 and a transistor 120. One electrode of the capacitor 110 is connected to a wiring PL, and the other electrode of the capacitor 110 is connected to one of the source and drain of the transistor 120. The other of the source and drain of the transistor 120 is connected to a wiring BL. The gate of the transistor 120 is connected to a wiring WL. The wiring PL functions as a power supply line and has a function of supplying a fixed potential to one electrode of the capacitor 110. The wiring BL functions as a bit line. The wiring WL functions as a word line.
半導体装置10Aの具体的な構成例について説明する。半導体装置10Aは、絶縁層101上に導電層102を有する。導電層102は、配線PLとして機能する。また、導電層102上に絶縁層103を有する。また、導電層102と重なる領域に、絶縁層103を貫通して導電層102に達する開口104を有する。なお、本実施の形態に示す半導体装置10Aでは、開口104の平面形状(Z方向から見た形状)が直線部分と曲線部分を含む長円形である場合を示しているが、直線部分を含まない長円形(楕円形)にすることも可能である。また、開口104の形状は長円形以外にすることも可能である。例えば、多角形などにすることも可能である。 A specific example configuration of semiconductor device 10A will be described. Semiconductor device 10A has a conductive layer 102 on an insulating layer 101. The conductive layer 102 functions as wiring PL. An insulating layer 103 is also on the conductive layer 102. An opening 104 that penetrates the insulating layer 103 and reaches the conductive layer 102 is also provided in the region overlapping with the conductive layer 102. Note that in the semiconductor device 10A shown in this embodiment, the planar shape of opening 104 (shape as viewed from the Z direction) is an oval shape including straight and curved portions, but it can also be an oval shape (ellipse) that does not include straight portions. The shape of opening 104 can also be other than an oval. For example, it can be a polygon.
また、開口104の内壁を覆って導電層105が設けられている。導電層105は、開口104において導電層102と接続する領域を有する。また、導電層105は、開口104において絶縁層103の側面と重なる領域を有する。また、導電層105は、絶縁層103上でZ方向と垂直な方向(例えばY方向)に延在する領域を有する。 A conductive layer 105 is provided covering the inner wall of the opening 104. The conductive layer 105 has a region that connects to the conductive layer 102 in the opening 104. The conductive layer 105 also has a region that overlaps with the side surface of the insulating layer 103 in the opening 104. The conductive layer 105 also has a region that extends on the insulating layer 103 in a direction perpendicular to the Z direction (e.g., the Y direction).
また、半導体装置10Aは、絶縁層103及び導電層105の上に絶縁層106を有する。また、絶縁層106の上に、開口104と重なる領域を含む導電層107を有する。導電層107は、開口104の内側において絶縁層106を介して導電層105と重なる領域を有する。また、導電層107は、絶縁層106及び導電層105を介して絶縁層103の側面と重なる領域を有する。また、導電層107は、絶縁層106及び導電層105を介して導電層102と重なる領域を有する。 Semiconductor device 10A also has insulating layer 106 on insulating layer 103 and conductive layer 105. Also, conductive layer 107 is on insulating layer 106, including a region that overlaps with opening 104. Conductive layer 107 has a region inside opening 104 that overlaps with conductive layer 105 via insulating layer 106. Conductive layer 107 also has a region that overlaps with the side of insulating layer 103 via insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 105. Conductive layer 107 also has a region that overlaps with conductive layer 102 via insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 105.
導電層105と導電層107が絶縁層106を介して互いに重なる領域が、容量素子110として機能する。導電層105は容量素子110の一方の電極として機能する。導電層107は容量素子110の他方の電極として機能する。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aが有する容量素子110は、開口104において、絶縁層103の側面に沿って延在する領域を有する。このため、容量素子110は単位占有面積当たりの静電容量が大きい。また、絶縁層103の厚さを調整することによって、容量素子110の静電容量を増減できる。すなわち、単位占有面積当たりの静電容量を容易に調整可能である。 The region where the conductive layer 105 and the conductive layer 107 overlap with each other via the insulating layer 106 functions as the capacitor 110. The conductive layer 105 functions as one electrode of the capacitor 110. The conductive layer 107 functions as the other electrode of the capacitor 110. The capacitor 110 included in the semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention has a region that extends along the side surface of the insulating layer 103 in the opening 104. This gives the capacitor 110 a large capacitance per unit occupied area. Furthermore, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be increased or decreased by adjusting the thickness of the insulating layer 103. In other words, the capacitance per unit occupied area can be easily adjusted.
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aが有する容量素子110のように、静電容量の大きさを主に絶縁層103の厚さで調整できる容量素子を、「縦型容量素子」又は「VC(Vertical Capacitor)」ともいう。 A capacitor whose capacitance can be adjusted mainly by the thickness of the insulating layer 103, such as the capacitor 110 included in the semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention, is also called a "vertical capacitor" or "VC (Vertical Capacitor)."
また、半導体装置10Aは、絶縁層106及び導電層107の上に導電層109a及び導電層109bを有する。本明細書などでは、導電層109a及び導電層109bをまとめて導電層109という場合がある。また、導電層107と重なる領域に、絶縁層108を貫通して導電層107に達する開口111を有する。なお、図1Cに示すように、Y方向から見た断面構造では、開口111は絶縁層108だけでなく導電層109も貫通していると言える。本実施の形態に示す半導体装置10Aでは、Z方向から見た開口111の形状が長円形である場合を示しているが、開口111の形状は長円形以外にすることも可能である。 Semiconductor device 10A also has conductive layers 109a and 109b on insulating layer 106 and conductive layer 107. In this specification and elsewhere, conductive layers 109a and 109b may be collectively referred to as conductive layer 109. Furthermore, in the region overlapping conductive layer 107, an opening 111 is provided that penetrates insulating layer 108 and reaches conductive layer 107. As shown in FIG. 1C , in the cross-sectional structure viewed from the Y direction, opening 111 can be said to penetrate not only insulating layer 108 but also conductive layer 109. In semiconductor device 10A shown in this embodiment, the shape of opening 111 viewed from the Z direction is oval, but the shape of opening 111 can also be other than oval.
また、開口111の内壁を覆って半導体層112が設けられている。また、半導体層112は、開口111の内側に沿う領域を有する。また、半導体層112は、開口111において導電層107と接続する領域を有する。また、半導体層112は、開口111において絶縁層108の側面と重なる領域を有する。また、半導体層112は、開口111において導電層109の側面と接する領域を有する。また、半導体層112は、導電層109上でX方向に延在する領域と、絶縁層108上でY方向に延在する領域と、を有する。 A semiconductor layer 112 is provided covering the inner wall of the opening 111. The semiconductor layer 112 has a region that runs along the inside of the opening 111. The semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that connects to the conductive layer 107 in the opening 111. The semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that overlaps with the side surface of the insulating layer 108 in the opening 111. The semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that contacts the side surface of the conductive layer 109 in the opening 111. The semiconductor layer 112 also has a region that extends in the X direction on the conductive layer 109 and a region that extends in the Y direction on the insulating layer 108.
また、半導体装置10Aは、絶縁層108及び導電層109の上に絶縁層113を有する。また、絶縁層113の上に、開口111と重なる領域を含む導電層114を有する。導電層114は、開口111の内側において、絶縁層113を介して半導体層112と重なる領域を有する。また、導電層114は、絶縁層113及び半導体層112を介して絶縁層108の側面と重なる領域を有する。また、導電層114は、絶縁層113及び半導体層112を介して導電層107と重なる領域を有する。 Semiconductor device 10A also has an insulating layer 113 on insulating layer 108 and conductive layer 109. Also, on insulating layer 113, a conductive layer 114 is also provided, including a region that overlaps with opening 111. Inside opening 111, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with semiconductor layer 112 via insulating layer 113. Also, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with a side surface of insulating layer 108 via insulating layer 113 and semiconductor layer 112. Also, conductive layer 114 has a region that overlaps with conductive layer 107 via insulating layer 113 and semiconductor layer 112.
また、導電層114及び絶縁層113の上に絶縁層115を有する。 Insulating layer 115 is also provided on conductive layer 114 and insulating layer 113.
導電層107はトランジスタ120のソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能する。導電層109はトランジスタ120のソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。絶縁層113はトランジスタ120のゲート絶縁層として機能する。導電層114はトランジスタ120のゲート電極として機能する。 The conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 120. The conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 120. The insulating layer 113 functions as the gate insulating layer of the transistor 120. The conductive layer 114 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120.
トランジスタ120を構成するトランジスタとして、OSトランジスタ(チャネルが形成される半導体層に酸化物半導体を含むトランジスタ)を用いることが好ましい。酸化物半導体はバンドギャップが2eV以上であるため、オフ電流が著しく少ない。 It is preferable to use an OS transistor (a transistor including an oxide semiconductor in a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed) as the transistor constituting the transistor 120. Since oxide semiconductors have a band gap of 2 eV or more, their off-state current is significantly low.
室温下における、チャネル幅1μmあたりのOSトランジスタのオフ電流値は、1aA(1×10−18A)以下、1zA(1×10−21A)以下、又は1yA(1×10−24A)以下とすることができる。なお、室温下における、チャネル幅1μmあたりのSiトランジスタ(チャネルが形成される半導体層にシリコンを含むトランジスタ)のオフ電流値は、1fA(1×10−15A)以上1pA(1×10−12A)以下である。したがって、OSトランジスタのオフ電流は、Siトランジスタのオフ電流よりも10桁程度低いともいえる。 The off-state current of an OS transistor per 1 μm of channel width at room temperature can be 1 aA (1×10 −18 A) or less, 1 zA (1×10 −21 A) or less, or 1 yA (1×10 −24 A) or less. Note that the off-state current of a Si transistor (a transistor containing silicon in a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed) per 1 μm of channel width at room temperature is 1 fA (1×10 −15 A) or more and 1 pA (1×10 −12 A) or less. Therefore, it can be said that the off-state current of an OS transistor is about 10 orders of magnitude lower than that of a Si transistor.
トランジスタ120にOSトランジスタを用いることで、容量素子110に書き込まれた電荷を長期間保持することができる。トランジスタ120にOSトランジスタを用いることで、所定の周期で再度書き込みを行う動作(リフレッシュ動作)が不要となる。または、リフレッシュ動作の頻度を極めて少なくすることができる。よって、メモリセルとして機能する半導体装置10Aの消費電力を低減することができる。 By using an OS transistor as the transistor 120, the charge written to the capacitor 110 can be held for a long period of time. By using an OS transistor as the transistor 120, the operation of rewriting data at a predetermined cycle (refresh operation) is unnecessary. Alternatively, the frequency of refresh operations can be significantly reduced. Therefore, the power consumption of the semiconductor device 10A functioning as a memory cell can be reduced.
本明細書などにおいて、OSトランジスタを用いたメモリセル又はOSトランジスタを用いた記憶装置を「OSメモリ」ともいう。 In this specification and elsewhere, a memory cell using an OS transistor or a storage device using an OS transistor is also referred to as "OS memory."
また、OSトランジスタは高温環境下でもオフ電流がほとんど増加しない。具体的には室温以上200℃以下の環境温度下でもオフ電流がほとんど増加しない。また、高温環境下でもオン電流が低下しにくい。OSトランジスタを含む半導体装置は、高温環境下においても動作が安定し、高い信頼性が得られる。 Furthermore, the off-state current of an OS transistor hardly increases even in a high-temperature environment. Specifically, the off-state current hardly increases even in an ambient temperature range from room temperature to 200°C. Furthermore, the on-state current is unlikely to decrease even in a high-temperature environment. Semiconductor devices including OS transistors operate stably and have high reliability even in a high-temperature environment.
また、OSトランジスタは、ソースとドレイン間の絶縁耐圧が高い。半導体装置を構成するトランジスタにOSトランジスタを用いることで、トランジスタサイズを小さくしても動作が安定し、信頼性の良好な半導体装置が実現できる。 In addition, OS transistors have a high breakdown voltage between the source and drain. By using OS transistors as transistors that constitute a semiconductor device, stable operation can be achieved even when the transistor size is reduced, resulting in a highly reliable semiconductor device.
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aが有するトランジスタ120は、ソース電極とドレイン電極がZ方向に離れて配置されるトランジスタである。すなわち、トランジスタ120のソースとドレインは、それぞれが異なる高さに配置される。このようなトランジスタを、「縦チャネル型トランジスタ」、「縦型チャネルトランジスタ」、「縦型トランジスタ」又は「VFET(Vertical Field Effect Transistor)」ともいう。 The transistor 120 included in the semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention is a transistor in which the source electrode and the drain electrode are spaced apart in the Z direction. That is, the source and drain of the transistor 120 are located at different heights. Such a transistor is also called a "vertical channel transistor," "vertical channel transistor," "vertical transistor," or "VFET (Vertical Field Effect Transistor)."
ここで、縦型トランジスタであるトランジスタ120の構成例と縦型容量素子である容量素子110の構成例について、より詳細に説明する。 Here, we will explain in more detail an example configuration of the transistor 120, which is a vertical transistor, and an example configuration of the capacitor 110, which is a vertical capacitor.
<縦型トランジスタ>
図6Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aに適用可能なトランジスタ120の平面図である。図6Bは、図6Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面図である。なお、図6Aでは、Z方向から見た開口111の形状が円形である場合を示している。
<Vertical transistor>
6A is a plan view of a transistor 120 applicable to a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 6B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A2 indicated by the dashed dotted line in Fig. 6A. Note that Fig. 6A illustrates a case where the shape of the opening 111 is circular when viewed from the Z direction.
前述した通り、導電層107はトランジスタ120のソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、導電層109はトランジスタ120のソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。半導体層112の導電層107と接する領域がトランジスタ120のソース領域又はドレイン領域の一方として機能し、半導体層112の導電層109と接する領域がトランジスタ120のソース領域又はドレイン領域の他方として機能する。 As described above, the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120, and the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120. The region of the semiconductor layer 112 in contact with the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain regions of the transistor 120, and the region of the semiconductor layer 112 in contact with the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain regions of the transistor 120.
また、半導体層112の絶縁層108の側面に沿う領域がチャネル形成領域として機能する。よって、絶縁層108の側面の、導電層107から導電層109までの長さがトランジスタ120のチャネル長Lになる(図6B参照)。すなわち、縦型トランジスタであるトランジスタ120のチャネル長Lは、絶縁層108の厚さtaに応じて決定される。なお、本明細書において絶縁層108をスペーサ層と呼ぶ場合がある。 Furthermore, the region of the semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of the insulating layer 108 functions as a channel formation region. Therefore, the length from the conductive layer 107 to the conductive layer 109 on the side surface of the insulating layer 108 becomes the channel length L of the transistor 120 (see Figure 6B). In other words, the channel length L of the transistor 120, which is a vertical transistor, is determined by the thickness ta of the insulating layer 108. Note that in this specification, the insulating layer 108 may also be referred to as a spacer layer.
また、半導体層112のチャネル形成領域は、開口111内の絶縁層108の側面に沿って筒状に形成される。よって、Z方向から見た時の開口111の周の長さがトランジスタ120のチャネル幅Wとなる(図6A参照)。なお、必要に応じて、開口111の任意の位置の周の長さをチャネル幅Wとすることができる。例えば、開口の最下部の周の長さをチャネル幅Wとすることも可能であるし、開口111の最上部の周の長さをチャネル幅Wとすることも可能である。また、例えば、絶縁層108の厚さtaの半分の位置を開口111の周の長さとすることも可能である。また、図6Aでは、開口111の平面形状を円形で示しているが、これに限定されない。例えば、Z方向から見た開口111の平面形状を長円形、多角形などにすることが可能である。 Furthermore, the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 112 is formed in a cylindrical shape along the side surface of the insulating layer 108 within the opening 111. Therefore, the perimeter of the opening 111 when viewed from the Z direction is the channel width W of the transistor 120 (see Figure 6A). Note that, if necessary, the perimeter of any position of the opening 111 can be set to the channel width W. For example, the perimeter of the bottom of the opening can be set to the channel width W, or the perimeter of the top of the opening 111 can be set to the channel width W. Furthermore, for example, the perimeter of the opening 111 can be set to a position halfway through the thickness ta of the insulating layer 108. Although the planar shape of the opening 111 is shown as a circle in Figure 6A, this is not limiting. For example, the planar shape of the opening 111 when viewed from the Z direction can be an oval, polygon, or the like.
また、図7Aに示す様に、開口111の側面が勾配を有することが好ましい。開口111の側面が勾配を有することで、開口111の内側に形成される領域を含む、半導体層112、絶縁層113及び導電層114の被覆性を高めることができる。具体的には、開口111の形成により露出する絶縁層108及び導電層109それぞれの側面が勾配を有することが好ましい。本明細書では、層(絶縁層、導電層又は半導体層)の底面と側面のなす角度を「テーパー角θ」と呼称する。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7A, it is preferable that the side surface of the opening 111 has a slope. By having the side surface of the opening 111 have a slope, it is possible to improve the coverage of the semiconductor layer 112, the insulating layer 113, and the conductive layer 114, including the region formed inside the opening 111. Specifically, it is preferable that the side surfaces of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 exposed by the formation of the opening 111 have a slope. In this specification, the angle between the bottom surface and the side surface of a layer (insulating layer, conductive layer, or semiconductor layer) is referred to as the "taper angle θ."
絶縁層108及び導電層109それぞれのテーパー角θを小さくすることで、後に形成する半導体層112、絶縁層113及び導電層114の被覆性を高めることができる。すなわち、開口111内壁への半導体層112、絶縁層113及び導電層114の形成が容易となる。その一方で、テーパー角θが小さくなるほど開口111の占有面積が大きくなる。よって、トランジスタ120の占有面積が大きくなり、トランジスタ120の微細化及び高集積化が難しくなる。また、絶縁層108及び導電層109それぞれのテーパー角θが大きくなるほど半導体層112、絶縁層113及び導電層114の被覆性が低下し、トランジスタ120の製造歩留まり及び信頼性が低下する。これらのことから、絶縁層108及び導電層109それぞれの側面のテーパー角θは45°以上90°未満が好ましく、50°以上75°以下がより好ましい。絶縁層108及び導電層109それぞれの側面のテーパー角θは、互いに同じ角度にすることも可能であり、互いに異なる角度にすることも可能である。 By reducing the taper angle θ of each of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109, the coverage of the semiconductor layer 112, insulating layer 113, and conductive layer 114 to be formed later can be improved. That is, the semiconductor layer 112, insulating layer 113, and conductive layer 114 can be easily formed on the inner wall of the opening 111. On the other hand, the smaller the taper angle θ, the larger the area occupied by the opening 111. Therefore, the area occupied by the transistor 120 increases, making it difficult to miniaturize and highly integrate the transistor 120. Furthermore, the larger the taper angle θ of each of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109, the lower the coverage of the semiconductor layer 112, insulating layer 113, and conductive layer 114, resulting in a decrease in the manufacturing yield and reliability of the transistor 120. For these reasons, the taper angle θ of each of the side surfaces of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 is preferably 45° or greater and less than 90°, and more preferably 50° or greater and 75° or less. The taper angles θ of the side surfaces of the insulating layer 108 and the conductive layer 109 can be the same or different.
また、図7Bに示すように、開口111の形成時に、導電層107及び絶縁層108のエッチング条件によっては、導電層107の一部が除去される場合がある。また、開口111の底部が湾曲部を含む場合がある。開口111の底部が湾曲部を有することで、当該湾曲部上に設けられる半導体層112、絶縁層113等も、湾曲部を有することがある。これにより、導電層114に電圧を印加した場合、当該湾曲部近傍の絶縁層113への電界集中が緩和され、トランジスタ120の絶縁耐圧が向上し、トランジスタ120の静電破壊を抑制することができる。したがって、半導体装置の信頼性を高めることができる。また、Z方向と垂直な方向(例えば、Y方向)から見たとき、トランジスタ120のゲート電極として機能する導電層114と、トランジスタ120のソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能する導電層107が互いに重なる領域を有することが好ましい。このようにすることで、絶縁層108と重なる半導体層112全体に導電層114からの電界を印加できるため、トランジスタ120の電気特性を高めることが可能になる。例えば、トランジスタ120のオン電流を増やすことができる。 7B , during the formation of the opening 111, depending on the etching conditions for the conductive layer 107 and the insulating layer 108, a portion of the conductive layer 107 may be removed. The bottom of the opening 111 may also include a curved portion. The curved portion at the bottom of the opening 111 may also cause the semiconductor layer 112, the insulating layer 113, and other layers formed on the curved portion to also have curved portions. This reduces electric field concentration in the insulating layer 113 near the curved portion when a voltage is applied to the conductive layer 114, improving the dielectric strength of the transistor 120 and suppressing electrostatic breakdown of the transistor 120. Therefore, the reliability of the semiconductor device can be improved. Furthermore, when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the Z direction (e.g., the Y direction), the conductive layer 114, which functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120, and the conductive layer 107, which functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120, preferably have an overlapping region. By doing so, an electric field can be applied from the conductive layer 114 to the entire semiconductor layer 112 that overlaps with the insulating layer 108, which improves the electrical characteristics of the transistor 120. For example, the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be increased.
縦型トランジスタは、チャネル形成領域、ソース領域及びドレイン領域が、XY平面上に別々に設けられたトランジスタ(「横型トランジスタ」ともいう)よりも占有面積を低減できる。よって、縦チャネル型トランジスタを半導体装置に用いることにより、半導体装置の占有面積を低減できる。また、半導体装置に縦チャネル型トランジスタを用いることにより、半導体装置の高集積化を実現できる。 Vertical transistors can occupy a smaller area than transistors in which the channel formation region, source region, and drain region are provided separately on the XY plane (also called "horizontal transistors"). Therefore, by using vertical channel transistors in a semiconductor device, the area occupied by the semiconductor device can be reduced. Furthermore, by using vertical channel transistors in a semiconductor device, high integration of the semiconductor device can be achieved.
また、横型トランジスタでは、チャネル長がフォトリソグラフィの露光限界で制限されていた。本発明の一態様に係る縦チャネル型トランジスタは、絶縁層108の膜厚でチャネル長を設定できる。よって、トランジスタのチャネル長を、フォトリソグラフィの露光限界以下の非常に微細な構造(例えば、60nm以下、50nm以下、40nm以下、30nm以下、20nm以下又は10nm以下であって、1nm以上又は5nm以上)にすることができる。これにより、トランジスタのオン電流が増加し、周波数特性の向上を図ることができる。縦チャネル型トランジスタを用いることにより、動作速度が速い半導体装置を提供できる。 Furthermore, in a horizontal transistor, the channel length is limited by the exposure limit of photolithography. In a vertical channel transistor according to one embodiment of the present invention, the channel length can be set by the film thickness of the insulating layer 108. Therefore, the channel length of the transistor can be made into an extremely fine structure that is equal to or less than the exposure limit of photolithography (e.g., 60 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 40 nm or less, 30 nm or less, 20 nm or less, or 10 nm or less, and 1 nm or more or 5 nm or more). This increases the on-state current of the transistor, thereby improving frequency characteristics. By using a vertical channel transistor, a semiconductor device with high operating speed can be provided.
<縦型容量素子>
図8Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Aに適用可能な容量素子110の平面図である。図8Bは、図8Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面図である。なお、図8Aでは、Z方向から見た開口104の形状が円形である場合を示している。
<Vertical Capacitor>
Fig. 8A is a plan view of a capacitor 110 applicable to a semiconductor device 10A according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 8B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A2 indicated by the dashed dotted line in Fig. 8A. Note that Fig. 8A illustrates a case where the shape of the opening 104 is circular when viewed from the Z direction.
前述した通り、導電層105は容量素子110の一方の電極として機能し、導電層107は容量素子110のソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。導電層105と導電層107が絶縁層106を介して互いに重なる領域が容量素子110として機能する。 As described above, the conductive layer 105 functions as one electrode of the capacitor 110, and the conductive layer 107 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the capacitor 110. The region where the conductive layer 105 and the conductive layer 107 overlap with each other with the insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween functions as the capacitor 110.
容量素子110の静電容量は、絶縁層106の比誘電率、導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる面積及び導電層105と導電層107が向かい合う距離によって決定される。すなわち、本実施の形態においては、開口104の底部で導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる面積と、絶縁層103上で導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる面積と、絶縁層103の側面に沿って導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる面積の合計で決定される。 The capacitance of the capacitance element 110 is determined by the relative dielectric constant of the insulating layer 106, the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap, and the distance at which the conductive layers 105 and 107 face each other. That is, in this embodiment, the capacitance is determined by the sum of the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap at the bottom of the opening 104, the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap on the insulating layer 103, and the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap along the side of the insulating layer 103.
また、縦型容量素子である容量素子110の静電容量は、主に、絶縁層103の側面に沿って導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる面積で決定することが可能である。すなわち、絶縁層103の厚さtbと開口104をZ方向から見たときの開口104の周の長さ(長さWc)の積で決定することが可能である。 Furthermore, the capacitance of the vertical capacitance element 110 can be determined primarily by the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap along the side of the insulating layer 103. In other words, it can be determined by the product of the thickness tb of the insulating layer 103 and the perimeter (length Wc) of the opening 104 when viewed from the Z direction.
なお、必要に応じて、開口111の任意の位置の周の長さを長さWcとすることができる。例えば、開口104の最下部の周の長さを長さWcとすることも可能であるし、開口104の最上部の周の長さを長さWcとすることも可能である。また、例えば、絶縁層103の厚さtbの半分の位置を開口104の周の長さとすることも可能である。また、図8Aでは、開口104の平面形状を円形で示しているが、これに限定されない。例えば、開口104の平面形状を長円形、多角形などにすることが可能である。 Note that, if necessary, the perimeter of any position on the opening 111 can be set to length Wc. For example, the perimeter of the bottom of the opening 104 can be set to length Wc, or the perimeter of the top of the opening 104 can be set to length Wc. Also, for example, the perimeter of the opening 104 can be set to a position halfway through the thickness tb of the insulating layer 103. In addition, although the planar shape of the opening 104 is shown as a circle in Figure 8A, this is not limited to this. For example, the planar shape of the opening 104 can be an oval, a polygon, or the like.
また、開口111と同様に、導電層105及び絶縁層106の被覆性を高めるため、開口104の側面のテーパー角θ(図示せず)を45°以上90°以下とすることが好ましく、50°以上75°以下とすることがより好ましい。 Furthermore, as with the opening 111, in order to improve the coverage of the conductive layer 105 and the insulating layer 106, the taper angle θ (not shown) of the side surface of the opening 104 is preferably 45° or more and 90° or less, and more preferably 50° or more and 75° or less.
また、図9Aに示すように、開口104の形成時に、絶縁層103のエッチング条件によっては、導電層102の一部が除去される場合がある。また、開口104の底部が湾曲部を含む場合がある。導電層102の一部が除去されることによって、容量素子110の開口104の底部に相当する領域の面積が増加し、容量素子110の静電容量が大きくなる。また、開口104の底部が湾曲部を含むことによって、容量素子110の開口104の底部に相当する領域の面積が増加し、容量素子110の静電容量が大きくなる。 Also, as shown in FIG. 9A , when forming the opening 104, depending on the etching conditions for the insulating layer 103, part of the conductive layer 102 may be removed. Furthermore, the bottom of the opening 104 may include a curved portion. Removing part of the conductive layer 102 increases the area of the region of the capacitance element 110 corresponding to the bottom of the opening 104, thereby increasing the capacitance of the capacitance element 110. Also, including a curved portion in the bottom of the opening 104 increases the area of the region of the capacitance element 110 corresponding to the bottom of the opening 104, thereby increasing the capacitance of the capacitance element 110.
また、容量素子110を図9Bに示す構成にすることができる。図9Bにおいて、導電層105の端部121は、絶縁層103の上面よりも低い位置に設けられている。これにより、端部121が絶縁層103上に位置する場合よりも、端部121近傍の絶縁層106への電界集中を抑制できる。絶縁層106への電界集中を抑制することにより、絶縁層106の絶縁破壊を抑制し、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供できる。 Also, the capacitor element 110 can be configured as shown in Figure 9B. In Figure 9B, the end 121 of the conductive layer 105 is located lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 103. This makes it possible to suppress electric field concentration in the insulating layer 106 near the end 121, compared to when the end 121 is located on the insulating layer 103. By suppressing electric field concentration in the insulating layer 106, dielectric breakdown of the insulating layer 106 can be suppressed, and a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided.
なお、図9Bでは、絶縁層103の上面と、開口104における側面と、の間の領域122が、湾曲部を有する例を示している。領域122が湾曲部を有することによって領域122近傍の絶縁層106への電界集中を抑制できる。絶縁層106への電界集中を抑制することにより、絶縁層106の絶縁破壊を抑制し、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供できる。 Note that Figure 9B shows an example in which region 122 between the upper surface of insulating layer 103 and the side surface of opening 104 has a curved portion. By having region 122 have a curved portion, it is possible to suppress electric field concentration in insulating layer 106 near region 122. By suppressing electric field concentration in insulating layer 106, it is possible to suppress dielectric breakdown of insulating layer 106 and provide a highly reliable semiconductor device.
<開口の平面形状と開口の数>
前述した通り、開口111の周の長さを長くすることで、トランジスタ120のオン電流を増やすことができる。また、開口104の周の長さを長くすることで、容量素子110の静電容量を増やすことができる。例えば、Z方向から見た開口111又は開口104の平面形状が円形であり、その直径が60nmであるとすると、円周の長さは188.5nmである。図1Aに示す様に、開口111をY方向に長い長円形にすることで、トランジスタ120のオン電流を増やすことができる。また、開口104をY方向に長い長円形にすることで、容量素子110の静電容量を増やすことができる。
<Plane shape of openings and number of openings>
As described above, increasing the perimeter of the opening 111 can increase the on-current of the transistor 120. Increasing the perimeter of the opening 104 can increase the capacitance of the capacitor 110. For example, if the planar shape of the opening 111 or the opening 104 is circular when viewed from the Z direction and its diameter is 60 nm, the circumference is 188.5 nm. As shown in FIG. 1A , making the opening 111 an oval that is elongated in the Y direction can increase the on-current of the transistor 120. In addition, making the opening 104 an oval that is elongated in the Y direction can increase the capacitance of the capacitor 110.
トランジスタ120のオン電流が増えることにより、半導体装置10Aの動作速度を高めることができる。また、容量素子110の静電容量が増えることにより、半導体装置10Aのデータ保持能力を高めることができる。また、容量素子110の静電容量が増えることにより、ビット線の寄生容量の影響が低減されるため、保持されているデータの読み出し精度を高めることができる。よって、半導体装置10Aの信頼性を高めることができる。 Increasing the on-state current of the transistor 120 increases the operating speed of the semiconductor device 10A. Increasing the capacitance of the capacitor 110 also increases the data retention capability of the semiconductor device 10A. Increasing the capacitance of the capacitor 110 also reduces the effect of the parasitic capacitance of the bit line, thereby improving the accuracy of reading retained data. This improves the reliability of the semiconductor device 10A.
例えば、図10Aに示す様に、長円の幅を60nmとし、長さを140nmとすると、周の長さは349nmになる。よって、周の長さを直径が60nmの円周の約1.9倍にすることができる。よって、トランジスタ120のオン電流を約1.9倍にすることができる。また、容量素子110の静電容量を約1.9倍にすることができる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, if the width of the oval is 60 nm and the length is 140 nm, the circumference is 349 nm. Therefore, the circumference can be made approximately 1.9 times that of a circle with a diameter of 60 nm. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be increased by approximately 1.9 times. Furthermore, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be increased by approximately 1.9 times.
すなわち、開口111を平面視で見た場合(Z方向から見た場合)の、開口111の第1方向の長さ151と、第1方向と直交する第2方向の長さ152を異ならせることで、トランジスタ120のオン電流を増やすことができる。ここで、例えば、第1方向をX方向とすると、第2方向はY方向に相当する。また、平面視で見た開口111の形状、すなわち、開口111の平面形状が長円形である場合、第1方向の長さは短軸の方向の長さに相当し、第2方向の長さは長軸の方向の長さに相当する。また、開口111の平面形状が長方形である場合、向かい合う辺の距離のうち、第1方向の長さは距離が短い方向に相当し、第2方向は距離が長い方向に相当する。 In other words, when the opening 111 is viewed in a plan view (when viewed from the Z direction), the on-current of the transistor 120 can be increased by making the length 151 of the opening 111 in the first direction different from the length 152 in the second direction perpendicular to the first direction. Here, for example, if the first direction is the X direction, the second direction corresponds to the Y direction. Furthermore, when the shape of the opening 111 viewed in a plan view, i.e., the planar shape of the opening 111, is oval, the length in the first direction corresponds to the length in the direction of the minor axis, and the length in the second direction corresponds to the length in the direction of the major axis. Furthermore, when the planar shape of the opening 111 is rectangular, the length in the first direction corresponds to the length of the opposite sides in the shorter direction, and the length in the second direction corresponds to the length of the opposite sides in the longer direction.
また、開口104を平面視で見た場合の、第1方向の長さ151と、第1方向と直交する第2方向の長さ152を異ならせることで、容量素子110の静電容量を増やすことができる。開口111と同様に、平面視で見た開口104の形状、すなわち、開口104の平面形状が長円形である場合、第1方向は短軸の方向に相当し、第2方向は長軸の方向に相当する。また、開口104の平面形状が長方形である場合、向かい合う辺の距離のうち、第1方向の長さは距離が短い方向に相当し、第2方向は距離が長い方向に相当する。 Furthermore, by making the length 151 in the first direction and the length 152 in the second direction perpendicular to the first direction different when the opening 104 is viewed in a plan view, the capacitance of the capacitive element 110 can be increased. As with the opening 111, when the shape of the opening 104 when viewed in a plan view, i.e., the planar shape of the opening 104, is oval, the first direction corresponds to the direction of the minor axis, and the second direction corresponds to the direction of the major axis. Furthermore, when the planar shape of the opening 104 is rectangular, the length in the first direction corresponds to the direction in which the distance between opposing sides is shorter, and the second direction corresponds to the direction in which the distance is longer.
なお、開口111及び開口104の平面形状が長円形以外及び長方形以外の形状である場合も、上記思想に基づいて第1方向の長さと第2方向の長さを決定することが可能である。 In addition, even if the planar shape of opening 111 and opening 104 is a shape other than oval or rectangular, the length in the first direction and the length in the second direction can be determined based on the above concept.
なお、開口111の第1方向の長さ151と第2方向の長さ152は、開口111上部における長さにすることも可能であるし、開口111底部における長さにすることも可能であるし、開口111上部から底部までの間における長さにすることも可能である。同様に、開口104の第1方向の長さ151と第2方向の長さ152は、開口104上部における長さにすることも可能であるし、開口104底部における長さにすることも可能であるし、開口104上部から底部までの間における長さにすることも可能である。 Note that the first direction length 151 and second direction length 152 of the opening 111 can be the length at the top of the opening 111, the length at the bottom of the opening 111, or the length from the top to the bottom of the opening 111. Similarly, the first direction length 151 and second direction length 152 of the opening 104 can be the length at the top of the opening 104, the length at the bottom of the opening 104, or the length from the top to the bottom of the opening 104.
また、第1方向の長さ151が第2方向の長さ152より短い場合、第2方向の長さ152は、第1方向の長さ151の1.5倍以上10倍以下が好ましく、2倍以上5倍以下がより好ましい。第2方向の長さ152と第1方向の長さ151の関係を上記範囲にすることにより、トランジスタ120の占有面積の大幅な増加を抑制し、かつ、トランジスタ120のオン電流を高めることができる。また、容量素子110の占有面積の大幅な増加を抑制し、かつ、容量素子110の静電容量を増やすことができる。 Furthermore, when the length 151 in the first direction is shorter than the length 152 in the second direction, the length 152 in the second direction is preferably 1.5 to 10 times the length 151 in the first direction, and more preferably 2 to 5 times. By keeping the relationship between the length 152 in the second direction and the length 151 in the first direction within the above range, it is possible to prevent a significant increase in the area occupied by the transistor 120 and increase the on-current of the transistor 120. It is also possible to prevent a significant increase in the area occupied by the capacitance element 110 and increase the capacitance of the capacitance element 110.
続いて、開口111又は開口104の占有面積を60nm×140nmに固定した場合を考える。例えば、図10Bに示す様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に直径が60nmの開口111を2箇所設けると、2箇所の周の長さの合計が379nmとなり、長円にした場合よりも長くなる。よって、トランジスタ120のオン電流をさらに高めることができる。同様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に直径が60nmの開口104を2箇所設けると、長円にした場合よりも容量素子110の静電容量を大きくすることができる。 Next, consider the case where the area occupied by opening 111 or opening 104 is fixed at 60 nm x 140 nm. For example, as shown in Figure 10B, if two openings 111 with a diameter of 60 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the two openings is 379 nm, which is longer than when an ellipse is used. This further increases the on-state current of transistor 120. Similarly, if two openings 104 with a diameter of 60 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the capacitance of capacitor 110 can be increased compared to when an ellipse is used.
また、図10Cに示す様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に直径が24nmの開口111を10箇所設けると、10箇所の周の長さの合計が751nmとなる。よって、トランジスタ120のオン電流をさらに大きくすることができる。同様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に直径が24nmの開口104を10箇所設けると、容量素子110の静電容量をさらに大きくすることができる。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10C, if ten openings 111 each having a diameter of 24 nm are provided in a rectangular region of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the ten openings is 751 nm. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 can be further increased. Similarly, if ten openings 104 each having a diameter of 24 nm are provided in a rectangular region of 60 nm x 140 nm, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 can be further increased.
なお、開口111及び開口104の平面形状が円形以外の形状においても、上記と同様の効果が得られる。図10D乃至図10Fに、開口111又は開口104の平面形状が四角形である場合の、開口の数と周の長さの合計の関係を示す。 Note that the same effect as above can be achieved even when the planar shape of openings 111 and openings 104 is a shape other than a circle. Figures 10D to 10F show the relationship between the number of openings and the total perimeter when the planar shape of openings 111 or openings 104 is a rectangle.
図10Dに示す様に、開口111又は開口104が60nm×140nmの長方形である場合、周の長さは400nmになる。また、図10Eに示す様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に一辺の長さが60nmの正方形の開口111又は開口104を2箇所設けると、2箇所の周の長さの合計は480nmとなる。また、図10Fに示す様に、60nm×140nmの長方形の領域に一辺の長さが24nmの正方形の開口111又は開口104を10箇所設けると、10箇所の周の長さの合計は960nmとなる。 As shown in Figure 10D, when opening 111 or opening 104 is a rectangle measuring 60 nm x 140 nm, the perimeter is 400 nm. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10E, if two square openings 111 or openings 104 with a side length of 60 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the two openings is 480 nm. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10F, if ten square openings 111 or openings 104 with a side length of 24 nm are provided in a rectangular area of 60 nm x 140 nm, the total perimeter of the ten openings is 960 nm.
このように、同じ占有面積でも開口を複数に分けて設けることで、周の合計の長さを増やすことができる。よって、単位占有面積当たりのトランジスタ120のオン電流を増やすことができる。同様に、同じ占有面積でも開口104を複数に分けて設けることで、周の合計の長さを増やすことができる。よって、単位占有面積当たりの容量素子110の静電容量を増やすことができる。よって、占有面積を増やさずに半導体装置10Aの動作速度、信頼性などを高めることができる。また、トランジスタ120のオン電流を減らさずにトランジスタ120の占有面積を減らすことができる。また、容量素子110の静電容量を減らさずに容量素子110の占有面積を減らすことができる。よって、半導体装置10Aをメモリセルとして用いた記憶装置の記憶密度を高めることができる。また、半導体装置10Aをメモリセルとして用いた記憶装置の記憶容量を大きくすることができる。 In this way, by dividing the opening 104 into multiple parts, the total perimeter can be increased even with the same occupied area. Therefore, the on-state current of the transistor 120 per unit occupied area can be increased. Similarly, by dividing the opening 104 into multiple parts, the total perimeter can be increased even with the same occupied area. Therefore, the capacitance of the capacitor 110 per unit occupied area can be increased. Therefore, the operating speed, reliability, and the like of the semiconductor device 10A can be improved without increasing the occupied area. Furthermore, the occupied area of the transistor 120 can be reduced without reducing the on-state current of the transistor 120. Furthermore, the occupied area of the capacitor 110 can be reduced without reducing the capacitance of the capacitor 110. Therefore, the memory density of a memory device using the semiconductor device 10A as a memory cell can be increased. Furthermore, the memory capacity of a memory device using the semiconductor device 10A as a memory cell can be increased.
<変形例1>
半導体装置10Aの変形例である半導体装置10Bの構成例について、図2A乃至図2Eを用いて説明する。図2Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Bの平面図である。図2Bは、半導体装置10Bの斜視図である。図2Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面構造例を図2Cに示す。図2Aに一点鎖線で示すA3−A4間の断面構造例を図2Dに示す。図2Eは、半導体装置10Bの等価回路図である。なお、半導体装置10Bの構成を理解し易くするため、斜視図又は平面図などにおいて、一部の構成要素の記載を省略している。
<Modification 1>
A configuration example of a semiconductor device 10B, which is a modification of the semiconductor device 10A, will be described with reference to FIGS. 2A to 2E . FIG. 2A is a plan view of the semiconductor device 10B according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10B. FIG. 2C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2A . FIG. 2D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2A . FIG. 2E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10B. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10B, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, and the like.
半導体装置10Bは、2つの開口111及び2つのトランジスタ120を有する点が半導体装置10Aと異なる。説明の繰り返しを減らすため、主に半導体装置10Bの半導体装置10Aと異なる点について説明する。 Semiconductor device 10B differs from semiconductor device 10A in that it has two openings 111 and two transistors 120. To reduce repetition, the following description will mainly focus on the differences between semiconductor device 10B and semiconductor device 10A.
半導体装置10Bは、導電層107の一部と重なる開口111[1]と、導電層107の他の一部と重なる開口111[2]と、を有する。また、半導体装置10Bは、トランジスタ120[1]と、トランジスタ120[2]と、を有する。 Semiconductor device 10B has opening 111[1] that overlaps with a portion of conductive layer 107 and opening 111[2] that overlaps with another portion of conductive layer 107. Semiconductor device 10B also has transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2].
半導体装置10Bにおいて、半導体層112は、開口111[1]及び開口111[2]を覆って設けられる。また、半導体層112は、開口111[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口111[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。トランジスタ120[1]のチャネル形成領域は、開口111[1]内の絶縁層108の側面に沿う半導体層112に形成される。トランジスタ120[2]のチャネル形成領域は、開口111[2]内の絶縁層108の側面に沿う半導体層112に形成される。 In semiconductor device 10B, semiconductor layer 112 is provided to cover opening 111[1] and opening 111[2]. Semiconductor layer 112 also has a region along the inside of opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of opening 111[2]. The channel formation region of transistor 120[1] is formed in semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of insulating layer 108 in opening 111[1]. The channel formation region of transistor 120[2] is formed in semiconductor layer 112 along the side surface of insulating layer 108 in opening 111[2].
また、絶縁層113は、半導体層112を覆って設けられている。半導体装置10Bにおいて、絶縁層113は、開口111[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口111[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。よって、絶縁層113の一部がトランジスタ120[1]のゲート絶縁層として機能し、他の一部がトランジスタ120[2]のゲート絶縁層として機能する。また、導電層114は、開口111[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口111[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。 Furthermore, the insulating layer 113 is provided to cover the semiconductor layer 112. In the semiconductor device 10B, the insulating layer 113 has a region along the inside of the opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of the opening 111[2]. Therefore, a part of the insulating layer 113 functions as the gate insulating layer for the transistor 120[1], and another part functions as the gate insulating layer for the transistor 120[2]. Furthermore, the conductive layer 114 has a region along the inside of the opening 111[1] and a region along the inside of the opening 111[2].
半導体装置10Bにおいて、導電層107はトランジスタ120[1]のソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、かつ、トランジスタ120[2]のソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能する。また、半導体装置10Bにおいて、導電層109はトランジスタ120[1]のソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能し、かつ、トランジスタ120[2]のソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する。また、半導体装置10Bにおいて、導電層114はトランジスタ120[1]のゲート電極として機能し、かつ、トランジスタ120[2]のゲート電極として機能する。 In the semiconductor device 10B, the conductive layer 107 functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[1] and one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[2]. In the semiconductor device 10B, the conductive layer 109 functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[1] and the other of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 120[2]. In the semiconductor device 10B, the conductive layer 114 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 120[1] and the gate electrode of the transistor 120[2].
すなわち、図2Eの等価回路図で示すように、半導体装置10Bはトランジスタ120[1]とトランジスタ120[2]が並列に接続された構成を有する。並列に接続されたトランジスタ120[1]とトランジスタ120[2]は、実質的に1つのトランジスタとして機能する。 That is, as shown in the equivalent circuit diagram of Figure 2E, semiconductor device 10B has a configuration in which transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2] are connected in parallel. Transistor 120[1] and transistor 120[2] connected in parallel essentially function as a single transistor.
縦型トランジスタは、横型トランジスタよりも、並列に接続された複数のトランジスタの形成が容易である。また、縦型トランジスタは、複数トランジスタの並列接続を横型トランジスタよりも小さい占有面積で実現可能である。 Vertical transistors are easier to form than horizontal transistors, allowing multiple transistors to be connected in parallel. Furthermore, vertical transistors allow multiple transistors to be connected in parallel in a smaller area than horizontal transistors.
前述した通り、開口111の数を増やすことにより、占有面積を増やさずにトランジスタのオン電流を大きくすることができる。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Bは、占有面積を大きくすることなく、半導体装置10Aよりも動作速度を高めることができる。 As described above, by increasing the number of openings 111, the on-state current of the transistor can be increased without increasing the occupied area. Semiconductor device 10B according to one aspect of the present invention can achieve a higher operating speed than semiconductor device 10A without increasing the occupied area.
なお、本実施の形態では、導電層107上に2つの開口111を備える半導体装置10Bの構成例を示したが、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Bは3以上の開口111を備えることが可能である。 Note that, although this embodiment shows an example configuration of the semiconductor device 10B having two openings 111 on the conductive layer 107, the semiconductor device 10B according to one embodiment of the present invention can have three or more openings 111.
<変形例2>
半導体装置10Aの変形例である半導体装置10Cの構成例について、図3A乃至図3Eを用いて説明する。図3Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Cの平面図である。図3Bは、半導体装置10Cの斜視図である。図3Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面構造例を図3Cに示す。図3Aに一点鎖線で示すA3−A4間の断面構造例を図3Dに示す。図3Eは、半導体装置10Cの等価回路図である。なお、半導体装置10Cの構成を理解し易くするため、斜視図又は平面図などにおいて、一部の構成要素の記載を省略している。
<Modification 2>
A configuration example of a semiconductor device 10C, which is a modification of the semiconductor device 10A, will be described with reference to FIGS. 3A to 3E . FIG. 3A is a plan view of the semiconductor device 10C according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10C. FIG. 3C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 3A . FIG. 3D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 3A . FIG. 3E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10C. Note that to facilitate understanding of the configuration of the semiconductor device 10C, some components are omitted from perspective views, plan views, and the like.
半導体装置10Cは、2つの開口104を有する点が半導体装置10Aと異なる。説明の繰り返しを減らすため、主に半導体装置10Cの半導体装置10Aと異なる点について説明する。 Semiconductor device 10C differs from semiconductor device 10A in that it has two openings 104. To reduce repetition, the following description will mainly focus on the differences between semiconductor device 10C and semiconductor device 10A.
半導体装置10Cは、導電層102の一部と重なる開口104[1]と、導電層102の他の一部と重なる開口104[2]と、を有する。半導体装置10Cにおいて、導電層105は、開口104[1]及び開口104[2]を覆って設けられる。また、導電層105、開口104[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口104[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。 Semiconductor device 10C has opening 104[1] that overlaps with a portion of conductive layer 102 and opening 104[2] that overlaps with another portion of conductive layer 102. In semiconductor device 10C, conductive layer 105 is provided to cover opening 104[1] and opening 104[2]. Conductive layer 105 also has a region along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region along the inside of opening 104[2].
また、絶縁層106は、導電層105を覆って設けられている。半導体装置10Cにおいて、絶縁層106は、開口104[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口104[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。また、導電層107は絶縁層106の上に設けられている。また、導電層107は、開口104[1]の内側に沿う領域と、開口104[2]の内側に沿う領域と、を有する。 Furthermore, insulating layer 106 is provided to cover conductive layer 105. In semiconductor device 10C, insulating layer 106 has a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[2]. Furthermore, conductive layer 107 is provided on insulating layer 106. Furthermore, conductive layer 107 has a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[1] and a region that runs along the inside of opening 104[2].
半導体装置10Cにおいて、開口104[1]の内側で導電層105と導電層107が絶縁層106を介して互いに重なる領域を容量素子110[1]とし、開口104[2]の内側で導電層105と導電層107が絶縁層106を介して互いに重なる領域を容量素子110[2]とすると、半導体装置10Cは、容量素子110[1]と容量素子110[2]が並列に接続された構成を有するといえる(図3E参照)。並列に接続された容量素子110[1]と容量素子110[2]は、実質的に1つの容量素子110として機能する。 In semiconductor device 10C, if the region inside opening 104[1] where conductive layer 105 and conductive layer 107 overlap each other with insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween is defined as capacitance element 110[1], and the region inside opening 104[2] where conductive layer 105 and conductive layer 107 overlap each other with insulating layer 106 interposed therebetween is defined as capacitance element 110[2], then semiconductor device 10C can be said to have a configuration in which capacitance element 110[1] and capacitance element 110[2] are connected in parallel (see Figure 3E). Capacitance elements 110[1] and 110[2] connected in parallel essentially function as a single capacitance element 110.
縦型容量素子は、並列に接続された複数の容量素子の形成が容易である。また、開口104の数を増やすことにより、占有面積を増やさずに導電層105と導電層107が互いに重なる領域の面積を増やすことができる。よって、開口104の数を増やすことにより、占有面積を増やさずに容量素子の静電容量を大きくすることができる。 Vertical capacitor elements make it easy to form multiple capacitor elements connected in parallel. Furthermore, by increasing the number of openings 104, the area where the conductive layers 105 and 107 overlap can be increased without increasing the occupied area. Therefore, by increasing the number of openings 104, the capacitance of the capacitor element can be increased without increasing the occupied area.
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Cは、占有面積を大きくすることなく、半導体装置10Aよりもデータ保持能力を高めることができる。また、半導体装置10Aよりもデータの読み出し精度を高めることができる。よって、半導体装置10Aよりも信頼性を高めることができる。 The semiconductor device 10C according to one embodiment of the present invention can improve data retention capability compared to the semiconductor device 10A without increasing the occupied area. It can also improve data read accuracy compared to the semiconductor device 10A. Therefore, it can achieve higher reliability than the semiconductor device 10A.
なお、本実施の形態では、導電層102上に2つの開口104を備える半導体装置10Cの構成例を示したが、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Cは3以上の開口104を備えることが可能である。 Note that, although this embodiment shows an example configuration of the semiconductor device 10C having two openings 104 on the conductive layer 102, the semiconductor device 10C according to one embodiment of the present invention can have three or more openings 104.
<変形例3>
半導体装置10Aの変形例である半導体装置10Dの構成例について、図4A乃至図4Eを用いて説明する。また、半導体装置10Dは半導体装置10Bと半導体装置10Cを組み合わせた構成を有する。よって、半導体装置10Dは半導体装置10Bの変形例でもあり、半導体装置10Cの変形例でもある。
<Modification 3>
4A to 4E , a configuration example of a semiconductor device 10D, which is a modification of the semiconductor device 10A, will be described. The semiconductor device 10D has a configuration that combines the semiconductor device 10B and the semiconductor device 10C. Therefore, the semiconductor device 10D is a modification of both the semiconductor device 10B and the semiconductor device 10C.
図4Aは、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10Dの平面図である。図4Bは、半導体装置10Dの斜視図である。図4Aに一点鎖線で示すA1−A2間の断面構造例を図4Cに示す。図4Aに一点鎖線で示すA3−A4間の断面構造例を図4Dに示す。図4Eは、半導体装置10Dの等価回路図である。なお、半導体装置10Dの構成を理解し易くするため、斜視図又は平面図などにおいて、一部の構成要素の記載を省略している。 Figure 4A is a plan view of a semiconductor device 10D according to one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 4B is a perspective view of the semiconductor device 10D. Figure 4C shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A1 and A2 indicated by a dashed line in Figure 4A. Figure 4D shows an example of a cross-sectional structure between A3 and A4 indicated by a dashed line in Figure 4A. Figure 4E is an equivalent circuit diagram of the semiconductor device 10D. Note that to make the configuration of the semiconductor device 10D easier to understand, some components are omitted from the perspective view, plan view, etc.
半導体装置10Dは、2つの開口111及び2つの開口104を有する点が、半導体装置10A、半導体装置10B及び半導体装置10Cと異なる。開口104及び開口111双方の数を増やすことにより、トランジスタ120のオン電流と容量素子110の静電容量の双方を増やすことができる。半導体装置10Dの構成にすることで、占有面積を増やすことなく動作速度と信頼性の向上が実現できる。 Semiconductor device 10D differs from semiconductor devices 10A, 10B, and 10C in that it has two openings 111 and two openings 104. By increasing the number of both openings 104 and openings 111, it is possible to increase both the on-state current of transistor 120 and the capacitance of capacitive element 110. By configuring semiconductor device 10D, it is possible to achieve improved operating speed and reliability without increasing the occupied area.
<変形例4>
前述した通り、開口104及び開口111の平面形状は円形又は長円形に限らない。例えば、開口104及び開口111の平面形状を四角形にすることも可能である(図10D乃至図10F参照)。
<Modification 4>
As described above, the planar shapes of the openings 104 and 111 are not limited to circular or elliptical. For example, the planar shapes of the openings 104 and 111 may be rectangular (see FIGS. 10D to 10F).
図5A1に半導体装置10Arの平面図を示す。図5A2に半導体装置10Arの斜視図を示す。半導体装置10Arは半導体装置10Aの開口104及び開口111の平面形状を四角形にした構成を有する。 Figure 5A1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Ar. Figure 5A2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Ar. Semiconductor device 10Ar has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10A are rectangular.
図5B1に半導体装置10Brの平面図を示す。図5B2に半導体装置10Brの斜視図を示す。半導体装置10Brは半導体装置10Bの開口104及び開口111の平面形状を四角形にした構成を有する。 Figure 5B1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Br. Figure 5B2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Br. Semiconductor device 10Br has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10B are rectangular.
図5C1に半導体装置10Drの平面図を示す。図5C2に半導体装置10Drの斜視図を示す。半導体装置10Drは半導体装置10Dの開口104及び開口111の平面形状を四角形にした構成を有する。 Figure 5C1 shows a plan view of semiconductor device 10Dr. Figure 5C2 shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 10Dr. Semiconductor device 10Dr has a configuration in which the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 of semiconductor device 10D are rectangular.
開口104及び開口111の平面形状を四角形にすることで、トランジスタ120のオン電流と容量素子110の静電容量をより大きくすることが可能である。 By making the planar shapes of openings 104 and 111 rectangular, it is possible to increase the on-state current of transistor 120 and the capacitance of capacitor 110.
<半導体装置の構成材料>
続いて、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置10(半導体装置10A、半導体装置10B、半導体装置10C、半導体装置10D、半導体装置10Ar、半導体装置10Br及び半導体装置10Dr)に用いることができる構成材料について説明する。
<Constituent materials of semiconductor device>
Next, constituent materials that can be used in the semiconductor device 10 (semiconductor device 10A, semiconductor device 10B, semiconductor device 10C, semiconductor device 10D, semiconductor device 10Ar, semiconductor device 10Br, and semiconductor device 10Dr) according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
[基板]
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置を基板上に設ける場合、当該基板に用いる材料に大きな制限はない。当該基板に用いる材料は、目的に応じて、透光性の有無及び加熱処理に耐えうる程度の耐熱性などを勘案して決定される。例えば、当該基板として、絶縁体基板、半導体基板又は導電体基板を用いることができる。絶縁体基板としては、例えばバリウムホウケイ酸ガラス及びアルミノホウケイ酸ガラスなどのガラス基板、セラミック基板、石英基板、サファイア基板、安定化ジルコニア基板(イットリア安定化ジルコニア基板など)などを用いることができる。また、当該基板として、半導体基板、可撓性基板(フレキシブル基板)、樹脂基板などを用いることもできる。
[substrate]
When the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is provided over a substrate, the material used for the substrate is not particularly limited. The material used for the substrate is determined depending on the purpose, taking into consideration the presence or absence of light-transmitting properties and heat resistance sufficient to withstand heat treatment. For example, an insulating substrate, a semiconductor substrate, or a conductive substrate can be used as the substrate. Examples of insulating substrates that can be used include glass substrates such as barium borosilicate glass and aluminoborosilicate glass, ceramic substrates, quartz substrates, sapphire substrates, and stabilized zirconia substrates (such as yttria-stabilized zirconia substrates). Furthermore, semiconductor substrates, flexible substrates, resin substrates, and the like can also be used as the substrate.
半導体基板としては、例えば、シリコン、もしくはゲルマニウムなどを材料とした半導体基板又は炭化シリコン、シリコンゲルマニウム、ヒ化ガリウム、リン化インジウム、酸化亜鉛(亜鉛酸化物ともいう)、もしくは酸化ガリウムを材料とした化合物半導体基板などがある。さらには、前述の半導体基板内部に絶縁体領域を有する半導体基板、例えば、SOI(Silicon On Insulator)基板などがある。また、半導体基板は、単結晶半導体又は多結晶半導体を用いることが可能である。 Semiconductor substrates include, for example, semiconductor substrates made of silicon or germanium, or compound semiconductor substrates made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide (also called zinc oxide), or gallium oxide. Furthermore, there are semiconductor substrates that have an insulating region inside the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrates. Furthermore, the semiconductor substrate can be a single-crystal semiconductor or a polycrystalline semiconductor.
導電体基板としては、黒鉛基板、金属基板、合金基板、導電性樹脂基板などがある。又は、金属の窒化物を有する基板、金属の酸化物を有する基板などがある。さらには、絶縁体基板に導電層又は半導体層が設けられた基板、半導体基板に導電層又は絶縁層が設けられた基板、導電体基板に半導体層又は絶縁層が設けられた基板などがある。 Conductor substrates include graphite substrates, metal substrates, alloy substrates, and conductive resin substrates. Other examples include substrates containing metal nitrides and substrates containing metal oxides. Furthermore, there are substrates in which a conductive layer or semiconductor layer is provided on an insulator substrate, substrates in which a conductive layer or insulating layer is provided on a semiconductor substrate, and substrates in which a semiconductor layer or insulating layer is provided on a conductive substrate.
可撓性基板、樹脂基板などの材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)等のポリエステル、ポリアクリロニトリル、アクリル樹脂、ポリイミド、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリカーボネート(PC)、ポリエーテルスルホン(PES)、ポリアミド(ナイロン、アラミドなど)、ポリシロキサン、シクロオレフィン樹脂、ポリスチレン、ポリアミドイミド、ポリウレタン、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、ポリプロピレン、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)、ABS樹脂、セルロースナノファイバーなどを用いることができる。 Materials that can be used for flexible substrates, resin substrates, etc. include, for example, polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyacrylonitrile, acrylic resin, polyimide, polymethyl methacrylate, polycarbonate (PC), polyethersulfone (PES), polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polysiloxane, cycloolefin resin, polystyrene, polyamideimide, polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), ABS resin, cellulose nanofiber, etc.
基板として上記材料を用いることにより、軽量な半導体装置を提供できる。また、基板として上記材料を用いることにより、衝撃に強い半導体装置を提供できる。また、基板として上記材料を用いることにより、破損しにくい半導体装置を提供できる。また、これらの基板に素子が設けられたものを用いることができる。基板に設けられる素子としては、容量素子、抵抗素子、スイッチ素子、発光素子、記憶素子などがある。 By using the above materials for the substrate, a lightweight semiconductor device can be provided. Furthermore, by using the above materials for the substrate, a semiconductor device that is resistant to impact can be provided. Furthermore, by using the above materials for the substrate, a semiconductor device that is less likely to break can be provided. Furthermore, these substrates can be used with elements provided on them. Elements that can be provided on the substrate include capacitance elements, resistance elements, switching elements, light-emitting elements, and memory elements.
[絶縁層]
絶縁層(絶縁層101、絶縁層103、絶縁層106、絶縁層108、絶縁層113、絶縁層115など)には、それぞれ、無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。無機絶縁膜としては、例えば、酸化絶縁膜、窒化絶縁膜、酸化窒化絶縁膜及び窒化酸化絶縁膜が挙げられる。酸化絶縁膜としては、例えば、酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜、酸化ゲルマニウム膜、酸化イットリウム膜、酸化ジルコニウム膜、酸化ランタン膜、酸化ネオジム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化タンタル膜、酸化セリウム膜、ガリウム亜鉛酸化物膜及びハフニウムアルミネート膜が挙げられる。窒化絶縁膜としては、例えば、窒化シリコン膜及び窒化アルミニウム膜が挙げられる。酸化窒化絶縁膜としては、例えば、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化アルミニウム膜、酸化窒化ガリウム膜、酸化窒化イットリウム膜及び酸化窒化ハフニウム膜が挙げられる。窒化酸化絶縁膜としては、例えば、窒化酸化シリコン膜及び窒化酸化アルミニウム膜が挙げられる。また、半導体装置が有する絶縁層には、有機絶縁膜を用いることも可能である。
[Insulating layer]
The insulating layers (insulating layer 101, insulating layer 103, insulating layer 106, insulating layer 108, insulating layer 113, insulating layer 115, etc.) can each include an inorganic insulating film. Examples of inorganic insulating films include an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, and a nitride oxide insulating film. Examples of oxide insulating films include a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a tantalum oxide film, a cerium oxide film, a gallium zinc oxide film, and a hafnium aluminate film. Examples of nitride insulating films include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film. Examples of oxynitride insulating films include a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, a gallium oxynitride film, an yttrium oxynitride film, and a hafnium oxynitride film. Examples of nitride oxide insulating films include a silicon nitride oxide film and an aluminum nitride oxide film. In addition, an organic insulating film can also be used for the insulating layers of a semiconductor device.
なお、本明細書等において、酸化窒化物とは、その組成として、窒素よりも酸素の含有量が多い材料を指し、窒化酸化物とは、その組成として、酸素よりも窒素の含有量が多い材料を指す。例えば、酸化窒化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として窒素よりも酸素の含有量が多い材料を指し、窒化酸化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として、酸素よりも窒素の含有量が多い材料を指す。 Note that in this specification, an oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and a nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. For example, silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen.
例えば、トランジスタの微細化及び高集積化が進むと、ゲート絶縁層の薄膜化により、リーク電流などの問題が生じる場合がある。絶縁層113などのゲート絶縁層として機能する絶縁層に、high−k材料を用いることで物理膜厚を保ちながら、トランジスタ動作時の低電圧化が可能となる。また、ゲート絶縁層の等価酸化膜厚(EOT)の薄膜化が可能となる。一方、層間膜として機能する絶縁層には、比誘電率が低い材料を用いることで、配線間に生じる寄生容量を低減できる。したがって、絶縁層の機能に応じて、材料を選択することが肝要である。なお、比誘電率が低い材料は、絶縁耐力が大きい材料でもある。 For example, as transistors become more miniaturized and highly integrated, thinner gate insulating layers can cause problems such as leakage current. Using high-k materials for insulating layers that function as gate insulating layers, such as insulating layer 113, enables lower voltages during transistor operation while maintaining the physical film thickness. It also makes it possible to reduce the equivalent oxide thickness (EOT) of the gate insulating layer. Meanwhile, using a material with a low dielectric constant for insulating layers that function as interlayer films can reduce the parasitic capacitance that occurs between wiring. Therefore, it is important to select materials according to the function of the insulating layer. Materials with a low dielectric constant also have high dielectric strength.
比誘電率が高い(high−k)材料としては、例えば、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ガリウム、酸化ハフニウム、酸化タンタル、酸化ジルコニウム、ハフニウムジルコニウム酸化物、アルミニウム及びハフニウムを有する酸化物、アルミニウム及びハフニウムを有する酸化窒化物、シリコン及びハフニウムを有する酸化物、シリコン及びハフニウムを有する酸化窒化物、並びに、シリコン及びハフニウムを有する窒化物などが挙げられる。 Examples of high-dielectric-constant (high-k) materials include aluminum oxide, gallium oxide, hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, zirconium oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, oxides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxynitrides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxides containing silicon and hafnium, oxynitrides containing silicon and hafnium, and nitrides containing silicon and hafnium.
比誘電率が低い材料としては、例えば、酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコン及び窒化酸化シリコンなどの無機絶縁材料、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド(ナイロン、アラミドなど)、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート及びアクリル樹脂などの樹脂が挙げられる。また、比誘電率が低い他の無機絶縁材料として、例えば、フッ素を添加した酸化シリコン、炭素を添加した酸化シリコン、並びに、炭素及び窒素を添加した酸化シリコンなどが挙げられる。また、例えば、空孔を有する酸化シリコンが挙げられる。なお、これらの酸化シリコンは、窒素を含んでも構わない。 Examples of materials with a low relative dielectric constant include inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, and silicon nitride oxide, and resins such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polyimide, polycarbonate, and acrylic resin. Other inorganic insulating materials with a low relative dielectric constant include, for example, silicon oxide doped with fluorine, silicon oxide doped with carbon, and silicon oxide doped with carbon and nitrogen. Another example is silicon oxide with vacancies. Note that these silicon oxides may contain nitrogen.
半導体装置が有する絶縁層に、強誘電性を有しうる材料を用いることができる。強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、酸化ハフニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、ハフニウムジルコニウム酸化物等の金属酸化物が挙げられる。また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、酸化ハフニウムに元素J1(ここでの元素J1は、ジルコニウム、シリコン、アルミニウム、ガドリニウム、イットリウム、ランタン、ストロンチウム等から選ばれた一つ又は複数)を添加した材料が挙げられる。ここで、ハフニウムの原子数と元素J1の原子数の比は適宜設定することができ、例えば、ハフニウムの原子数と元素J1の原子数の比を1:1又はその近傍にすることができる。また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、酸化ジルコニウムに元素J2(ここでの元素J2は、ハフニウム、シリコン、アルミニウム、ガドリニウム、イットリウム、ランタン、ストロンチウム等から選ばれた一つ又は複数)を添加した材料、等が挙げられる。また、ジルコニウムの原子数と元素J2の原子数の比は適宜設定することができ、例えば、ジルコニウムの原子数と元素J2の原子数の比を1:1又はその近傍にすることができる。また、強誘電性を有しうる材料として、チタン酸鉛(PbTiOX(Xは0よりも大きい実数とする))、チタン酸バリウムストロンチウム(BST)、チタン酸ストロンチウム、チタン酸ジルコン酸鉛(PZT)、タンタル酸ビスマス酸ストロンチウム(SBT)、ビスマスフェライト(BFO)、又はチタン酸バリウム等のペロブスカイト構造を有する圧電性セラミックスを用いることができる。 A material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity can be used for the insulating layer of a semiconductor device. Examples of materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include metal oxides such as hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, and hafnium zirconium oxide. Examples of materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element J1 (here, element J1 is one or more selected from zirconium, silicon, aluminum, gadolinium, yttrium, lanthanum, strontium, etc.) to hafnium oxide. The ratio of the number of hafnium atoms to the number of element J1 atoms can be set appropriately; for example, the ratio of the number of hafnium atoms to the number of element J1 atoms can be set to 1:1 or close to that. Examples of materials capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element J2 (here, element J2 is one or more selected from hafnium, silicon, aluminum, gadolinium, yttrium, lanthanum, strontium, etc.) to zirconium oxide. The ratio of the number of zirconium atoms to the number of atoms of element J2 can be set as appropriate, for example, the ratio of the number of zirconium atoms to the number of atoms of element J2 can be set to or near 1:1. As a material that can have ferroelectricity, piezoelectric ceramics having a perovskite structure such as lead titanate (PbTiO x (X is a real number greater than 0)), barium strontium titanate (BST), strontium titanate, lead zirconate titanate (PZT), strontium bismuthate tantalate (SBT), bismuth ferrite (BFO), or barium titanate can be used.
また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、窒化アルミニウムスカンジウム(Al1−aScaNb(aは0より大きく、0.5より小さい実数であり、bは1又はその近傍の値である。以下、単に「AlScN」として示す場合がある。))、Al−Ga−Sc窒化物、Ga−Sc窒化物などを用いることができる。また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、元素M1と、元素M2と、窒素と、を有する金属窒化物が挙げられる。ここで、元素M1は、アルミニウム、ガリウム、インジウム等から選ばれた一つ又は複数である。また、元素M2は、ホウ素、スカンジウム、イットリウム、ランタン、セリウム、ネオジム、ユーロピウム、チタン、ジルコニウム、ハフニウム、バナジウム、ニオブ、タンタル、及びクロム等から選ばれた一つ又は複数である。なお、元素M1の原子数と元素M2の原子数の比は適宜設定することができる。また、元素M1と、窒素と、を有する金属酸化物は、元素M2を含まなくても、強誘電性を有する場合がある。また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、上記金属窒化物に元素M3が添加された材料が挙げられる。なお、元素M3は、マグネシウム、カルシウム、ストロンチウム、亜鉛、及びカドミウム等から選ばれた一つ又は複数である。ここで、元素M1の原子数、元素M2の原子数、及び元素M3の原子数の比は適宜設定することができる。なお、上記の金属窒化物は、少なくとも、第13族元素と、第15族元素である窒素とを含むため、当該金属窒化物を、13−15族の強誘電体、13族窒化物の強誘電体などと呼ぶ場合がある。 Examples of materials that can have ferroelectricity include aluminum scandium nitride (Al1 - aScaNb (where a is a real number greater than 0 and less than 0.5, and b is 1 or a value close to 1; hereinafter, this may be referred to simply as "AlScN")), Al-Ga-Sc nitride, and Ga-Sc nitride. Examples of materials that can have ferroelectricity include metal nitrides containing an element M1, an element M2, and nitrogen. Here, the element M1 is one or more elements selected from aluminum, gallium, indium, and the like. The element M2 is one or more elements selected from boron, scandium, yttrium, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, europium, titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, and the like. The ratio of the number of atoms of the element M1 to the number of atoms of the element M2 can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, a metal oxide containing element M1 and nitrogen may exhibit ferroelectricity even without containing element M2. Examples of materials that may exhibit ferroelectricity include materials obtained by adding element M3 to the above-mentioned metal nitrides. The element M3 is one or more elements selected from magnesium, calcium, strontium, zinc, cadmium, and the like. The ratio of the number of atoms of element M1, the number of atoms of element M2, and the number of atoms of element M3 can be appropriately set. Since the above-mentioned metal nitrides contain at least a Group 13 element and nitrogen, which is a Group 15 element, the metal nitrides may be referred to as Group 13-15 ferroelectrics, Group 13 nitride ferroelectrics, etc.
また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、SrTaO2N及びBaTaO2N等のペロブスカイト型酸化窒化物、κアルミナ型構造のGaFeO3等が挙げられる。 Furthermore, materials that can have ferroelectricity include perovskite-type oxynitrides such as SrTaO 2 N and BaTaO 2 N, and GaFeO 3 with a κ-alumina structure.
なお、上記の説明においては、金属酸化物及び金属窒化物について例示したがこれに限定されない。例えば、前述の金属酸化物に窒素が添加された金属酸化窒化物、又は前述の金属窒化物に酸素が添加された金属窒酸化物等を用いることができる。 Note that, although metal oxides and metal nitrides have been exemplified in the above explanation, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, metal oxide nitrides, in which nitrogen is added to the aforementioned metal oxides, or metal oxynitrides, in which oxygen is added to the aforementioned metal nitrides, can be used.
また、強誘電性を有しうる材料としては、例えば、上記に列挙した材料から選ばれた複数の材料からなる混合物又は化合物を用いることができる。例えば、絶縁層106を、上記に列挙した材料から選ばれた複数の材料からなる積層構造とすることができる。ところで、上記に列挙した材料等は、成膜条件だけでなく、各種プロセス等によっても結晶構造(特性)が変わり得る可能性があるため、本明細書等では強誘電性を発現する材料を強誘電体と呼ぶだけでなく、強誘電性を有しうる材料とも呼んでいる。 Furthermore, as a material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity, for example, a mixture or compound made up of multiple materials selected from the materials listed above can be used. For example, the insulating layer 106 can have a layered structure made up of multiple materials selected from the materials listed above. However, since the crystal structure (characteristics) of the materials listed above can change not only depending on the film formation conditions but also on various processes, etc., in this specification, a material that exhibits ferroelectricity is not only called a ferroelectric, but also called a material capable of exhibiting ferroelectricity.
ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を含む金属酸化物は、数nmといった薄膜であっても強誘電性を発現することができる。また、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を含む金属酸化物は、微小な面積でも強誘電性を発現することができる。したがって、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を含む金属酸化物を用いることで、半導体装置の微細化を図ることができる。ハフニウム及びジルコニウムを含む金属酸化物としては、代表的には、HfZrOXが挙げられる。また、HfZrOXにY(イットリウム)を添加した金属酸化物を用いることもできる。HfZrOXにY(イットリウム)を添加することで、強誘電性を高めることができる。 Metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in thin films of a few nanometers. Furthermore, metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in very small areas. Therefore, by using metal oxides containing hafnium and/or zirconium, miniaturization of semiconductor devices can be achieved. A representative example of a metal oxide containing hafnium and zirconium is HfZrO X. Furthermore, a metal oxide in which Y (yttrium) is added to HfZrO X can also be used. Adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO X can enhance ferroelectricity.
なお、本明細書等において、強誘電性を有しうる材料を「強誘電性材料」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、強誘電性材料を層状にしたものを、強誘電体層、金属酸化物膜又は金属窒化物膜と呼ぶ場合がある。また、このような、強誘電体層、金属酸化物膜又は金属窒化物膜を有する装置を、本明細書等において、強誘電体デバイスと呼ぶ場合がある。 In this specification, a material that can exhibit ferroelectricity may be referred to as a "ferroelectric material." A layer of ferroelectric material may be referred to as a ferroelectric layer, a metal oxide film, or a metal nitride film. A device having such a ferroelectric layer, metal oxide film, or metal nitride film may be referred to as a ferroelectric device in this specification.
なお、強誘電性は、外部電場により強誘電体層に含まれる結晶の酸素又は窒素が変位することで、発現するとされている。また、強誘電性の発現は、強誘電体層に含まれる結晶の結晶構造に依存すると推定される。よって、絶縁層が強誘電性を発現するには、絶縁層は結晶を含む必要がある。特に絶縁層は、直方晶系の結晶構造を有する結晶を含むと、強誘電性が発現するため好ましい。なお、絶縁層に含まれる結晶の結晶構造としては、正方晶系、直方晶系、単斜晶系及び六方晶系の中から選ばれるいずれか一又は複数であってもよい。また、絶縁層は、アモルファス構造を有していてもよい。このとき、絶縁層は、アモルファス構造と、結晶構造とを有する複合構造としてもよい。 Ferroelectricity is believed to be manifested when an external electric field displaces oxygen or nitrogen in crystals contained in the ferroelectric layer. It is also believed that the manifestation of ferroelectricity depends on the crystalline structure of the crystals contained in the ferroelectric layer. Therefore, for an insulating layer to manifest ferroelectricity, the insulating layer must contain crystals. It is particularly preferable for an insulating layer to contain crystals with an orthorhombic crystalline structure, as this will manifest ferroelectricity. The crystalline structure of the crystals contained in the insulating layer may be one or more selected from the group consisting of tetragonal, orthorhombic, monoclinic, and hexagonal. The insulating layer may also have an amorphous structure. In this case, the insulating layer may have a composite structure having both an amorphous structure and a crystalline structure.
また、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を有する酸化物に、元素周期表における第3族元素を添加することで、当該酸化物中の酸素欠損濃度が高まり、直方晶系の結晶構造を有する結晶が形成されやすくなる。これにより、直方晶系の結晶構造を有する結晶の存在割合が高くなり、残留分極を高めることができるため、好ましい。一方で、第3族元素の添加量が多すぎると、当該酸化物の結晶性が低下し、強誘電性が発現しにくくなる恐れがある。したがって、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を有する酸化物における第3族元素の含有率は、0.1atomic%以上10atomic%以下が好ましく、0.1atomic%以上5atomic%以下がより好ましく、0.1atomic%以上3atomic%以下がさらに好ましい。ここで、第3族元素の含有率とは、層に含有される全ての金属元素の原子数の和における、第3族元素の原子数の割合を指す。第3族元素としては、スカンジウム、ランタン、及びイットリウムから選ばれる一又は複数であることが好ましく、ランタン及びイットリウムの一方又は両方であることがより好ましい。 Furthermore, adding a Group 3 element in the periodic table to an oxide containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium increases the concentration of oxygen vacancies in the oxide, making it easier to form crystals with an orthorhombic crystal structure. This is preferable because it increases the proportion of crystals with an orthorhombic crystal structure and increases remanent polarization. On the other hand, adding too much of the Group 3 element may reduce the crystallinity of the oxide, making it difficult to exhibit ferroelectricity. Therefore, the content of the Group 3 element in an oxide containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium is preferably 0.1 atomic% to 10 atomic%, more preferably 0.1 atomic% to 5 atomic%, and even more preferably 0.1 atomic% to 3 atomic%. Here, the content of the Group 3 element refers to the ratio of the number of atoms of the Group 3 element to the sum of the number of atoms of all metal elements contained in the layer. The Group 3 element is preferably one or more selected from scandium, lanthanum, and yttrium, and more preferably one or both of lanthanum and yttrium.
ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を含む金属酸化物は、前述のように数nmといった薄膜であっても強誘電性を有しうることができるため、絶縁層106として好ましい。絶縁層106の膜厚は、100nm以下が好ましく、50nm以下がより好ましく、20nm以下がさらに好ましく、10nm以下(代表的には、2nm以上9nm以下)がさらに好ましい。 Metal oxides containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium are preferred for the insulating layer 106 because, as mentioned above, they can exhibit ferroelectricity even in thin films of only a few nanometers. The film thickness of the insulating layer 106 is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, even more preferably 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 10 nm or less (typically, 2 nm to 9 nm).
また、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムの一方又は両方を含む金属酸化物は、微小な面積でも強誘電性を有しうることができるため、絶縁層106として好ましい。例えば、強誘電体層の平面視における面積(占有面積)が、100μm2以下、10μm2以下、1μm2以下、又は0.1μm2以下であっても、強誘電性を有することができる。また、10000nm2以下、又は1000nm2以下であっても、強誘電性を有する場合がある。面積が小さい強誘電体層とすることで、半導体装置の占有面積を小さくすることができる。 Furthermore, metal oxides containing one or both of hafnium and zirconium can exhibit ferroelectricity even in a small area, making them preferable for the insulating layer 106. For example, the ferroelectric layer can exhibit ferroelectricity even when its area (occupied area) in a plan view is 100 μm 2 or less, 10 μm 2 or less, 1 μm 2 or less, or 0.1 μm 2 or less. Furthermore, the ferroelectric layer may exhibit ferroelectricity even when its area is 10,000 nm 2 or less, or 1,000 nm 2 or less. By using a ferroelectric layer with a small area, the occupied area of the semiconductor device can be reduced.
強誘電体は、絶縁体であって、外部から電場を与えることによって内部に分極が生じ、かつ当該電場をゼロにしても分極が残る性質を有する。このため、強誘電性材料を誘電体として用いて、不揮発性の記憶素子を形成することができる。強誘電性材料を用いた、不揮発性の記憶素子は、「強誘電体メモリ」と呼ばれることがある。 Ferroelectrics are insulators that are polarized internally when an external electric field is applied, and the polarization remains even when the electric field is removed. For this reason, ferroelectric materials can be used as dielectrics to form non-volatile memory elements. Non-volatile memory elements that use ferroelectric materials are sometimes called "ferroelectric memory."
絶縁層の形成方法は特に限定されず、蒸着法、原子層堆積(ALD:Atomic Layer Deposition)法、CVD法、スパッタリング法、スピンコート法などの各種形成方法を用いることができる。 The method for forming the insulating layer is not particularly limited, and various methods can be used, such as vapor deposition, atomic layer deposition (ALD), CVD, sputtering, and spin coating.
[導電層]
導電層(導電層102、導電層105、導電層107、導電層114など)には、それぞれ、アルミニウム、クロム、銅、銀、金、白金、亜鉛、タンタル、ニッケル、チタン、鉄、コバルト、モリブデン、タングステン、ハフニウム、バナジウム、ニオブ、マンガン、マグネシウム、ジルコニウム、ベリリウム、インジウム、ルテニウム、イリジウム、ストロンチウム、ランタンなどから選ばれた金属元素又は前述した金属元素を成分とする合金か、前述した金属元素を組み合わせた合金等を用いることが好ましい。前述した金属元素を成分とする合金として、当該合金の窒化物又は当該合金の酸化物を用いることが可能である。例えば、窒化タンタル、窒化チタン、チタンとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、タンタルとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、酸化ルテニウム、窒化ルテニウム、ストロンチウムとルテニウムを含む酸化物、ランタンとニッケルを含む酸化物などを用いることが好ましい。また、リン等の不純物元素を含有させた多結晶シリコンに代表される、電気伝導度が高い半導体、ニッケルシリサイドなどのシリサイドを用いることが可能である。
[Conductive layer]
For the conductive layers (conductive layer 102, conductive layer 105, conductive layer 107, conductive layer 114, etc.), it is preferable to use a metal element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, zinc, tantalum, nickel, titanium, iron, cobalt, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, iridium, strontium, lanthanum, etc., or an alloy containing the above-mentioned metal element as a component, or an alloy combining the above-mentioned metal elements. As the alloy containing the above-mentioned metal element as a component, a nitride of the alloy or an oxide of the alloy can be used. For example, it is preferable to use tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, a nitride containing titanium and aluminum, a nitride containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, an oxide containing strontium and ruthenium, an oxide containing lanthanum and nickel, or the like. Furthermore, it is possible to use a semiconductor with high electrical conductivity, typified by polycrystalline silicon containing an impurity element such as phosphorus, or a silicide such as nickel silicide.
また、タンタルを含む窒化物、チタンを含む窒化物、モリブデンを含む窒化物、タングステンを含む窒化物、ルテニウムを含む窒化物、タンタル及びアルミニウムを含む窒化物、チタン及びアルミニウムを含む窒化物などの窒素を含む導電性材料、酸化ルテニウム、ストロンチウム及びルテニウムを含む酸化物、ランタン及びニッケルを含む酸化物などの酸素を含む導電性材料、チタン、タンタル、ルテニウムなどの金属元素を含む材料は、酸化されにくい導電性材料、酸素の拡散を抑制する機能を有する導電性材料又は酸素を吸収しても導電性を維持する材料であるため、好ましい。なお、酸素を含む導電性材料として、酸化タングステンを含むインジウム酸化物(酸化インジウムともいう)、酸化チタンを含むインジウム酸化物、インジウムスズ酸化物(ITOともいう)、酸化チタンを含むインジウムスズ酸化物、シリコンを添加したインジウムスズ酸化物(ITSOともいう)、インジウム亜鉛酸化物(IZO(登録商標)ともいう)及び酸化タングステンを含むインジウム亜鉛酸化物などが挙げられる。本明細書等では、酸素を含む導電性材料を用いて形成される導電層を、酸化物導電層と呼ぶことがある。 In addition, conductive materials containing nitrogen, such as nitrides containing tantalum, nitrides containing titanium, nitrides containing molybdenum, nitrides containing tungsten, nitrides containing ruthenium, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, and nitrides containing titanium and aluminum; conductive materials containing oxygen, such as ruthenium oxide, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel; and materials containing metal elements, such as titanium, tantalum, and ruthenium, are preferred because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation, have the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion, or maintain conductivity even after absorbing oxygen. Examples of conductive materials containing oxygen include indium oxide containing tungsten oxide (also referred to as indium oxide), indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide (also referred to as ITO), indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide doped with silicon (also referred to as ITSO), indium zinc oxide (also referred to as IZO (registered trademark)), and indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide. In this specification and the like, a conductive layer formed using a conductive material containing oxygen may be referred to as an oxide conductive layer.
タングステン、銅又はアルミニウムを主成分とする導電性材料は、導電性が高いため、好ましい。 Conductive materials primarily composed of tungsten, copper, or aluminum are preferred due to their high conductivity.
また、上記の材料で形成される導電層を複数積層して用いることも可能である。例えば、前述した金属元素を含む材料と、酸素を含む導電性材料と、を組み合わせた積層構造にすることができる。また、前述した金属元素を含む材料と、窒素を含む導電性材料と、を組み合わせた積層構造にすることができる。また、前述した金属元素を含む材料と、酸素を含む導電性材料と、窒素を含む導電性材料と、を組み合わせた積層構造にすることができる。 It is also possible to use a stack of multiple conductive layers made of the above materials. For example, a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing oxygen. Also, a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing nitrogen. Also, a stack structure can be formed by combining the above-mentioned material containing a metal element with a conductive material containing oxygen and a conductive material containing nitrogen.
例えば、トランジスタ120の半導体層112に金属酸化物の一種である酸化物半導体を用いる場合において、導電層114などのゲート電極として機能する導電層には、前述した金属元素を含む材料と、酸素を含む導電性材料と、を組み合わせた積層構造を用いるとよい。この場合は、酸素を含む導電性材料を半導体層112側に設けるとよい。酸素を含む導電性材料を半導体層112側に設けることで、当該導電性材料から脱離した酸素が半導体層112のチャネル形成領域に供給されやすくなる。 For example, when an oxide semiconductor, which is a type of metal oxide, is used for the semiconductor layer 112 of the transistor 120, a conductive layer that functions as a gate electrode, such as the conductive layer 114, may have a stacked structure that combines a material containing the metal element described above and a conductive material containing oxygen. In this case, the conductive material containing oxygen may be provided on the semiconductor layer 112 side. By providing the conductive material containing oxygen on the semiconductor layer 112 side, oxygen desorbed from the conductive material is more easily supplied to the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 112.
半導体層112として金属酸化物の一種である酸化物半導体を用いる場合、導電層107及び導電層109は、それぞれが半導体層112と接する導電層であるため、酸化されにくい導電性材料、酸化されても電気抵抗が低く保たれる導電性材料、導電性を有する金属酸化物(酸化物導電体ともいう)又は酸素の拡散を抑制する機能を有する導電性材料を用いるとよい。当該導電性材料として、例えば、窒素を含む導電性材料及び酸素を含む導電性材料が挙げられる。これにより、導電層107及び導電層109の導電率が低下を抑制できる。 When an oxide semiconductor, which is a type of metal oxide, is used for the semiconductor layer 112, the conductive layers 107 and 109 are each conductive layers in contact with the semiconductor layer 112. Therefore, it is preferable to use a conductive material that is resistant to oxidation, a conductive material that maintains low electrical resistance even when oxidized, a metal oxide having conductivity (also referred to as an oxide conductor), or a conductive material that has the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion. Examples of such conductive materials include a conductive material containing nitrogen and a conductive material containing oxygen. This can suppress a decrease in the conductivity of the conductive layer 107 and the conductive layer 109.
導電層107及び導電層109として酸素を含む導電性材料を用いることで、導電層107及び導電層109が酸素を吸収しても導電性を維持できる。例えば、導電層107及び導電層109に接する絶縁層として過剰酸素を含む絶縁層を用いる場合においても、導電層107及び導電層109は導電性を維持できるため好適である。導電層107及び導電層109のそれぞれとして、例えば、ITO、ITSO、IZO(登録商標)などを用いることができる。 By using a conductive material containing oxygen for the conductive layers 107 and 109, the conductive layers 107 and 109 can maintain their conductivity even when they absorb oxygen. For example, even when an insulating layer containing excess oxygen is used as an insulating layer in contact with the conductive layers 107 and 109, this is preferable because the conductive layers 107 and 109 can maintain their conductivity. For example, ITO, ITSO, IZO (registered trademark), etc. can be used for the conductive layers 107 and 109, respectively.
導電層の形成方法は特に限定されず、蒸着法、ALD法、CVD法、スパッタリング法、スピンコート法などの各種形成方法を用いることができる。 The method for forming the conductive layer is not particularly limited, and various methods such as vapor deposition, ALD, CVD, sputtering, and spin coating can be used.
[半導体層]
半導体層112として、単結晶半導体、多結晶半導体、微結晶半導体、非晶質半導体などを、単体で又は組み合わせて用いることができる。半導体材料としては、例えば、シリコン、ゲルマニウムなどを用いることができる。また、シリコンゲルマニウム、炭化シリコン、ヒ化ガリウム、窒化物半導体などの化合物半導体を用いることもできる。また、化合物半導体として、半導体特性を有する有機物を用いることができる。また、化合物半導体として、半導体特性を有する金属酸化物(酸化物半導体ともいう)を用いることができる。なお、これらの半導体材料に、ドーパントとして不純物を含めることも可能である。
[Semiconductor layer]
As the semiconductor layer 112, a single crystal semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, an amorphous semiconductor, or the like can be used alone or in combination. Examples of semiconductor materials that can be used include silicon and germanium. Compound semiconductors such as silicon germanium, silicon carbide, gallium arsenide, and nitride semiconductors can also be used. Organic materials having semiconductor properties can also be used as compound semiconductors. Metal oxides (also referred to as oxide semiconductors) having semiconductor properties can also be used as compound semiconductors. Note that these semiconductor materials can also contain impurities as dopants.
なお、半導体層として、単体元素よりなる半導体又は化合物半導体を用いることができる。単体元素よりなる半導体として、例えば、シリコン及びゲルマニウムが挙げられる。化合物半導体として、例えば、ヒ化ガリウム及びシリコンゲルマニウムが挙げられる。その他、化合物半導体として、例えば、有機半導体及び窒化物半導体が挙げられる。なお、酸化物半導体も、化合物半導体の一種である。なお、これらの半導体材料に、ドーパントとして不純物を含めることも可能である。 The semiconductor layer can be made of a semiconductor made of a single element or a compound semiconductor. Examples of semiconductors made of a single element include silicon and germanium. Examples of compound semiconductors include gallium arsenide and silicon germanium. Other examples of compound semiconductors include organic semiconductors and nitride semiconductors. Note that oxide semiconductors are also a type of compound semiconductor. Note that it is also possible to include impurities as dopants in these semiconductor materials.
半導体層としてシリコンを用いる場合、半導体層に用いることができるシリコンとしては、単結晶シリコン、多結晶シリコン、微結晶シリコン及び非晶質シリコンが挙げられる。多結晶シリコンとして、例えば、低温ポリシリコン(LTPS:Low Temperature Poly Silicon)が挙げられる。 When silicon is used as the semiconductor layer, silicon that can be used for the semiconductor layer includes single-crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon, and amorphous silicon. An example of polycrystalline silicon is low-temperature polysilicon (LTPS).
例えば、トランジスタ120の半導体層112にシリコンを用い、半導体層112のソース領域及びドレイン領域にn型のドーパントとしてリン又はヒ素を含ませることで、当該トランジスタをn型トランジスタとして機能させることが可能である。また、半導体層112のソース領域及びドレイン領域にp型のドーパントとしてホウ素を含ませることで、当該トランジスタをp型トランジスタとして機能させることが可能である。なお、半導体層112のソース領域及びドレイン領域に、n型のドーパントとp型のドーパントの双方が含まれる場合、ドーパント濃度の高い方の導電型が発現しやすい。 For example, by using silicon for the semiconductor layer 112 of the transistor 120 and adding phosphorus or arsenic as an n-type dopant to the source and drain regions of the semiconductor layer 112, the transistor can function as an n-type transistor. Also, by adding boron as a p-type dopant to the source and drain regions of the semiconductor layer 112, the transistor can function as a p-type transistor. Note that when the source and drain regions of the semiconductor layer 112 contain both n-type and p-type dopants, the conductivity type with the higher dopant concentration is more likely to be expressed.
半導体層112として、半導体として機能する2次元材料を用いることができる。2次元材料は層状物質ともいい、層状の結晶構造を有する材料群の総称である。層状の結晶構造は、共有結合又はイオン結合によって形成される層が、ファンデルワールス結合のような、共有結合又はイオン結合よりも弱い結合を介して積層している構造である。層状物質は、単位層内における電気伝導性が高く、つまり、2次元電気伝導性が高い。半導体として機能し、かつ、2次元電気伝導性の高い材料を半導体層に用いることで、オン電流の大きいトランジスタを提供できる。 A two-dimensional material that functions as a semiconductor can be used for the semiconductor layer 112. Two-dimensional materials are also called layered materials and are a general term for a group of materials that have a layered crystal structure. A layered crystal structure is a structure in which layers formed by covalent or ionic bonds are stacked via bonds weaker than covalent or ionic bonds, such as van der Waals bonds. Layered materials have high electrical conductivity within each layer, that is, high two-dimensional electrical conductivity. By using a material that functions as a semiconductor and has high two-dimensional electrical conductivity for the semiconductor layer, a transistor with a large on-state current can be provided.
上記層状物質として、例えば、グラフェン、シリセン、カルコゲン化物などが挙げられる。カルコゲン化物は、カルコゲン(第16族に属する元素)を含む化合物である。また、カルコゲン化物として、遷移金属カルコゲナイド、13族カルコゲナイドなどが挙げられる。トランジスタの半導体層として適用可能な遷移金属カルコゲナイドとして、具体的には、硫化モリブデン(代表的にはMoS2)、セレン化モリブデン(代表的にはMoSe2)、モリブデンテルル(代表的にはMoTe2)、硫化タングステン(代表的にはWS2)、セレン化タングステン(代表的にはWSe2)、タングステンテルル(代表的にはWTe2)、硫化ハフニウム(代表的にはHfS2)、セレン化ハフニウム(代表的にはHfSe2)、硫化ジルコニウム(代表的にはZrS2)、セレン化ジルコニウム(代表的にはZrSe2)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the layered material include graphene, silicene, and chalcogenides. Chalcogenides are compounds containing chalcogen (an element belonging to Group 16). Examples of chalcogenides include transition metal chalcogenides and Group 13 chalcogenides. Specific examples of transition metal chalcogenides that can be used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor include molybdenum sulfide (typically MoS 2 ), molybdenum selenide (typically MoSe 2 ), molybdenum tellurium (typically MoTe 2 ), tungsten sulfide (typically WS 2 ), tungsten selenide (typically WSe 2 ), tungsten tellurium (typically WTe 2 ) , hafnium sulfide (typically HfS 2 ), hafnium selenide (typically HfSe 2 ), zirconium sulfide (typically ZrS 2 ), and zirconium selenide (typically ZrSe 2 ).
半導体層112として金属酸化物の一種である酸化物半導体を用いる場合、金属酸化物のバンドギャップは、シリコンのバンドギャップ(代表的には1.1eV)よりも大きいことが好ましく、2.0eV以上が好ましく、2.5eV以上がより好ましい。半導体層として機能し、シリコンよりもバンドギャップの大きい金属酸化物を用いることで、トランジスタのオフ電流を著しく低減できる。OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が小さいため、半導体装置の消費電力を低減できる。なお、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物については、実施の形態2で詳細に説明する。 When an oxide semiconductor, which is a type of metal oxide, is used for the semiconductor layer 112, the band gap of the metal oxide is preferably larger than the band gap of silicon (typically 1.1 eV), preferably 2.0 eV or more, and more preferably 2.5 eV or more. By using a metal oxide that functions as a semiconductor layer and has a band gap larger than that of silicon, the off-state current of the transistor can be significantly reduced. Because an OS transistor has a small off-state current, the power consumption of the semiconductor device can be reduced. Note that the metal oxide used for the semiconductor layer will be described in detail in Embodiment 2.
半導体層の形成方法は特に限定されず、蒸着法、ALD法、CVD法、スパッタリング法、スピンコート法などの各種形成方法を用いることができる。 The method for forming the semiconductor layer is not particularly limited, and various methods such as vapor deposition, ALD, CVD, sputtering, and spin coating can be used.
本実施の形態に示す構成は、他の実施の形態に示した構成と適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 The configuration described in this embodiment can be used in appropriate combination with the configurations described in other embodiments.
(実施の形態2)
本実施の形態では、トランジスタの半導体層に用いることができる金属酸化物について説明する。トランジスタの半導体層として、金属酸化物を含む層を単層又は積層で用いることができる。なお、積層構造を有する金属酸化物においては、後述するように、積層される層同士の境界が不明確な場合がある。
(Embodiment 2)
In this embodiment, a metal oxide that can be used for a semiconductor layer of a transistor will be described. As the semiconductor layer of a transistor, a layer containing a metal oxide can be used as a single layer or a stacked layer. Note that in a metal oxide having a stacked structure, the boundaries between stacked layers may be unclear, as will be described later.
[金属酸化物]
金属酸化物は、少なくともインジウム(In)又は亜鉛(Zn)を含むことが好ましく、インジウムを主成分として含むことが特に好ましい。また、金属酸化物は、インジウムと、元素Mと、亜鉛と、の中から選ばれる二又は三を有することが好ましく、インジウム及び亜鉛を主成分として含むことが特に好ましい。ここで、金属酸化物はインジウム及び亜鉛を主成分として含み、さらに、元素Mを有することができる。なお、元素Mは、酸素との結合エネルギーが高い金属元素又は半金属元素であり、例えば、酸素との結合エネルギーがインジウムよりも高い金属元素又は半金属元素である。元素Mとして、具体的には、アルミニウム、ガリウム、錫、イットリウム、チタン、バナジウム、クロム、マンガン、鉄、コバルト、ニッケル、ジルコニウム、モリブデン、ハフニウム、タンタル、タングステン、ランタン、セリウム、ネオジム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、ストロンチウム、バリウム、ホウ素、シリコン、ゲルマニウム、及びアンチモン等が挙げられる。金属酸化物が有する元素Mは、上記元素のいずれか一種又は複数種であることが好ましく、アルミニウム、ガリウム、錫、及びイットリウムから選ばれた一種又は複数種であることがより好ましく、ガリウム及び錫から選ばれる一以上であることがさらに好ましい。金属酸化物が有する元素Mがガリウムである場合、金属酸化物は、インジウム、ガリウム、及び亜鉛の中から選ばれるいずれか一又は複数を有することが好ましい。なお、本明細書等において、金属元素と半金属元素をまとめて「金属元素」と呼ぶことがあり、本明細書等に記載の「金属元素」には半金属元素が含まれることがある。
[Metal oxides]
The metal oxide preferably contains at least indium (In) or zinc (Zn), and particularly preferably contains indium as the main component. The metal oxide preferably contains two or three elements selected from indium, element M, and zinc, and particularly preferably contains indium and zinc as the main components. Here, the metal oxide contains indium and zinc as the main components and may further contain element M. The element M is a metal element or a metalloid element having a high bond energy with oxygen, for example, a metal element or a metalloid element having a bond energy with oxygen higher than that of indium. Specific examples of element M include aluminum, gallium, tin, yttrium, titanium, vanadium, chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, zirconium, molybdenum, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium, boron, silicon, germanium, and antimony. The element M contained in the metal oxide is preferably one or more of the above elements, more preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, tin, and yttrium, and even more preferably one or more selected from gallium and tin. When the element M contained in the metal oxide is gallium, the metal oxide preferably contains one or more selected from indium, gallium, and zinc. In this specification and the like, metal elements and metalloid elements may be collectively referred to as "metal elements," and the "metal elements" described in this specification and the like may include metalloid elements.
金属酸化物として、例えば、インジウム亜鉛酸化物(In−Zn酸化物、IZO(登録商標)ともいう)、インジウム錫酸化物(In−Sn酸化物、ITOともいう)、インジウムチタン酸化物(In−Ti酸化物)、インジウムガリウム酸化物(In−Ga酸化物)、インジウムガリウムアルミニウム酸化物(In−Ga−Al酸化物)、インジウムガリウム錫酸化物(In−Ga−Sn酸化物、IGTOとも記す)、インジウムアルミニウム亜鉛酸化物(In−Al−Zn酸化物、IAZOとも記す)、インジウム錫亜鉛酸化物(In−Sn−Zn酸化物とも記す)、インジウムチタン亜鉛酸化物(In−Ti−Zn酸化物)、インジウムガリウム亜鉛酸化物(In−Ga−Zn酸化物、IGZOとも記す)、酸化シリコンを含むインジウム錫酸化物(ITSO)、インジウムガリウム錫亜鉛酸化物(In−Ga−Sn−Zn酸化物、IGZTOとも記す)、インジウムガリウムアルミニウム亜鉛酸化物(In−Ga−Al−Zn酸化物、IGAZO又はIAGZOとも記す)等を用いることができる。又は、ガリウム亜鉛酸化物(Ga−Zn酸化物、GZOとも記す)、アルミニウム亜鉛酸化物(Al−Zn酸化物、AZOとも記す)、ガリウム錫酸化物(Ga−Sn酸化物)、アルミニウム錫酸化物(Al−Sn酸化物)等を用いることができる。また、金属酸化物として、酸化インジウムを用いることができる。また、金属酸化物として、酸化ガリウム、酸化亜鉛等を用いることができる。 Examples of metal oxides include indium zinc oxide (In-Zn oxide, also referred to as IZO (registered trademark)), indium tin oxide (In-Sn oxide, also referred to as ITO), indium titanium oxide (In-Ti oxide), indium gallium oxide (In-Ga oxide), indium gallium aluminum oxide (In-Ga-Al oxide), indium gallium tin oxide (In-Ga-Sn oxide, also referred to as IGTO), and indium aluminum zinc oxide (In-Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as IAZO). Examples of usable metal oxides include indium tin zinc oxide (In-Sn-Zn oxide), indium titanium zinc oxide (In-Ti-Zn oxide), indium gallium zinc oxide (In-Ga-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGZO), indium tin oxide containing silicon oxide (ITSO), indium gallium tin zinc oxide (In-Ga-Sn-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGZTO), and indium gallium aluminum zinc oxide (In-Ga-Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as IGAZO or IAGZO). Alternatively, examples of usable metal oxides include gallium zinc oxide (Ga-Zn oxide, also referred to as GZO), aluminum zinc oxide (Al-Zn oxide, also referred to as AZO), gallium tin oxide (Ga-Sn oxide), and aluminum tin oxide (Al-Sn oxide). Indium oxide can be used as the metal oxide. Gallium oxide, zinc oxide, and the like can also be used.
金属酸化物におけるインジウムの含有率を高くすることにより、トランジスタは大きいオン電流、及び高い周波数特性を得ることができる。 By increasing the indium content in the metal oxide, the transistor can achieve a large on-state current and high frequency characteristics.
なお、金属酸化物は、インジウムに代えて、元素周期表における周期番号が大きい金属元素の一種又は複数種を有することができる。又は、金属酸化物は、インジウムに加えて、元素周期表における周期番号が大きい金属元素の一種又は複数種を有することも可能である。金属元素の軌道の重なりが大きいほど、金属酸化物におけるキャリア伝導は大きくなる傾向がある。よって、元素周期表における周期番号が大きい金属元素を含むことで、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる場合がある。元素周期表における周期番号が大きい金属元素として、第5周期に属する金属元素、及び第6周期に属する金属元素等が挙げられる。当該金属元素として、具体的には、イットリウム、ジルコニウム、銀、カドミウム、錫、アンチモン、バリウム、鉛、ビスマス、ランタン、セリウム、プラセオジム、ネオジム、プロメチウム、サマリウム、及びユウロピウム等が挙げられる。なお、ランタン、セリウム、プラセオジム、ネオジム、プロメチウム、サマリウム、及びユウロピウムは、軽希土類元素と呼ばれる。 Instead of indium, the metal oxide can contain one or more metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table. Alternatively, the metal oxide can contain, in addition to indium, one or more metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table. The greater the overlap between the orbitals of metal elements, the greater the carrier conduction in the metal oxide. Therefore, including a metal element with a higher periodic number in the periodic table can sometimes improve the field-effect mobility of a transistor. Examples of metal elements with higher periodic numbers in the periodic table include metal elements belonging to the fifth period and the sixth period. Specific examples of such metal elements include yttrium, zirconium, silver, cadmium, tin, antimony, barium, lead, bismuth, lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, and europium. Lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, and europium are called light rare earth elements.
また、金属酸化物は、非金属元素の一種又は複数種を有することができる。金属酸化物が非金属元素を有することで、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる場合がある。非金属元素として、例えば、炭素、窒素、リン、硫黄、セレン、フッ素、塩素、臭素、及び水素等が挙げられる。 Furthermore, metal oxides can contain one or more nonmetallic elements. When metal oxides contain nonmetallic elements, the field-effect mobility of transistors can be increased in some cases. Examples of nonmetallic elements include carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and hydrogen.
また、金属酸化物における亜鉛の含有率を高くすることにより、結晶性の高い金属酸化物となり、金属酸化物中の不純物の拡散を抑制できる。したがって、トランジスタの電気特性の変動が抑制され、信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, by increasing the zinc content in the metal oxide, the metal oxide becomes highly crystalline, which can suppress the diffusion of impurities in the metal oxide. This therefore suppresses fluctuations in the electrical characteristics of the transistor and improves reliability.
また、金属酸化物における元素Mの含有率を高くすることにより、金属酸化物に酸素欠損が形成されるのを抑制できる。したがって、酸素欠損に起因するキャリア生成が抑制され、オフ電流の小さいトランジスタとすることができる。また、トランジスタの電気特性の変動が抑制され、信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, by increasing the content of element M in the metal oxide, the formation of oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide can be suppressed. Therefore, carrier generation due to oxygen vacancies is suppressed, resulting in a transistor with a small off-state current. Furthermore, fluctuations in the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be suppressed, improving reliability.
トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高くすることができる金属酸化物の構成例を説明する。例えば、酸化インジウムとIGZOとの積層構造を用いることが好ましい。具体的には、金属酸化物は、酸化インジウムと、酸化インジウム上のIGZOと、を有することが好ましい。また、金属酸化物として、窒素を含むIGZOを用いることが好ましい。例えば、成膜中又は成膜後にN2Oプラズマ処理を行うことで、窒素を含むIGZOを形成することができる。また、金属酸化物として、酸化インジウム、In−Ga酸化物、In−Zn酸化物、及びIGZTOのうち少なくとも一種を用いることが好ましい。 A structural example of a metal oxide that can increase the field-effect mobility of a transistor will be described. For example, it is preferable to use a stacked structure of indium oxide and IGZO. Specifically, it is preferable that the metal oxide has indium oxide and IGZO on the indium oxide. Furthermore, it is preferable to use IGZO containing nitrogen as the metal oxide. For example, IGZO containing nitrogen can be formed by performing N 2 O plasma treatment during or after film formation. Furthermore, it is preferable to use at least one of indium oxide, In—Ga oxide, In—Zn oxide, and IGZTO as the metal oxide.
本実施の形態では、金属酸化物として、In−M−Zn酸化物を例に挙げて説明する場合がある。 In this embodiment, In-M-Zn oxide may be used as an example of a metal oxide.
金属酸化物は、結晶性を有することが好ましい。結晶性を有する金属酸化物の構造としては、例えば、CAAC(c−axis aligned crystal)構造、多結晶(Poly−crystal)構造、及び、微結晶(nc:nano−crystal)構造が挙げられる。結晶性を有する金属酸化物を半導体層に用いることにより、半導体層中の欠陥準位密度を低減できる。よって、半導体層として金属酸化物を用いたトランジスタの信頼性を高めることができる。また、当該トランジスタが搭載された半導体装置の信頼性を高めることができる。 The metal oxide preferably has crystallinity. Examples of crystalline metal oxide structures include a c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC) structure, a polycrystalline (Poly-crystal) structure, and a nanocrystalline (nc) structure. By using a crystalline metal oxide for the semiconductor layer, the density of defect states in the semiconductor layer can be reduced. This can improve the reliability of a transistor that uses a metal oxide for the semiconductor layer. Furthermore, it can improve the reliability of a semiconductor device incorporating such a transistor.
なお、半導体層に用いる金属酸化物の結晶性は特に限定されない。例えば、半導体層は、非晶質(アモルファス)半導体(非晶質構造を有する半導体)、単結晶半導体(単結晶構造を有する半導体)又は単結晶以外の結晶性を有する半導体(微結晶半導体、多結晶半導体又は一部に結晶領域を有する半導体)の一以上を含む場合がある。半導体層が結晶性を有することにより、トランジスタ特性の劣化を抑制できる場合がある。 Note that the crystallinity of the metal oxide used in the semiconductor layer is not particularly limited. For example, the semiconductor layer may contain one or more of an amorphous semiconductor (a semiconductor having an amorphous structure), a single-crystal semiconductor (a semiconductor having a single-crystal structure), or a semiconductor having crystallinity other than single crystal (a microcrystalline semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, or a semiconductor having a crystalline region in part). The crystallinity of the semiconductor layer may help prevent deterioration of transistor characteristics.
半導体層の結晶性は、例えば、X線回折(XRD:X−Ray Diffraction)、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM:Transmission Electron Microscopy)、又は電子回折(ED:Electron Diffraction)により解析できる。又は、これらの手法を複数組み合わせて分析を行なうことも可能である。 The crystallinity of the semiconductor layer can be analyzed, for example, by X-ray diffraction (XRD), transmission electron microscopy (TEM), or electron diffraction (ED). Alternatively, analysis can be performed by combining multiple of these techniques.
半導体層に用いる金属酸化物は、CAAC構造を有することが好ましい。CAAC構造とは、複数の微結晶(代表的には、複数の、六方晶系の結晶構造を有する微結晶)がc軸配向を有し、かつa−b面においては、上記複数の微結晶が配向せずに連結した結晶構造である。また、高分解能TEM像(多波干渉像ともいう)を用いて、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物の断面を観察すると、結晶部において、金属原子が層状に配列していることを確認できる。よって、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物は、層状の結晶部を有する構造ともいえる。 The metal oxide used in the semiconductor layer preferably has a CAAC structure. A CAAC structure is a crystal structure in which multiple microcrystals (typically multiple microcrystals having a hexagonal crystal structure) have a c-axis orientation and are connected without being oriented in the a-b plane. Furthermore, when a cross section of a metal oxide having a CAAC structure is observed using a high-resolution TEM image (also called a multi-beam interference image), it can be confirmed that metal atoms are arranged in layers in the crystalline portion. Therefore, a metal oxide having a CAAC structure can also be said to have a structure having layered crystalline portions.
CAAC構造は例えば、c軸が金属酸化物の被形成面又は表面に垂直、又は概略垂直となるように形成される。CAAC構造では、被形成面に平行又は概略平行な方向に金属原子が層状に配列する。CAAC構造である領域において、c軸は、被形成面に対して好ましくは90°±20°以内(70°以上110°以下)、より好ましくは90°±15°以内(75°以上105°以下)、より好ましくは90°±10°以内(80°以上100°以下)、さらに好ましくは90°±5°以内(85°以上95°以下)である。 The CAAC structure is formed, for example, so that the c-axis is perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the surface or surface of the metal oxide on which it is formed. In the CAAC structure, metal atoms are arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which it is formed. In the region having the CAAC structure, the c-axis is preferably within 90°±20° (70° or more and 110° or less) relative to the surface on which it is formed, more preferably within 90°±15° (75° or more and 105° or less), more preferably within 90°±10° (80° or more and 100° or less), and even more preferably within 90°±5° (85° or more and 95° or less).
金属酸化物がCAAC構造を有する場合、TEM像を用いて観察された金属酸化物の断面において、金属原子の層状配列が反映された輝点群(具体的には、層状に並んだ輝点)が観察される。具体的には、被形成面に平行、又は概略平行な方向に輝点が層状に並ぶ様子が観察される。 When a metal oxide has a CAAC structure, a group of bright spots (specifically, bright spots arranged in layers) that reflect the layered arrangement of metal atoms are observed in a cross-section of the metal oxide observed using a TEM image. Specifically, bright spots are observed to be arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which they are formed.
CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物に対して電子回折を行うと、電子回折パターンにおいて、c軸配向性を示すスポット(輝点)が観測される。 When electron diffraction is performed on a metal oxide having a CAAC structure, spots (bright spots) indicating c-axis orientation are observed in the electron diffraction pattern.
また、TEM像を高速フーリエ変換(FFT:Fast Fourier Transform)処理を行うことで得られるFFTパターンは、電子回折パターンと同様の逆格子空間情報を反映する。 Furthermore, the FFT pattern obtained by performing fast Fourier transform (FFT) processing on the TEM image reflects reciprocal lattice spatial information similar to that of an electron diffraction pattern.
CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物の断面TEM像を取得し、断面TEM像内を領域ごとにFFT処理を行うことでFFTパターンを作成し、作成したFFTパターンから、各領域の結晶軸の方向を算出することができる。具体的には、作成したFFTパターンで観察されるスポットのうち、輝度が高く、かつ、中心から略等しい距離にある2つのスポットを結ぶ線分の方向を結晶軸の方向とする。FFTパターンから算出した各領域の結晶軸の方向が、被形成面に対して好ましくは70°以上110°以下(90°±20°以内)である領域、より好ましくは75°以上105°以下(90°±15°以内)である領域、より好ましくは80°以上100°以下(90°±10°以内)である領域、さらに85°以上95°以下(90°±5°以内)である領域をCAAC構造とみなすことができる。 A cross-sectional TEM image of a metal oxide having a CAAC structure is acquired, and an FFT pattern is created by performing FFT processing on each region within the cross-sectional TEM image. The crystal axis direction of each region can then be calculated from the created FFT pattern. Specifically, the direction of the line segment connecting two spots observed in the created FFT pattern that are high in brightness and approximately equidistant from the center is defined as the crystal axis direction. Regions where the crystal axis direction of each region calculated from the FFT pattern is preferably 70° to 110° (within 90° ± 20°) relative to the surface to be formed, more preferably 75° to 105° (within 90° ± 15°), more preferably 80° to 100° (within 90° ± 10°), and even more preferably 85° to 95° (within 90° ± 5°) can be considered to have a CAAC structure.
TEM像を用いて、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物を、被形成面に対して垂直な方向から見ると、a−b面において、三角形状又は六角形状の原子配列が観測され、かつ結晶性を有する。 When metal oxides with a CAAC structure are viewed using TEM images in a direction perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed, triangular or hexagonal atomic arrangements are observed in the a-b plane, and the oxides are crystalline.
[金属酸化物の組成]
金属酸化物は、インジウム(In)を含むことが好ましく、Inの含有率が高いことがより好ましい。半導体層としてInの含有率が高い金属酸化物を用いることにより、トランジスタのオン電流を大きくし、周波数特性を高くすることができる。例えば、半導体層に酸化インジウムを用いることが好ましい。
[Metal oxide composition]
The metal oxide preferably contains indium (In), and more preferably has a high In content. By using a metal oxide with a high In content for the semiconductor layer, the on-state current of the transistor can be increased, and the frequency characteristics can be improved. For example, it is preferable to use indium oxide for the semiconductor layer.
また、金属酸化物は、亜鉛を含むことができる。金属酸化物が亜鉛を含むことで、結晶性の高い金属酸化物、例えば、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物となる。例えば、半導体層として、In−Zn酸化物を用いることができる。具体的には、In:Zn=1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Zn=2:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Zn=4:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。なお、近傍の組成とは、所望の原子数比の±30%の範囲を含む。 The metal oxide may also contain zinc. When the metal oxide contains zinc, it becomes a highly crystalline metal oxide, for example, a metal oxide having a CAAC structure. For example, In-Zn oxide can be used as the semiconductor layer. Specifically, metal oxides having a composition of In:Zn = 1:1 [atomic ratio] or a composition close to that, In:Zn = 2:1 [atomic ratio] or a composition close to that, or In:Zn = 4:1 [atomic ratio] or a composition close to that can be used. Note that a composition close to that includes a range of ±30% of the desired atomic ratio.
また、金属酸化物は、元素Mを含むことができる。金属酸化物が元素Mを含むことで、金属酸化物に酸素欠損が形成されることを抑制できる。よって、半導体層として金属酸化物を用いるトランジスタの信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, the metal oxide may contain element M. When the metal oxide contains element M, the formation of oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide can be suppressed. This can improve the reliability of transistors that use metal oxide as semiconductor layers.
例えば、半導体層として、元素Mを微量に含むIn−Zn酸化物を用いることができる。具体的には、In:Ga:Zn=4:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Ga:Zn=2:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Ga:Zn=1:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。また、In:Sn:Zn=4:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Sn:Zn=2:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Sn:Zn=1:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。 For example, the semiconductor layer can be made of In-Zn oxide containing a trace amount of element M. Specifically, metal oxides having a composition of In:Ga:Zn = 4:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, In:Ga:Zn = 2:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, or In:Ga:Zn = 1:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition can be used. Also, metal oxides having a composition of In:Sn:Zn = 4:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, In:Sn:Zn = 2:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, or In:Sn:Zn = 1:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition can be used.
また、半導体層として、元素Mを含むIn−Zn酸化物を用いることができる。具体的には、In:M:Zn=1:1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:M:Zn=1:1:1.2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:M:Zn=1:1:0.5[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:M:Zn=1:1:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:M:Zn=4:2:3[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:M:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:M:Zn=1:3:4[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成の金属酸化物を用いることができる。 Furthermore, an In-Zn oxide containing element M can be used as the semiconductor layer. Specifically, metal oxides having a composition of In:M:Zn = 1:1:1 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn = 1:1:1.2 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn = 1:1:0.5 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn = 1:1:2 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn = 4:2:3 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn = 1:3:2 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto, or In:M:Zn = 1:3:4 [atomic ratio] or a composition close thereto can be used.
なお、金属酸化物をスパッタリング法で形成する場合、形成後の金属酸化物の組成はスパッタリングターゲットの組成と異なる場合がある。特に、亜鉛は、形成後の金属酸化物における含有率が、スパッタリングターゲットと比較して50%程度にまで減少する場合がある。 When metal oxides are formed by sputtering, the composition of the formed metal oxide may differ from the composition of the sputtering target. In particular, the zinc content in the formed metal oxide may decrease to about 50% compared to the sputtering target.
また、In−Ga−Zn酸化物等の、複数種の金属元素を有する金属酸化物を原子層堆積(ALD:Atomic Layer Deposition)法で成膜する場合、狙いの組成に合わせて、各金属元素を含むプリカーサのサイクル数の比を設定することができる。例えば、In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]のIn−Ga−Zn酸化物を成膜する場合、Inを含むプリカーサの成膜と酸化剤による処理のサイクルを1回行い、Gaを含むプリカーサの成膜と酸化剤による処理のサイクルを3回行い、Znを含むプリカーサの成膜と酸化剤による処理のサイクルを2回行うことができる。ただし、各金属元素を含むプリカーサのサイクル数の比と、成膜された金属酸化物における各金属元素の原子数比が一致しない場合もある。 Furthermore, when depositing a metal oxide containing multiple metal elements, such as In-Ga-Zn oxide, using atomic layer deposition (ALD), the ratio of the number of cycles of precursors containing each metal element can be set to match the target composition. For example, when depositing an In-Ga-Zn oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:2, one cycle of depositing an In-containing precursor and treating it with an oxidizing agent can be performed, three cycles of depositing a Ga-containing precursor and treating it with an oxidizing agent can be performed, and two cycles of depositing a Zn-containing precursor and treating it with an oxidizing agent can be performed. However, the ratio of the number of cycles of precursors containing each metal element and the atomic ratio of each metal element in the deposited metal oxide film may not match.
金属酸化物の組成の分析には、例えば、EDX、XPS、誘導結合プラズマ質量分析法(ICP−MS:Inductively Coupled Plasma−Mass Spectrometry)、又は誘導結合高周波プラズマ発光分光法(ICP−AES:Inductively Coupled Plasma−Atomic Emission Spectrometry)を用いることができる。又は、これらの手法を複数組み合わせて分析を行なうことができる。なお、含有率が低い元素は、分析精度の影響により、実際の含有率と分析によって得られた含有率が異なる場合がある。例えば、元素Mの含有率が低い場合、分析によって得られた元素Mの含有率が、実際の含有率より低くなる場合がある。 To analyze the composition of metal oxides, for example, EDX, XPS, inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS), or inductively coupled plasma atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) can be used. Alternatively, analysis can be performed by combining multiple of these techniques. Note that for elements with low content, the actual content and the content obtained by analysis may differ due to analytical accuracy. For example, if the content of element M is low, the content of element M obtained by analysis may be lower than the actual content.
金属酸化物は、2層以上の積層構造にすることも可能である。半導体層として用いる金属酸化物が、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、の2層構造である場合、第2の層は、第1の層と組成が異なることが好ましい。また、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物が、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、第2の層上の第3の層と、の3層構造である場合、第2の層は、第1の層及び第3の層と組成が異なることが好ましい。なお、第1の層には、第3の層と同じ組成を用いることができる。又は、第1の層と第3の層は、異なる組成とすることもできる。 Metal oxides can also be formed into a stacked structure of two or more layers. When the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer has a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer, it is preferable that the second layer have a different composition from the first layer. Furthermore, when the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer has a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer, it is preferable that the second layer have a different composition from the first and third layers. The first layer can have the same composition as the third layer. Alternatively, the first and third layers can have different compositions.
第1乃至第3の層のそれぞれには、前述した金属酸化物を用いることができる。 The first to third layers can each be made of the metal oxides mentioned above.
第2の層は、例えば、酸化インジウム、In−Zn酸化物、又は元素Mを微量に含むIn−Zn酸化物等を用いることができる。具体的には、In:Zn=1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Zn=2:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Zn=4:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。例えば、In:Ga:Zn=4:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Ga:Zn=2:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Ga:Zn=1:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。また、例えば、In:Sn:Zn=4:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Sn:Zn=2:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Sn:Zn=1:0.1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。第2の層におけるInの含有率を高めることで、オン電流を大きくし、周波数特性を高くすることができる。 The second layer can be made of, for example, indium oxide, In-Zn oxide, or In-Zn oxide containing a trace amount of element M. Specifically, metal oxides having a composition of In:Zn = 1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, In:Zn = 2:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, or In:Zn = 4:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition can be used. For example, metal oxides having a composition of In:Ga:Zn = 4:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, In:Ga:Zn = 2:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition, or In:Ga:Zn = 1:0.1:1 (atomic ratio) or a similar composition can be used. Alternatively, for example, a metal oxide having an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn=4:0.1:1 or a similar composition, an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn=2:0.1:1 or a similar composition, or an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn=1:0.1:1 or a similar composition can be used. Increasing the In content in the second layer can increase the on-state current and improve the frequency characteristics.
第1の層及び第3の層それぞれの伝導帯下端は、第2の層の伝導帯下端よりも真空準位側に位置することが好ましい。別言すると、第1の層及び第3の層それぞれの伝導帯下端のエネルギーは、第2の層の伝導帯下端のエネルギーよりも小さいことが好ましい。このとき、第2の層は、伝導帯下端がより真空準位側に位置する第1の層及び第3の層に挟持され、主に電流経路(チャネル)として機能することができる。 The conduction band minimum of each of the first layer and the third layer is preferably located closer to the vacuum level than the conduction band minimum of the second layer. In other words, the energy of the conduction band minimum of each of the first layer and the third layer is preferably lower than the energy of the conduction band minimum of the second layer. In this case, the second layer is sandwiched between the first layer and the third layer, whose conduction band minimums are located closer to the vacuum level, and can function mainly as a current path (channel).
第2の層が第1の層及び第3の層により挟持されることで、第2の層の界面及びその近傍においてトラップされるキャリアを少なくすることができる。また、チャネルをゲート絶縁層の表面から遠ざけることができ、表面散乱の影響を低減することができる。これにより、チャネルが絶縁層界面から遠ざけられた埋め込みチャネル型のトランジスタを実現でき、電界効果移動度を高くすることができる。また、バックチャネル側に形成されうる界面準位の影響が低減され、トランジスタの光劣化(例えば、光負バイアス劣化)を抑制でき、トランジスタの信頼性を高めることができる。 By sandwiching the second layer between the first and third layers, it is possible to reduce carriers trapped at the interface of the second layer and its vicinity. Furthermore, the channel can be moved away from the surface of the gate insulating layer, reducing the effects of surface scattering. This makes it possible to realize a buried channel transistor in which the channel is moved away from the insulating layer interface, thereby increasing field-effect mobility. Furthermore, the effects of interface states that may form on the back channel side are reduced, suppressing light degradation of the transistor (e.g., negative bias light degradation) and improving transistor reliability.
第1の層乃至第3の層で埋め込みチャネルを形成する場合、例えば、第1の層及び第3の層として、第2の層と比較してGaの含有率が高い金属酸化物を用いることができる。具体的には、第1の層及び第3の層のそれぞれには、In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物、In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物、又はIn:Ga:Zn=1:3:4[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることができる。又は、Ga−Zn酸化物又は酸化ガリウムを用いることができる。第1の層及び第3の層のGaの含有率を高めることにより、第1の層及び第3の層それぞれの伝導帯下端が、第2の層の伝導帯下端よりも真空準位側に位置する場合がある。 When forming a buried channel using the first to third layers, for example, the first and third layers can be made of a metal oxide with a higher Ga content than the second layer. Specifically, the first and third layers can each be made of a metal oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:1:1 or a similar composition, a metal oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:2 or a similar composition, or a metal oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:4 or a similar composition. Alternatively, Ga-Zn oxide or gallium oxide can be used. Increasing the Ga content of the first and third layers can position the conduction band minimum of each of the first and third layers closer to the vacuum level than the conduction band minimum of the second layer.
また、第1の層及び第3の層におけるGaの含有率を高めることで、第1の層及び第3の層の水素に対するバリア性を高めることができる。よって、第1の層の下方又は第3の層の上方から、第2の層に水素が拡散することを抑制できる。また、第1の層及び第3の層のGaの含有率を高めることで、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物の形成以降に加わる熱等により、金属酸化物に含まれる、水素又は水等の不純物を低減することができる。なお、第1の層及び第3の層に、第2の層と比較してInの含有率が低い金属酸化物を用いることで、同様の効果を奏する場合がある。 Furthermore, by increasing the Ga content in the first layer and the third layer, the barrier properties of the first layer and the third layer against hydrogen can be improved. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of hydrogen from below the first layer or above the third layer into the second layer. Furthermore, by increasing the Ga content in the first layer and the third layer, it is possible to reduce impurities such as hydrogen or water contained in the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer due to heat or the like applied after its formation. Note that a similar effect may be achieved by using a metal oxide with a lower In content for the first layer and the third layer compared to the second layer.
例えば、第3の層には、In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成、又はIn:Ga:Zn=1:3:4[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を用いることが好ましい。このとき、第3の層は、インジウムと、ガリウムと、を有する。 For example, it is preferable to use a metal oxide having a composition of In:Ga:Zn = 1:1:1 [atomic ratio] or a similar composition, In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:2 [atomic ratio] or a similar composition, or In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:4 [atomic ratio] or a similar composition for the third layer. In this case, the third layer contains indium and gallium.
また、第1の層及び第3の層におけるGaの含有率を高めることで、第1の層及び第3の層の酸素に対するバリア性を高めることができる。よって、チャネルが形成される第2の層から酸素が放出されるのを抑制し、第2の層での酸素欠損の形成、又は、第2の層中の酸素欠損量の増加を抑制することができる。これにより、トランジスタの電気特性を良好にすることができる。 Furthermore, by increasing the Ga content in the first and third layers, the oxygen barrier properties of the first and third layers can be improved. This prevents oxygen from being released from the second layer where the channel is formed, and prevents the formation of oxygen vacancies in the second layer or an increase in the amount of oxygen vacancies in the second layer. This improves the electrical characteristics of the transistor.
また、第1の層におけるGaの含有率を高めることで、第1の層の抵抗率を、第2の層の抵抗率よりも高くすることができる場合がある。第1の層をバックチャネル側に設ける場合、第1の層として抵抗率の高い層を設けることで、しきい値電圧のマイナスシフト又はオン電流の低下を抑制することができる。したがって、トランジスタのしきい値電圧がプラスシフトし、トランジスタのノーマリーオフ化を図ることができる。以上より、トランジスタの電気特性を良好にし、トランジスタの信頼性を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, by increasing the Ga content in the first layer, it may be possible to make the resistivity of the first layer higher than that of the second layer. When the first layer is provided on the back channel side, providing a layer with high resistivity as the first layer can suppress a negative shift in threshold voltage or a decrease in on-current. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transistor is shifted positively, making it possible to make the transistor normally off. As a result, the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be improved, and the reliability of the transistor can be improved.
金属酸化物のバンドギャップの評価には、分光光度計による光学評価、分光エリプソメトリ、フォトルミネッセンス法、X線光電子分光法、又はX線吸収微細構造(XAFS:X−ray Absorption Fine Structure)を用いることができる。また、これらの手法を複数組み合わせて分析を行うことができる。電子親和力又は伝導帯下端は、真空準位と価電子帯上端のエネルギーとの差であるイオン化ポテンシャルと、バンドギャップから求めることができる。イオン化ポテンシャルの評価には、例えば、紫外線光電子分光分析(UPS:Ultraviolet Photoelectron Spectroscopy)を用いることができる。 To evaluate the band gap of metal oxides, optical evaluation using a spectrophotometer, spectroscopic ellipsometry, photoluminescence, X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy, or X-ray absorption fine structure (XAFS) can be used. Analysis can also be performed by combining multiple of these techniques. The electron affinity or conduction band minimum can be determined from the ionization potential, which is the energy difference between the vacuum level and the top of the valence band, and the band gap. To evaluate the ionization potential, for example, ultraviolet photoelectron spectroscopy (UPS) can be used.
なお、第1の層及び第3の層は、第2の層と比較してInの含有率が高い金属酸化物を用いることができる。また、第1の層及び第3の層の一方は、第2の層と比較してInの含有率が高い金属酸化物を用い、他方は、第2の層と比較してGaの含有率が高い金属酸化物を用いることができる。 The first and third layers may be made of a metal oxide having a higher In content than the second layer. Also, one of the first and third layers may be made of a metal oxide having a higher In content than the second layer, and the other may be made of a metal oxide having a higher Ga content than the second layer.
また、第1の層、第2の層、及び第3の層は、それぞれが上記に記載の組成を有する層の積層にすることができる。例えば、第1の層は、Gaの含有率が高い金属酸化物上に、Inの含有率が高い金属酸化物を積層した構成にすることができる。また、例えば、第3の層は、Inの含有率が高い金属酸化物上に、Gaの含有率が高い金属酸化物を積層した構成にすることができる。 Furthermore, the first layer, second layer, and third layer can each be a stack of layers having the composition described above. For example, the first layer can be configured by stacking a metal oxide with a high In content on a metal oxide with a high Ga content. For example, the third layer can be configured by stacking a metal oxide with a high Ga content on a metal oxide with a high In content.
[金属酸化物の作製方法]
金属酸化物は、スパッタリング法、化学気相堆積(CVD:Chemical Vapor Deposition)法、真空蒸着法、分子線エピタキシー(MBE:Molecular Beam Epitaxy)法、パルスレーザ堆積(PLD:Pulsed Laser Deposition)法、又はALD法等を用いて形成できる。
[Method for producing metal oxide]
The metal oxide can be formed using a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method, a vacuum deposition method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a pulsed laser deposition (PLD) method, an ALD method, or the like.
また、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物は、2種の成膜方法を用いて作製することができる。例えば、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物は、第1の成膜方法と、第2の成膜方法と、を用いて作製することができる。 Furthermore, the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can be produced using two different film formation methods. For example, the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can be produced using a first film formation method and a second film formation method.
半導体層として用いる金属酸化物は、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、の2層構造とすることができる。金属酸化物が2層構造である場合、当該金属酸化物は、被形成面上に第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層を形成した後、その上方に、第2の成膜方法を用いて第2の層を形成することにより、作製することができる。 The metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can have a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer. When the metal oxide has a two-layer structure, the metal oxide can be produced by forming the first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, and then forming the second layer on top of the first layer using a second film formation method.
第1の成膜方法は、第2の成膜方法と比較して、被形成面へのダメージが小さい成膜方法を用いることが好ましい。これにより、金属酸化物と、当該金属酸化物の被形成面である層との界面における混合層の形成を抑制することができる。また、第1の層上に形成する第2の層に、シリコン等の不純物が混入することを抑制できるため、金属酸化物層の結晶性がより高くなる場合がある。 The first film formation method preferably causes less damage to the surface on which the metal oxide is formed than the second film formation method. This makes it possible to suppress the formation of a mixed layer at the interface between the metal oxide and the layer on which the metal oxide is formed. Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the incorporation of impurities such as silicon into the second layer formed on the first layer, the crystallinity of the metal oxide layer may be increased.
第1の成膜方法として、例えば、ALD法、CVD法、MBE法などが挙げられる。また、CVD法として、プラズマCVD(PECVD:Plasma Enhanced CVD)法、熱CVD法、光CVD法、MOCVD法などが挙げられる。MBE法は、基板の結晶系を反映した結晶構造の薄膜を成長させる成膜方法であり、被形成面へのダメージが少ない成膜方法の1つと言える。また、第1の成膜方法として、湿式法を用いることが可能である。湿式法は、被形成面へのダメージが少ない成膜方法の1つである。湿式法として、例えば、スプレーコート法等が挙げられる。 Examples of the first film formation method include ALD, CVD, and MBE. Examples of CVD methods include plasma-enhanced CVD (PECVD), thermal CVD, photo-assisted CVD, and MOCVD. The MBE method is a film formation method that grows a thin film with a crystalline structure that reflects the crystalline system of the substrate, and is one of the film formation methods that causes minimal damage to the surface on which the film is formed. A wet method can also be used as the first film formation method. The wet method is one of the film formation methods that causes minimal damage to the surface on which the film is formed. Examples of wet methods include spray coating.
第2の成膜方法は、結晶性を有する金属酸化物を成膜可能な方法を用いることが好ましい。このとき成膜される金属酸化物は、CAAC構造を有することが特に好ましい。第2の成膜方法として、例えば、スパッタリング法及びPLD法等が挙げられる。スパッタリング法を用いて成膜された金属酸化物は結晶性を有しやすいため、スパッタリング法は、第2の成膜方法として好適である。 The second film formation method is preferably a method capable of forming a crystalline metal oxide film. It is particularly preferable that the metal oxide film formed in this case has a CAAC structure. Examples of the second film formation method include sputtering and PLD. Because metal oxide films formed using sputtering tend to be crystalline, sputtering is preferred as the second film formation method.
なお、被形成面上に第2の成膜方法を用いて金属酸化物を形成する場合、被形成面へのダメージにより、金属酸化物に含まれる成分と、被形成面である層に含まれる成分とのアロイ化が生じる場合がある。アロイ化が生じることで、当該金属酸化物と被形成面である層との界面において混合層が形成される場合がある。当該混合層は、アロイ化した領域とも言える。また、混合層の形成は、アロイ化とも言える。 When a metal oxide is formed on a surface using the second film formation method, damage to the surface may cause alloying between components contained in the metal oxide and components contained in the layer on the surface. This alloying may result in the formation of a mixed layer at the interface between the metal oxide and the layer on the surface. This mixed layer may also be referred to as an alloyed region. The formation of a mixed layer may also be referred to as alloying.
例えば、第2の成膜方法としてスパッタリング法を用いる場合、ターゲット等から放出される粒子(スパッタリング粒子ともいう)、又はスパッタリング粒子等により基板側に与えられるエネルギー等によって、混合層が形成される場合がある。具体的には、シリコンを有する絶縁層、一例として酸化シリコン膜を被形成面として、第2の成膜方法を用いて金属酸化物を成膜する場合、金属酸化物中にシリコンが混入する恐れがある。シリコン等の不純物の金属酸化物への混入により、金属酸化物の結晶化が阻害される懸念がある。また、不純物が混入した金属酸化物層をトランジスタに用いることで、トランジスタの初期特性又は信頼性に悪影響を与える懸念がある。また、後述する熱処理を行った場合においても、アロイ化した領域の結晶性を高めることは困難である。 For example, when sputtering is used as the second deposition method, a mixed layer may be formed by particles (also called sputtering particles) emitted from a target or the like, or by energy imparted to the substrate by the sputtering particles. Specifically, when a metal oxide film is formed using the second deposition method on a silicon-containing insulating layer, such as a silicon oxide film, as the deposition surface, silicon may be mixed into the metal oxide. There is a concern that the inclusion of impurities such as silicon in the metal oxide may inhibit the crystallization of the metal oxide. Furthermore, there is a concern that using a metal oxide layer containing impurities in a transistor may adversely affect the initial characteristics or reliability of the transistor. Furthermore, even when the heat treatment described below is performed, it is difficult to improve the crystallinity of the alloyed region.
そこで、前述したように、第2の成膜方法を用いて金属酸化物を形成する前に、第1の成膜方法を用いて金属酸化物を形成することで、金属酸化物層への不純物の混入を抑制することができる。また、被形成面である層とのアロイ化を抑制することができる。したがって、トランジスタの初期特性及び信頼性を向上させることができる。また、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物の結晶性をより高くすることができる。 As described above, by forming a metal oxide using the first film formation method before forming a metal oxide using the second film formation method, it is possible to prevent impurities from being mixed into the metal oxide layer. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent alloying with the layer on which the metal oxide is to be formed. This improves the initial characteristics and reliability of the transistor. Furthermore, it is possible to further increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer.
なお、第1の層と第2の層との界面において混合層が形成されることがある。混合層は、第1の層に含まれる成分と、第2の層に含まれる成分と、を有する。例えば、第1の層に酸化ガリウムを用い、第2の層にインジウムを含む金属酸化物を用いる場合、混合層は、ガリウムと、インジウムと、を有する。また、例えば、第2の層におけるインジウムの含有率が、第1の層におけるインジウムの含有率よりも高い場合、混合層におけるインジウムの含有率は、第1の層におけるインジウムの含有率以上であって、第2の層におけるインジウムの含有率以下となる。 Note that a mixed layer may be formed at the interface between the first layer and the second layer. The mixed layer contains the components contained in the first layer and the components contained in the second layer. For example, if gallium oxide is used for the first layer and a metal oxide containing indium is used for the second layer, the mixed layer contains gallium and indium. Furthermore, for example, if the indium content in the second layer is higher than the indium content in the first layer, the indium content in the mixed layer will be equal to or greater than the indium content in the first layer and equal to or less than the indium content in the second layer.
ALD法は、スパッタリング法と比較して、被形成面へのダメージを抑制することができるため、第1の成膜方法として好適である。また、ALD法はスパッタリング法と比較して被覆性の優れた成膜方法であり、第1の層の成膜方法としてALD法を用いることにより、金属酸化物の被覆性を高めることができる。よって、アスペクト比の高い段差、開口部、等の上に金属酸化物を良好に被覆することができる。 The ALD method is suitable as the first film formation method because it can reduce damage to the surface to be formed compared to the sputtering method. Furthermore, the ALD method is a film formation method with superior coverage compared to the sputtering method, and using the ALD method as the film formation method for the first layer can improve the coverage of the metal oxide. Therefore, the metal oxide can be well coated on steps, openings, and the like with high aspect ratios.
第1の層としては、例えば、CAAC構造よりも結晶性の低い、微結晶構造又は非晶質構造の金属酸化物が形成される場合がある。結晶性の低い第1の層上に結晶性の高い第2の層を形成することにより、又は第2の層を形成した後に熱処理を加えることにより、第2の層を核として、第1の層の結晶性が高まる場合がある。これにより、被形成面との界面の近傍を含めた金属酸化物層の全体において、結晶性を高めることができる場合がある。 The first layer may be formed, for example, as a metal oxide with a microcrystalline or amorphous structure, which has lower crystallinity than a CAAC structure. By forming a highly crystalline second layer on the low-crystallinity first layer, or by applying heat treatment after forming the second layer, the crystallinity of the first layer may be increased, with the second layer acting as a nucleus. This may increase the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide layer, including the area near the interface with the surface on which it is formed.
被形成面である層は、例えば、酸化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜等の絶縁膜である。なお、トランジスタ構造によっては、窒化チタン膜、タングステン膜、ITSO膜等の導電膜である場合がある。また、被形成面である層は結晶性を有さなくてもよい。なお、当該層が結晶性を有する場合においては、金属酸化物層が有する金属酸化物と、格子整合性が低い結晶構造であることが好ましい。 The layer on which the film is formed is, for example, an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, or a hafnium oxide film. Depending on the transistor structure, the film may be a conductive film such as a titanium nitride film, a tungsten film, or an ITSO film. The layer on which the film is formed does not need to be crystalline. If the layer is crystalline, it preferably has a crystal structure with low lattice matching with the metal oxide in the metal oxide layer.
第1の層は、ALD法を用いて形成することが好ましい。ここで、第1の層として、ALD法を用いてIn−M−Zn酸化物を形成する方法について説明する。 The first layer is preferably formed using the ALD method. Here, we will explain a method for forming In-M-Zn oxide as the first layer using the ALD method.
まず、インジウムを有するプリカーサを含む原料ガスを反応室(チャンバーともいう)に導入し、被形成面に当該プリカーサを吸着させる。次に、リアクタントとして、酸化剤を反応室に導入し、吸着したプリカーサと反応させて、インジウムを基板に吸着させたままインジウム以外の成分を脱離させることで、インジウムと酸素とが結合した層を形成する。 First, a source gas containing an indium-containing precursor is introduced into a reaction chamber, and the precursor is adsorbed onto the surface to be formed. Next, an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant, and reacts with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than indium while leaving indium adsorbed to the substrate, forming a layer in which indium and oxygen are combined.
次に、元素Mを有するプリカーサを含む原料ガスを反応室に導入し、インジウムと酸素とが結合した層上に吸着させる。次に、リアクタントとして、酸化剤を反応室に導入し、吸着したプリカーサと反応させて、元素Mを基板に吸着させたまま元素M以外の成分を脱離させることで、元素Mと酸素とが結合した層を形成する。 Next, a source gas containing a precursor containing element M is introduced into the reaction chamber and adsorbed onto the layer of indium and oxygen. Next, an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant and reacted with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than element M while leaving element M adsorbed on the substrate, thereby forming a layer of element M and oxygen.
次に、亜鉛を有するプリカーサを含む原料ガスを反応室に導入し、元素Mと酸素とが結合した層上に吸着させる。次に、リアクタントとして、酸化剤を反応室に導入し、吸着したプリカーサと反応させて、亜鉛を基板に吸着させたまま亜鉛以外の成分を脱離させることで、亜鉛と酸素とが結合した層を形成する。 Next, a source gas containing a zinc-containing precursor is introduced into the reaction chamber and adsorbed onto the layer of combined element M and oxygen. Next, an oxidizing agent is introduced into the reaction chamber as a reactant and reacts with the adsorbed precursor, desorbing components other than zinc while leaving zinc adsorbed on the substrate, thereby forming a layer of combined zinc and oxygen.
前述した方法を繰り返すことで、被形成面である層上に金属酸化物として、ALD法を用いてIn−M−Zn酸化物を形成することができる。 By repeating the above-described method, In-M-Zn oxide can be formed as a metal oxide on the layer to be formed using the ALD method.
ALD法を用いて金属酸化物を形成する場合、酸化剤として、オゾン(O3)、酸素(O2)、水(H2O)等を用いることができる。水素を含まない、オゾン(O3)、酸素(O2)等を酸化剤として用いることで、金属酸化物に混入する水素量を低減できる。 When forming a metal oxide using the ALD method, ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), water ( H2O ), etc. can be used as an oxidizing agent. By using ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), etc. that do not contain hydrogen as an oxidizing agent, the amount of hydrogen mixed into the metal oxide can be reduced.
上記において、プリカーサを吸着させた後、プリカーサを含む原料ガスの導入を止め、反応室内をパージ後、余分なプリカーサ及び反応生成物等を反応室から排出することが好ましい。また上記において、吸着したプリカーサと酸化剤を反応させた後、酸化剤の導入を止め、反応室内をパージ後、余分なリアクタント及び反応生成物等を反応室から排出することが好ましい。 In the above, after the precursor is adsorbed, it is preferable to stop the introduction of the precursor-containing source gas, purge the reaction chamber, and then discharge excess precursor and reaction products, etc. from the reaction chamber. In the above, it is also preferable to stop the introduction of the oxidant, after the adsorbed precursor is reacted with the oxidant, purge the reaction chamber, and then discharge excess reactant and reaction products, etc. from the reaction chamber.
また、本明細書等の記載において、特段の記載がない限り、リアクタント、又は酸化剤としてオゾン、酸素、水を用いる場合、これらは、ガス又は分子の状態に限らず、プラズマ状態、ラジカル状態、及びイオン状態のものも含むものとする。 Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, in this specification and elsewhere, when ozone, oxygen, or water is used as a reactant or oxidant, this is not limited to the gas or molecular state, but also includes the plasma state, radical state, and ion state.
第2の層は、スパッタリング法を用いて形成することが好ましい。 The second layer is preferably formed using a sputtering method.
スパッタリング法のターゲットとして、In−M−Zn酸化物を用いることができる。金属酸化物をスパッタリング法で形成する場合、スパッタリングガスとして、酸素、又は、酸素と貴ガスの混合ガスを用いることができる。また、スパッタリングガスに含まれる酸素の割合を高めることで、成膜される酸化膜中の過剰酸素を増やすことができる。 In-M-Zn oxide can be used as a target for sputtering. When forming metal oxide by sputtering, oxygen or a mixture of oxygen and a noble gas can be used as the sputtering gas. Furthermore, by increasing the proportion of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas, the amount of excess oxygen in the oxide film formed can be increased.
また、形成時に用いる成膜ガス全体に対する酸素ガスの流量の割合(以下、酸素流量比ともいう)が高いほど、結晶性の高い金属酸化物を形成できる場合がある。 Furthermore, the higher the ratio of the flow rate of oxygen gas to the total film-forming gas used during formation (hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow rate ratio), the more crystalline the metal oxide may be formed.
金属酸化物をスパッタリング法で形成する場合、スパッタリングガスに含まれる酸素の割合を、30%を超えて100%以下、好ましくは70%以上100%以下として成膜すると、酸素過剰型の金属酸化物が形成される場合がある。酸素過剰型の金属酸化物をチャネル形成領域に用いたトランジスタは、比較的高い信頼性が得られる。ただし、本発明の一態様はこれに限定されない。スパッタリングガスに含まれる酸素の割合を1%以上30%以下、好ましくは5%以上20%以下として成膜すると、酸素欠乏型の金属酸化物が形成される。酸素欠乏型の金属酸化物をチャネル形成領域に用いたトランジスタは、比較的高い電界効果移動度が得られる。 When metal oxide is formed by sputtering, if the percentage of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas is more than 30% and less than 100%, preferably 70% to 100%, oxygen-excess metal oxide may be formed. A transistor using oxygen-excess metal oxide in the channel formation region can achieve relatively high reliability. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this. If the percentage of oxygen contained in the sputtering gas is 1% to 30%, preferably 5% to 20%, oxygen-deficient metal oxide is formed. A transistor using oxygen-deficient metal oxide in the channel formation region can achieve relatively high field-effect mobility.
スパッタリング法を用いた金属酸化物の形成において、基板の加熱を行うことが好ましい。金属酸化物の形成時の基板温度(ステージ温度)を高めることにより、結晶性の高い金属酸化物を形成できる場合がある。スパッタリング法を用いた金属酸化物の形成において、基板加熱の温度は、例えば、100℃以上400℃以下であることが好ましく、200℃以上300℃以下であることがより好ましい。 When forming metal oxide using a sputtering method, it is preferable to heat the substrate. Increasing the substrate temperature (stage temperature) during metal oxide formation may result in the formation of metal oxide with high crystallinity. When forming metal oxide using a sputtering method, the substrate heating temperature is preferably, for example, 100°C or higher and 400°C or lower, and more preferably 200°C or higher and 300°C or lower.
以上の作製方法とすることで、被形成面である層と金属酸化物との界面に形成される混合層の厚さを薄くする、又は被形成面である層と金属酸化物との界面に形成されるアロイ化した領域が観察し難い程度に薄くすることができる。例えば、アロイ化した領域の厚さを、0nm以上3nm以下、好ましくは0nm以上2nm以下、より好ましくは0nm以上1nm以下、さらに好ましくは0nm以上0.3nm未満とすることができる。 By using the above manufacturing method, the thickness of the mixed layer formed at the interface between the layer on which the layer is formed and the metal oxide can be reduced, or the alloyed region formed at the interface between the layer on which the layer is formed and the metal oxide can be made thin enough to be difficult to observe. For example, the thickness of the alloyed region can be set to 0 nm or more and 3 nm or less, preferably 0 nm or more and 2 nm or less, more preferably 0 nm or more and 1 nm or less, and even more preferably 0 nm or more and less than 0.3 nm.
なお、アロイ化した領域の厚さは、当該領域及びその周辺に対して、二次イオン質量分析法(SIMS:Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry)、又はエネルギー分散型X線分光法(EDX:Energy Dispersive X−ray Spectroscopy)による組成のライン分析を行うことで、算出することができる場合がある。 In some cases, the thickness of the alloyed region can be calculated by performing a line analysis of the composition of the region and its surroundings using secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) or energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX).
例えば、第1の層の被形成面に対して垂直な方向を深さ方向として、アロイ化した領域及びその周辺に対してEDXのライン分析を行う。次に、当該分析で得られる、深さ方向に対する各元素の定量値のプロファイルにおいて、第1の層の主成分であり、かつ、被形成面となる層の主成分ではない金属(第1の層がInを含む場合はIn)の定量値が半値になる深さを、上記領域と第1の層との界面の深さ(位置)と定義する。また、被形成面となる層の主成分であり、かつ、第1の層の主成分ではない元素(例えばSi)の定量値が半値になる深さを、上記領域と被形成面となる層との界面の深さ(位置)と定義する。以上により、アロイ化した領域の厚さを算出することができる。 For example, EDX line analysis is performed on the alloyed region and its surroundings, with the direction perpendicular to the surface on which the first layer is to be formed as the depth direction. Next, in the profile of quantitative values of each element in the depth direction obtained by this analysis, the depth at which the quantitative value of a metal that is the main component of the first layer but is not the main component of the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed (In if the first layer contains In) reaches half its maximum is defined as the depth (position) of the interface between the region and the first layer. Furthermore, the depth at which the quantitative value of an element that is the main component of the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed but is not the main component of the first layer (e.g., Si) reaches half its maximum is defined as the depth (position) of the interface between the region and the layer that will become the surface on which the layer is to be formed. From the above, the thickness of the alloyed region can be calculated.
金属酸化物において、アロイ化した領域の厚さをEDX分析により観察する場合には、例えば、厚さは0nm以上3nm以下、好ましくは0nm以上2nm以下、より好ましくは0nm以上1nm以下、さらに好ましくは0nm以上0.3nm未満である。 When observing the thickness of the alloyed region of a metal oxide using EDX analysis, the thickness is, for example, 0 nm or more and 3 nm or less, preferably 0 nm or more and 2 nm or less, more preferably 0 nm or more and 1 nm or less, and even more preferably 0 nm or more and less than 0.3 nm.
また、例えば、被形成面である酸化シリコン膜上に形成された金属酸化物のSIMS分析を行う場合において、シリコンの濃度が酸化シリコン膜の濃度の最大値から50%の強度となる深さを界面とし、シリコンの濃度が1.0×1021atoms/cm3、好ましくは5.0×1020atoms/cm3、より好ましくは1.0×1020atoms/cm3まで減少する深さと界面との距離を厚さtとする。厚さtは、3nm以下が好ましく、2nm以下がより好ましい。 Furthermore, for example, in the case of performing SIMS analysis of a metal oxide formed on a silicon oxide film that is a surface to be formed, the depth at which the silicon concentration is 50% of the maximum concentration of the silicon oxide film is defined as the interface, and the distance between the interface and the depth at which the silicon concentration decreases to 1.0× 10 atoms/cm , preferably 5.0× 10 atoms/ cm , more preferably 1.0× 10 atoms/cm , is defined as the thickness t. The thickness t is preferably 3 nm or less, more preferably 2 nm or less.
アロイ化した領域の厚さを薄くすることで、厚さtを上記の範囲の値とすることができる。 By reducing the thickness of the alloyed region, the thickness t can be set within the above range.
なお、アロイ化した領域を低減することで、CAAC構造を被形成面近傍に形成することが可能となる。ここで、被形成面近傍とは、例えば、金属酸化物の被形成面から概略垂直に0nmを超えて3nm以下、好ましくは0nmを超えて2nm以下、より好ましくは1nm以上2nm以下の領域を指す。 Furthermore, by reducing the alloyed region, it becomes possible to form a CAAC structure near the surface on which the structure is to be formed. Here, "near the surface on which the structure is to be formed" refers to, for example, a region that is more than 0 nm and less than 3 nm, preferably more than 0 nm and less than 2 nm, and more preferably 1 nm or more and less than 2 nm, approximately perpendicular to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed.
なお、被形成面近傍のCAAC構造は、TEMを用いた観察において確認することができる場合がある。例えば、金属酸化物の高分解能TEMを用いた断面観察において、被形成面と平行な方向に層状に並んだ輝点が被形成面近傍に確認される。 In addition, the CAAC structure near the surface to be formed can sometimes be confirmed by observation using a TEM. For example, when observing a cross section of a metal oxide using a high-resolution TEM, bright spots arranged in layers parallel to the surface to be formed can be confirmed near the surface to be formed.
また、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物は、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、第2の層上の第3の層と、の3層構造とすることができる。 Furthermore, the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer can have a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer.
金属酸化物が3層構造である場合、当該金属酸化物は、被形成面上に第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層を形成した後、第2の成膜方法を用いて第2の層を形成し、第1の成膜方法を用いて第3の層を形成することにより、作製することができる。 When the metal oxide has a three-layer structure, the metal oxide can be produced by forming a first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, then forming a second layer using a second film formation method, and finally forming a third layer using the first film formation method.
上記金属酸化物は、第1の層及び第3の層として、単層の形成ではCAAC構造を形成しづらい組成を用いた場合においても、第2の層を核として結晶成長が生じることにより、第1の層及び第3の層を含めた金属酸化物全体において、CAAC構造を有する構成とすることができる。又は、第1の層及び第3の層のそれぞれの少なくとも一部を含めた領域と、第2の層とにわたる領域において、CAAC構造を有する構成とすることができる。 Even if the above metal oxide uses a composition for the first and third layers that makes it difficult to form a CAAC structure when formed as a single layer, crystal growth occurs using the second layer as a nucleus, allowing the entire metal oxide, including the first and third layers, to have a CAAC structure. Alternatively, the CAAC structure can be formed in the region spanning the second layer and regions including at least a portion of each of the first and third layers.
特に、第1の層及び第3の層のInの含有率が高い組成においても、トランジスタの半導体層として好適な結晶性とすることができる。半導体層として用いる金属酸化物においては、Inの含有率を高くすることによるトランジスタのオン特性の向上と、結晶性の高いCAAC構造とすることによる信頼性の向上と、を両立することができる。 In particular, even when the first and third layers have a high In content, they can have suitable crystallinity for use as semiconductor layers in transistors. In metal oxides used as semiconductor layers, increasing the In content can improve the on-state characteristics of the transistor, while achieving improved reliability by using a highly crystalline CAAC structure.
また、第1の層及び第3の層は、第2の層と同じ組成の金属酸化物を用いることが好ましい。同じ組成を用いることにより、熱処理を行った後のCAAC化が生じやすくなる場合がある。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the first and third layers use metal oxides with the same composition as the second layer. Using the same composition may make it easier for CAAC to form after heat treatment.
第2の層は高い結晶性を有することから、第3の層は、第2の層の結晶を核又は種として、結晶成長することができる。よって、第3の層の成膜方法として、結晶性を有しやすい成膜方法を用いなかった場合においても、第3の層を結晶化させることができる。ここで、例えば、第3の層として、第2の層と比較して被覆性の高い成膜方法を用いて形成することにより、金属酸化物は、層全体において、高い結晶性と、高い被覆性との両方を備えることができる。 Because the second layer has high crystallinity, the third layer can grow using the crystals of the second layer as nuclei or seeds. Therefore, even if a film formation method that is likely to impart crystallinity is not used as the film formation method for the third layer, the third layer can be crystallized. Here, for example, by forming the third layer using a film formation method that has higher coverage than the second layer, the metal oxide can have both high crystallinity and high coverage throughout the entire layer.
また、第2の層は、第1の層を設けることによって被形成面の影響を小さくすることにより、その結晶性が高まり、極めて優れた結晶性を有する。よって、第2の層を核又は種として結晶化する第3の層においても、極めて優れた結晶性を有する層が形成される。 Furthermore, by providing the first layer, the influence of the surface on which the second layer is formed is reduced, thereby increasing the crystallinity of the second layer and resulting in extremely excellent crystallinity. Therefore, even in the third layer, which is crystallized using the second layer as a nucleus or seed, a layer with extremely excellent crystallinity is formed.
なお、金属酸化物をトランジスタの半導体層として用いる場合、金属酸化物の最上層である第3の層は、ゲート絶縁層と接する場合がある。ゲート絶縁層と接する層の結晶性を高めることにより、トランジスタがオン状態において、キャリア移動度を高めることができる。 When a metal oxide is used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor, the third layer, which is the uppermost layer of the metal oxide, may be in contact with the gate insulating layer. By increasing the crystallinity of the layer in contact with the gate insulating layer, it is possible to increase carrier mobility when the transistor is in the on state.
第1の層及び第3の層は、それぞれ結晶性の高い第2の層を核又は種として、結晶性が高くなる。具体的には、第1の層の結晶性は、第2の層の成膜時又は第3の層成膜後の熱処理により、高くなる場合がある。また、第3の層の結晶性は、第3の層の成膜時又は第3の層成膜後の熱処理により、高くなる場合がある。なお、上記熱処理は、結晶性を高めるアシスト作用の機能を有する。 The first layer and the third layer each have high crystallinity, using the highly crystalline second layer as a nucleus or seed. Specifically, the crystallinity of the first layer may be increased by heat treatment during the deposition of the second layer or after the deposition of the third layer. The crystallinity of the third layer may be increased by heat treatment during the deposition of the third layer or after the deposition of the third layer. The heat treatment described above has the function of assisting in increasing crystallinity.
このように、金属酸化物の作製方法においては、結晶性の高い金属酸化物(すなわち、CAAC)を有する第2の層を核又は種として、上下の金属酸化物(ここでは第1の層及び第3の層)の結晶性を高くすることができる。これにより、金属酸化物全体の結晶性を高くすることができる。別言すると、第2の層を核又は種として、上下の金属酸化物を固相成長させ、結晶性の高い金属酸化物を形成することができる。このような成膜方法を用いて形成された金属酸化物、ここではCAAC膜を、Axial Growth CAAC(AG CAAC)と呼称することができる。 In this way, in the metal oxide manufacturing method, the second layer having a highly crystalline metal oxide (i.e., CAAC) serves as a nucleus or seed to increase the crystallinity of the upper and lower metal oxides (here, the first and third layers). This increases the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide. In other words, the second layer serves as a nucleus or seed to cause solid-phase growth of the upper and lower metal oxides, forming a highly crystalline metal oxide. The metal oxide formed using this film formation method, here a CAAC film, can be referred to as Axial Growth CAAC (AG CAAC).
半導体層として用いる金属酸化物において、CAAC構造を有する領域が層全体にわたって広く存在することが好ましい。第1の層においてCAAC構造を有する領域は、第2の層においてCAAC構造を有する領域と、結晶が連結している。第3の層においてCAAC構造を有する領域は、第2の層においてCAAC構造を有する領域と、結晶が連結している。これにより、第1の層と第2の層の境界は観察されない場合がある。また、第2の層と第3の層の境界は観察されない場合がある。よって、第1の層乃至第3の層で構成された金属酸化物は、界面が明確に観測されない1つの層である、と表現できる場合がある。金属酸化物は、単一の層と表現できる場合がある。 In a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer, it is preferable that a region having a CAAC structure be widely present throughout the entire layer. The region having a CAAC structure in the first layer is crystalline connected to a region having a CAAC structure in the second layer. The region having a CAAC structure in the third layer is crystalline connected to a region having a CAAC structure in the second layer. As a result, the boundary between the first layer and the second layer may not be observed. Also, the boundary between the second layer and the third layer may not be observed. Therefore, a metal oxide composed of the first layer, the second layer, and the third layer may be described as a single layer with no clearly observable interface. The metal oxide may be described as a single layer.
第1乃至第3の層のそれぞれにおいて、CAAC構造を有する領域では例えば、高分解能TEMを用いた断面観察において、被形成面と平行又は概略平行に並んだ輝点が確認される。また、第1乃至第3の層のそれぞれが有するCAAC構造のc軸は、金属酸化物の被形成面又は表面の法線方向と平行、又は概略平行であることが好ましい。 In each of the first to third layers, in the region having the CAAC structure, for example, cross-sectional observation using a high-resolution TEM confirms bright spots aligned parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is formed. Furthermore, it is preferable that the c-axis of the CAAC structure in each of the first to third layers is parallel or approximately parallel to the normal direction of the surface on which the metal oxide is formed.
また、第1の層又は第3の層の一部が結晶化されない場合がある。 In addition, parts of the first layer or third layer may not crystallize.
また、金属酸化物が3層構造である場合、当該金属酸化物は、被形成面上に第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層を形成した後、第1の成膜方法を用いて第2の層を形成し、第2の成膜方法を用いて第3の層を形成することにより、作製することもできる。 Furthermore, when the metal oxide has a three-layer structure, the metal oxide can also be produced by forming a first layer on the surface to be formed using a first film formation method, then forming a second layer using the first film formation method, and then forming a third layer using a second film formation method.
前述したように、Inの含有率が高い金属酸化物をトランジスタの半導体層に用いることで、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる。一方、Inの含有率が高い金属酸化物は、立方晶系の結晶構造となる傾向がある。そこで、Inの含有率が高い金属酸化物を、第3の層に接する第2の層に用いることで、第3の層が有する結晶の配向が反映された結晶を形成することができる。 As mentioned above, using a metal oxide with a high In content in the semiconductor layer of a transistor can increase the field-effect mobility of the transistor. On the other hand, metal oxides with a high In content tend to have a cubic crystal structure. Therefore, by using a metal oxide with a high In content in the second layer that contacts the third layer, it is possible to form crystals that reflect the crystal orientation of the third layer.
また、第3の層が有する結晶と、第2の層が有する結晶の格子不整合度は小さいことが好ましい。これにより、第2の層は、第3の層が有する結晶の配向が反映された結晶を形成することができる。このとき、例えば、金属酸化物の高分解能TEMを用いた断面観察において、被形成面と平行な方向に層状に並んだ輝点が、第2の層で確認される。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the lattice mismatch between the crystals of the third layer and the crystals of the second layer is small. This allows the second layer to form crystals that reflect the orientation of the crystals of the third layer. In this case, for example, when observing a cross section of the metal oxide using a high-resolution TEM, bright spots arranged in layers parallel to the surface on which they are formed are observed in the second layer.
第3の層が有する結晶と、第2の層が有する結晶の格子不整合度が小さければ、第2の層の結晶構造は特に限定されない。第2の層の結晶構造は、立方晶系、正方晶系、直方晶系、六方晶系、単斜晶系、三方晶系のいずれであってもよい。 There are no particular restrictions on the crystal structure of the second layer, as long as the lattice mismatch between the crystals of the third layer and the crystals of the second layer is small. The crystal structure of the second layer may be any of cubic, tetragonal, orthorhombic, hexagonal, monoclinic, and trigonal.
上記構成において、代表的には、第1の層をIn:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成の金属酸化物、又は酸化ガリウムを含む層とし、第2の層を前述した元素Mを微量に含む金属酸化物、又は酸化インジウムを含む層とし、第3の層をIn:Ga:Zn=1:1:1[原子数比]又はその近傍の組成である金属酸化物を含む層とすることができる。このとき、第1の層は、ガリウムを有する。また、第1の層がIn:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]もしくはその近傍の組成の金属酸化物を含む場合、第1の層において、インジウムの含有率は、ガリウムの含有率よりも低い。また、第2の層におけるインジウムの含有率は、第3の層におけるインジウムの含有率よりも高い。 In the above structure, typically, the first layer is a layer containing gallium oxide or a metal oxide having an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2 or a similar composition; the second layer is a layer containing indium oxide or a metal oxide containing a trace amount of the aforementioned element M; and the third layer is a layer containing a metal oxide having an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1 or a similar composition. In this case, the first layer contains gallium. Furthermore, when the first layer contains a metal oxide having an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2 or a similar composition, the indium content in the first layer is lower than the gallium content. Furthermore, the indium content in the second layer is higher than the indium content in the third layer.
第1の層及び第2の層を第1の成膜方法を用いて形成する場合、第1の層及び第2の層は大気開放せずに連続して成膜することが好ましい。第1の層及び第2の層を大気開放せずに連続して成膜することで、生産性を高めることが可能となる。また、第1の層と第2の層との界面及びその近傍に取り込まれる不純物(代表的には水分等)を低減することができる。 When the first layer and the second layer are formed using the first film formation method, it is preferable to form the first layer and the second layer successively without exposing them to the atmosphere. By forming the first layer and the second layer successively without exposing them to the atmosphere, productivity can be increased. Furthermore, impurities (typically moisture, etc.) that are introduced into the interface between the first layer and the second layer and its vicinity can be reduced.
また、第1の層乃至第3の層の一又は複数は、組成の異なる層を複数積層して有することができる。例えば、第1の層は、Gaの含有率が高い金属酸化物を含む層を第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した後、当該層と比較してInの含有率が高い金属酸化物を含む層を第1の成膜方法を用いて形成することにより、作製することが可能である。 Furthermore, one or more of the first to third layers can have multiple stacked layers with different compositions. For example, the first layer can be produced by forming a layer containing a metal oxide with a high Ga content using the first film formation method, and then forming a layer containing a metal oxide with a higher In content than the first layer using the first film formation method.
第1の成膜方法を用いて層を形成した後に、マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことが好ましい。 After forming a layer using the first film formation method, it is preferable to perform microwave plasma treatment.
本明細書等において、マイクロ波とは、300MHz以上300GHz以下の周波数を有する電磁波を指すものとする。また、マイクロ波プラズマ処理とは、例えばマイクロ波を用いて高密度プラズマを発生させる電源を有する装置を用いた処理のことを指す。また、マイクロ波プラズマ処理は、マイクロ波励起高密度プラズマ処理ということもできる。 In this specification, microwaves refer to electromagnetic waves having a frequency of 300 MHz or more and 300 GHz or less. Furthermore, microwave plasma processing refers to processing using, for example, a device with a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves. Microwave plasma processing can also be referred to as microwave-excited high-density plasma processing.
酸素を含む雰囲気でマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことで、金属酸化物中の不純物濃度を低減することができる。なお、不純物としては、特に、水素、及び炭素が挙げられる。なお、上記においては、金属酸化物に対して、酸素を含む雰囲気でマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行う構成について例示したが、これに限定されない。例えば、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物近傍に設けられる、絶縁膜、より具体的には酸化シリコン膜に対して、酸素を含む雰囲気でマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行なうことで、金属酸化物中の不純物濃度を低減することが可能である。また、マイクロ波プラズマ処理における熱により、金属酸化物層の結晶性が高まる場合がある。 By performing microwave plasma treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, the impurity concentration in the metal oxide can be reduced. Examples of impurities include hydrogen and carbon. While the above example illustrates a configuration in which microwave plasma treatment is performed on a metal oxide in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing microwave plasma treatment on an insulating film, more specifically, a silicon oxide film, provided near a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, the impurity concentration in the metal oxide can be reduced. Furthermore, the heat generated during microwave plasma treatment may increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide layer.
マイクロ波プラズマ処理は、減圧下で行うことが好ましく、圧力は、10Pa以上1000Pa以下が好ましく、50Pa以上700Pa以下がより好ましく、100Pa以上400Pa以下がさらに好ましい。また、処理温度は、室温(25℃)以上750℃以下が好ましく、300℃以上500℃以下がより好ましく、400℃以上450℃以下とすることができる。 Microwave plasma treatment is preferably carried out under reduced pressure, with the pressure preferably being 10 Pa or higher and 1000 Pa or lower, more preferably 50 Pa or higher and 700 Pa or lower, and even more preferably 100 Pa or higher and 400 Pa or lower. The treatment temperature is preferably room temperature (25°C) or higher and 750°C or lower, more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower, and can be 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行う際は、基板を加熱することが好ましい。基板の加熱温度は室温(25℃)以上750℃以下が好ましく、300℃以上500℃以下がより好ましく、400℃以上450℃以下がより好ましい。基板を加熱してマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことにより、金属酸化物中の不純物濃度の低減をより促すことができる。また、上記範囲内の温度とすることで、基板を加熱してマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行う場合であっても、基板の変形(歪みまたは反り)を極めて少なくすることができる。 When performing microwave plasma treatment, it is preferable to heat the substrate. The heating temperature of the substrate is preferably from room temperature (25°C) to 750°C, more preferably from 300°C to 500°C, and even more preferably from 400°C to 450°C. By heating the substrate and performing microwave plasma treatment, it is possible to further reduce the impurity concentration in the metal oxide. Furthermore, by setting the temperature within the above range, deformation (distortion or warping) of the substrate can be extremely minimized, even when the substrate is heated and microwave plasma treatment is performed.
マイクロ波プラズマ処理は、例えば、酸素ガスとアルゴンガスを用いて行うことができる。酸素ガスとアルゴンガスを用いたマイクロ波プラズマ処理では、主な酸素ラジカルは、三重項酸素(O(3Pj))、一重項酸素(O(1D2))、及び酸素イオン(O2 +)の3つの状態を取り得る。なお、マイクロ波プラズマ処理による金属酸化物中の水素濃度低減では、酸素イオンが効果的に作用している。また、各状態の酸素ラジカルの量は、マイクロ波プラズマ処理での酸素流量比又は圧力によって変化する。例えば、酸素流量比が低く、かつ、圧力が低い条件では、酸素イオンの量が増加する傾向にある。一方で酸素流量比又は圧力を過剰に低くした場合、酸素流量の制御が不安定となり放電が安定しにくくなる、金属酸化物がエッチングされてしまう等の懸念がある。そのため例えば、マイクロ波プラズマ処理における酸素流量比(O2/(O2+Ar))は、0%よりも大きく10%以下とすることが好ましく、0.5%以上5%以下とすることが好ましく、0.5%以上3%以下とすることがより好ましく、代表的には1%がより好ましい。 Microwave plasma treatment can be performed using, for example, oxygen gas and argon gas. In microwave plasma treatment using oxygen gas and argon gas, the main oxygen radicals can take three states: triplet oxygen (O( 3Pj )), singlet oxygen ( O ( 1D2 )), and oxygen ions ( O2 + ). Note that oxygen ions act effectively in reducing the hydrogen concentration in metal oxides by microwave plasma treatment. The amount of oxygen radicals in each state varies depending on the oxygen flow rate ratio or pressure in the microwave plasma treatment. For example, under conditions of a low oxygen flow rate ratio and a low pressure, the amount of oxygen ions tends to increase. On the other hand, if the oxygen flow rate ratio or pressure is excessively low, there is a concern that the control of the oxygen flow rate becomes unstable, making it difficult to stabilize discharge, or that the metal oxide may be etched. Therefore, for example, the oxygen flow rate ratio ( O2 /( O2 +Ar)) in microwave plasma processing is preferably greater than 0% and less than 10%, more preferably 0.5% to 5%, more preferably 0.5% to 3%, and typically more preferably 1%.
マイクロ波プラズマ処理の処理時間が短いほど、導電層などの酸化を抑制することができる。また、生産性が高くなる。そこで例えば、マイクロ波プラズマ処理の処理時間は、1分以上60分以下であることが好ましく、1分以上30分以下であることがより好ましく、1分以上10分以下であることがさらに好ましい。 The shorter the microwave plasma treatment time, the more oxidation of the conductive layer and the like can be suppressed. It also increases productivity. Therefore, for example, the microwave plasma treatment time is preferably 1 minute or more and 60 minutes or less, more preferably 1 minute or more and 30 minutes or less, and even more preferably 1 minute or more and 10 minutes or less.
酸素を含む雰囲気でマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことで、マイクロ波又はRF等の高周波を用いて酸素ガスをプラズマ化し、酸素ガスをプラズマ化することで発生した酸素ラジカルを金属酸化物に作用させることができる。プラズマ、マイクロ波、又は酸素ラジカル等の作用により、金属酸化物における酸素欠損に水素が入った欠陥(以下、VOHと呼ぶ場合がある)を酸素欠損と水素とに分断し、不純物である水素を金属酸化物から除去することができる。このようにして、金属酸化物層に含まれるVOHを低減できる。また、このとき、酸素、又は水素等に結合していた炭素も除去できる場合がある。このように、マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことで、炭素又は水素等の不純物を低減することができる。また、金属酸化物に上記酸素ラジカルを供給することで、さらに、金属酸化物層中の酸素欠損を低減させることができる。 By performing microwave plasma treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, oxygen gas can be converted into plasma using microwaves or high-frequency waves such as RF, and the oxygen radicals generated by converting the oxygen gas into plasma can act on the metal oxide. The action of plasma, microwaves, oxygen radicals, or the like can separate defects in the metal oxide where hydrogen has entered oxygen vacancies (hereinafter sometimes referred to as VOH ) into oxygen vacancies and hydrogen, thereby removing the impurity hydrogen from the metal oxide. In this way, the VOH contained in the metal oxide layer can be reduced. Furthermore, carbon bonded to oxygen, hydrogen, or the like can also be removed in some cases. In this way, microwave plasma treatment can reduce impurities such as carbon and hydrogen. Furthermore, by supplying the oxygen radicals to the metal oxide, oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide layer can be further reduced.
また、マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことで、第1の成膜方法を用いて層を形成した層の結晶性を高めることができる。ここで、マイクロ波プラズマ処理により金属酸化物の結晶性が向上する原理について説明する。まず、マイクロ波で励起された、酸素ラジカル等の活性種が金属酸化物表面に到着して、当該活性種と金属酸化物中の酸素との置換反応が起きる。このとき、核又は種が形成される。また、核又は種の横成長が引き起こされる。なお、マイクロ波で励起された活性種に、核又は種の側面に吸着しやすい酸素(代表的には酸素イオン)が含まれると、上記横成長が助長されるため好ましい。マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことで、核又は種の形成、及び、核又は種の横成長が生じ、金属酸化物の結晶性が向上する。 Furthermore, microwave plasma treatment can improve the crystallinity of a layer formed using the first film formation method. Here, the principle by which microwave plasma treatment improves the crystallinity of a metal oxide will be explained. First, active species such as oxygen radicals excited by microwaves arrive at the metal oxide surface, and a substitution reaction occurs between the active species and oxygen in the metal oxide. At this time, nuclei or seeds are formed. Furthermore, lateral growth of the nuclei or seeds is induced. Note that it is preferable for the active species excited by microwaves to contain oxygen (typically oxygen ions), which is easily adsorbed to the sides of the nuclei or seeds, as this promotes the lateral growth. Microwave plasma treatment causes the formation of nuclei or seeds and the lateral growth of the nuclei or seeds, improving the crystallinity of the metal oxide.
一方、マイクロ波プラズマ処理前に存在した金属酸化物中の酸素の一部と、金属酸化物中の水素との反応が起きる、別言すると「2H+O→H2O↑」という反応が起きることにより、当該水素をH2Oとして除去する(脱水化する、又は脱水素化するともいう)ことができる。H2Oは結晶性向上の阻害要因の一つであるため、金属酸化物中より除去することが好ましい。金属酸化物中の水素をH2Oとして除去し、金属酸化物中の水素濃度を低減することで、結晶性向上を促進させることもできる。なお、マイクロ波プラズマ処理時の温度を高くすることで、金属酸化物中の水素濃度をより低減することが可能である。 On the other hand, a reaction occurs between some of the oxygen in the metal oxide that was present before the microwave plasma treatment and hydrogen in the metal oxide, in other words, the reaction "2H + O → H 2 O↑" occurs, and the hydrogen can be removed as H 2 O (also referred to as dehydration or dehydrogenation). Since H 2 O is one of the factors that inhibit improvement of crystallinity, it is preferable to remove it from the metal oxide. By removing hydrogen in the metal oxide as H 2 O and reducing the hydrogen concentration in the metal oxide, it is also possible to promote improvement of crystallinity. Note that the hydrogen concentration in the metal oxide can be further reduced by increasing the temperature during microwave plasma treatment.
なお、マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行った後に、外気に曝すことなく、連続して加熱処理を行なうことが好ましい。加熱処理の温度は、例えば、100℃以上750℃以下が好ましく、300℃以上500℃以下がより好ましく、400℃以上450℃以下がさらに好ましい。上記範囲内の温度とすることで、当該加熱処理を行う場合であっても、基板の変形(歪みまたは反り)を極めて少なくすることができる。 Furthermore, after microwave plasma treatment, it is preferable to perform heat treatment immediately without exposing the substrate to the outside air. The temperature for the heat treatment is, for example, preferably 100°C or higher and 750°C or lower, more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower, and even more preferably 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower. By setting the temperature within the above range, deformation (distortion or warping) of the substrate can be minimized even when performing the heat treatment.
なおマイクロ波プラズマ処理でなくても、酸素ガスを含んだプラズマ処理によっても結晶性向上を図ることができる。 In addition to microwave plasma treatment, crystallinity can also be improved by plasma treatment containing oxygen gas.
第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した層の結晶性が高まることで、当該層上に形成する層の結晶性をより高めることができる。したがって、金属酸化物全体の結晶性を高くすることができる。 By increasing the crystallinity of the layer formed using the first film formation method, the crystallinity of the layer formed on top of that layer can be further increased. Therefore, the crystallinity of the entire metal oxide can be increased.
金属酸化物中に供給される酸素は、酸素原子、酸素分子、酸素イオン(電荷を帯びた、酸素原子又は酸素分子)、及び酸素ラジカル(不対電子をもつ、酸素原子、酸素分子、又は酸素イオン)等様々な形態がある。なお、金属酸化物中に注入される酸素は、前述の形態のいずれか一又は複数であることが好ましく、特に酸素ラジカルであると好適である。 Oxygen supplied to metal oxides can take various forms, including oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, oxygen ions (charged oxygen atoms or oxygen molecules), and oxygen radicals (oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, or oxygen ions with an unpaired electron). It is preferable that the oxygen injected into the metal oxide be in one or more of the above forms, with oxygen radicals being particularly preferred.
また、金属酸化物を形成した後、熱処理を行うことが好ましい。熱処理を行うことで、金属酸化物の結晶性を高めることができる。ここでいう熱処理は、加熱処理に限定されない。例えば、作製工程中に加わる熱等を上記熱処理に置き換えることができる。 Furthermore, after forming the metal oxide, it is preferable to perform heat treatment. Heat treatment can increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide. The heat treatment referred to here is not limited to heat treatment. For example, heat applied during the manufacturing process can be replaced with the above heat treatment.
熱処理の温度は、例えば、100℃以上800℃以下、好ましくは250℃以上650℃以下、さらに好ましくは350℃以上550℃以下とすることができる。代表的には400℃±25℃(375℃以上425℃以下)とすることができる。また処理時間は、10時間以下とすることができ、例えば、1分以上5時間以下、又は1分以上2時間以下とすることができる。また、RTA装置を用いる場合には処理時間は、例えば、1秒以上5分以下とすることができる。当該熱処理により、第2の成膜方法を用いて形成した第2の層のCAAC構造が有する原子レベルの結晶部の隙間を、第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した第3の層により修復することが期待される。 The heat treatment temperature can be, for example, 100°C to 800°C, preferably 250°C to 650°C, and more preferably 350°C to 550°C. A typical temperature is 400°C ± 25°C (375°C to 425°C). The treatment time can be 10 hours or less, for example, 1 minute to 5 hours, or 1 minute to 2 hours. When an RTA apparatus is used, the treatment time can be, for example, 1 second to 5 minutes. It is expected that this heat treatment will repair atomic-level crystalline gaps in the CAAC structure of the second layer formed using the second film formation method with the third layer formed using the first film formation method.
熱処理に用いる加熱装置に特別な限定はなく、抵抗発熱体等の発熱体からの熱伝導又は熱輻射によって被処理物を加熱する装置を用いることができる。例えば、電気炉、又はLRTA(Lamp Rapid Thermal Anneal)装置、GRTA(Gas Rapid Thermal Anneal)装置等のRTA(Rapid Thermal Anneal)装置を用いることができる。LRTA装置は、ハロゲンランプ、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンアークランプ、カーボンアークランプ、高圧ナトリウムランプ、又は高圧水銀ランプ等のランプから発する光(電磁波)の輻射により、被処理物を加熱する装置である。GRTA装置は、高温のガスを用いて加熱処理を行う装置である。 There are no particular limitations on the heating device used for heat treatment; any device that heats the workpiece by thermal conduction or thermal radiation from a heating element such as a resistance heating element can be used. For example, an electric furnace or an RTA (Rapid Thermal Anneal) device such as an LRTA (Lamp Rapid Thermal Anneal) device or a GRTA (Gas Rapid Thermal Anneal) device can be used. An LRTA device is a device that heats the workpiece by radiating light (electromagnetic waves) emitted from a lamp such as a halogen lamp, metal halide lamp, xenon arc lamp, carbon arc lamp, high-pressure sodium lamp, or high-pressure mercury lamp. A GRTA device is a device that performs heat treatment using high-temperature gas.
当該熱処理工程により、第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した第3の層において、CAAC構造を有する当該領域の結晶性が高まる場合がある。また、ALD法による成膜後に、当該領域が上記第3の層の下方のみに形成されている場合には、当該熱処理工程により、当該領域が上方に広がる場合がある。すなわち、当該熱処理を行うことで、上記第3の層において、CAAC構造を有する領域が層全体にわたって形成される場合がある。 This heat treatment process may increase the crystallinity of the region having the CAAC structure in the third layer formed using the first film formation method. Furthermore, if this region is formed only below the third layer after film formation using the ALD method, this heat treatment process may cause this region to expand upward. In other words, this heat treatment may result in the formation of a region having the CAAC structure throughout the entire third layer.
また当該熱処理工程により、第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した第1の層又は第2の層の少なくとも一部がCAAC化することが好ましい。CAAC化は、第2の成膜方法を用いて形成した層の形成において上記第1の層又は第2の層の中に形成された混合層が核又は種となり、生じやすくなると期待される。上記第1の層又は第2の層においてCAAC化する領域は広いことが好ましく、被形成面近傍までCAAC化することが好ましい。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the heat treatment step converts at least a portion of the first layer or second layer formed using the first film formation method into CAAC. It is expected that the CAAC conversion is more likely to occur when the mixed layer formed in the first layer or second layer during the formation of the layer formed using the second film formation method acts as a nucleus or seed. It is preferable that the region in the first layer or second layer that converts into CAAC is wide, and it is preferable that the CAAC conversion extend to the vicinity of the surface on which it is formed.
また、上記第1の層又は第2の層の上部から下部に向かってCAAC化するため、被形成面である層の材料又は結晶性に限られることなく、当該層近傍までCAAC化することができる。例えば、当該層が非晶質構造を有していても、上記第1の層又は第2の層の結晶性を高めることができる。よって、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物の作製方法は、被形成面である層が非晶質構造を有する場合に、特に好適である。 Furthermore, because the CAAC conversion occurs from the top to the bottom of the first or second layer, it can be converted to CAAC up to the vicinity of the layer, regardless of the material or crystallinity of the layer on which it is formed. For example, even if the layer has an amorphous structure, the crystallinity of the first or second layer can be increased. Therefore, the method for manufacturing a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer is particularly suitable when the layer on which it is formed has an amorphous structure.
以上のように、マイクロ波プラズマ処理及び加熱処理の一方又は両方を行うことで、金属酸化物全体の結晶性を高くすることができる。また、金属酸化物中の不純物を低減することができる。金属酸化物中の不純物濃度が低減した状態で、結晶成長を行うことにより、さらなる結晶性の向上を図ることができる。 As described above, by performing microwave plasma treatment and/or heat treatment, the crystallinity of the metal oxide as a whole can be increased. It also reduces impurities in the metal oxide. By performing crystal growth in a state where the impurity concentration in the metal oxide has been reduced, further improvement in crystallinity can be achieved.
金属酸化物の結晶性を高めることにより、半導体層として金属酸化物を用いたトランジスタの電気抵抗の増加抑制、又はトランジスタの初期特性(特にオン電流)が向上し、高速駆動に適したトランジスタが実現できる。また、トランジスタの信頼性を高め、オン電流を大きくすることができる。 By increasing the crystallinity of metal oxides, it is possible to suppress an increase in the electrical resistance of transistors that use metal oxides as semiconductor layers, or to improve the initial characteristics of the transistors (particularly the on-state current), thereby realizing transistors suitable for high-speed operation. It is also possible to improve the reliability of the transistors and increase their on-state current.
なお、マイクロ波プラズマ処理及び加熱処理の一方又は両方は、形成した金属酸化物に直接行なうことも可能であるし、金属酸化物上に絶縁膜等を形成した後に行なうことも可能である。 Note that either or both of the microwave plasma treatment and the heat treatment can be performed directly on the formed metal oxide, or can be performed after forming an insulating film or the like on the metal oxide.
第1の層の成膜前に、又は、第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層又は第2の層を形成した後に、当該第1の層又は第2の層に酸素を供給する処理を行なうことが好ましい。これにより、当該処理以降に加わる熱等により、金属酸化物に酸素を供給することができる。 It is preferable to perform a process to supply oxygen to the first layer or second layer before forming the first layer, or after forming the first layer or second layer using the first film formation method. This allows oxygen to be supplied to the metal oxide by heat or other factors applied after the process.
酸素を供給する処理としては、例えば、酸素を含む雰囲気下での加熱処理又は酸素を含む雰囲気下でのプラズマ処理(マイクロ波プラズマ処理を含む)等が挙げられる、又は、スパッタリング法により酸素を含む雰囲気下にて、金属酸化物を成膜することで、第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した第1の層又は第2の層に酸素を供給することもできる。成膜した金属酸化物は、直後に除去することも可能であるし、そのまま残すことも可能である。成膜した金属酸化物をそのまま残す場合、当該金属酸化物を上記第1の層又は第2の層上に設ける層(第2の層又は第3の層)として用いることができる。なお、酸素を含む雰囲気としては、酸素ガス(O2)だけでなく、オゾン(O3)又は一酸化二窒素(N2O)等の酸素を含む化合物のガスを含む雰囲気を含む。また、プラズマ処理時の基板温度は、室温(25℃)以上450℃以下とする。 Examples of treatments for supplying oxygen include heat treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere or plasma treatment (including microwave plasma treatment) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere. Alternatively, oxygen can be supplied to the first or second layer formed using the first film formation method by forming a metal oxide film in an oxygen-containing atmosphere by sputtering. The formed metal oxide film can be removed immediately or left as is. When the formed metal oxide film is left as is, the metal oxide film can be used as a layer (second or third layer) provided on the first or second layer. Note that the oxygen-containing atmosphere includes not only oxygen gas (O 2 ) but also an atmosphere containing a gas of an oxygen-containing compound such as ozone (O 3 ) or dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O). The substrate temperature during the plasma treatment is set to be from room temperature (25° C.) to 450° C.
上記の作製方法で形成された金属酸化物は、層全体にわたって高い結晶性を有する。そのため、金属酸化物において、第1乃至第3の層は、積層される膜同士の境界が確認されない場合がある。特に、熱処理を行った後には、積層される膜同士の境界の確認が困難な場合がある。積層される膜同士の境界の有無の確認は、例えば、断面TEM、断面STEM(走査透過電子顕微鏡)、等を用いて行うことができる。 The metal oxide formed by the above manufacturing method has high crystallinity throughout the entire layer. Therefore, in the metal oxide, the boundaries between the stacked films of the first to third layers may not be visible. In particular, after heat treatment, it may be difficult to identify the boundaries between the stacked films. The presence or absence of boundaries between the stacked films can be confirmed using, for example, cross-sectional TEM or cross-sectional STEM (scanning transmission electron microscope), etc.
また、前述の2種の成膜方法を用いて形成されたCAAC構造を有する金属酸化物は、1種の成膜方法を用いて形成されたCAAC構造の金属酸化物と比較して、膜の比誘電率、膜密度、及び膜の硬度のいずれか一又は複数が高くなる場合がある。 Furthermore, metal oxides having a CAAC structure formed using the two aforementioned film formation methods may have higher film relative permittivity, film density, and film hardness than metal oxides having a CAAC structure formed using a single film formation method.
前述の2種の成膜方法を用いて形成されたCAAC構造を有する金属酸化物を、トランジスタのチャネル形成領域に用いることで、優れた特性を有するトランジスタ(例えば、オン電流が大きいトランジスタ、電界効果移動度が高いトランジスタ、S値が小さいトランジスタ、周波数特性(f特とも呼称する)が高いトランジスタ、信頼性の高いトランジスタ等)を実現することができる。 By using a metal oxide having a CAAC structure formed using the two film formation methods described above in the channel formation region of a transistor, it is possible to realize a transistor with excellent characteristics (e.g., a transistor with a large on-state current, a transistor with high field-effect mobility, a transistor with a small S value, a transistor with high frequency characteristics (also called f characteristics), a highly reliable transistor, etc.).
また、金属酸化物は、第1の成膜方法と、マイクロ波プラズマ処理及び加熱処理の一方又は両方と、を用いることにより作製することができる場合がある。別言すると、第2の成膜方法を用いることなく、金属酸化物を作製することができる場合がある。例えば、第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層を形成した後に、マイクロ波プラズマ処理及び加熱処理の一方又は両方を行うことで、当該第1の層の結晶性を高めることができる。よって、当該第1の層を核又は種として、第1の成膜方法を用いて第1の層上に形成した第2の層の結晶性を高くすることができる。また、当該第2の層を形成した後、マイクロ波プラズマ処理及び加熱処理の一方又は両方を行うことで、金属酸化物の結晶性を高めることができる。したがって、金属酸化物にCAAC構造を形成することができる。 Furthermore, metal oxides can sometimes be formed by using the first film formation method and one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment. In other words, metal oxides can sometimes be formed without using the second film formation method. For example, after forming a first layer using the first film formation method, the crystallinity of the first layer can be increased by performing one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment. Therefore, the crystallinity of a second layer formed on the first layer using the first film formation method can be increased using the first layer as a nucleus or seed. Furthermore, after forming the second layer, the crystallinity of the metal oxide can be increased by performing one or both of microwave plasma treatment and heat treatment. Therefore, a CAAC structure can be formed in the metal oxide.
以上のように、第2の成膜方法を用いない作製方法においても、第1の成膜方法を用いて形成した第1の層を核又は種として、上方の金属酸化物を固相成長させ、結晶性の高い金属酸化物を形成することができる。このような成膜方法を用いて形成された金属酸化物も、AG CAACと呼称することができる。 As described above, even in a manufacturing method that does not use the second film formation method, the first layer formed using the first film formation method can be used as a nucleus or seed to cause solid-phase growth of the upper metal oxide, forming a highly crystalline metal oxide. Metal oxides formed using such film formation methods can also be referred to as AG CAAC.
なお、金属酸化物が2層以上の積層構造である場合、1種の成膜方法を用いて金属酸化物を形成することにより作製することもできる。金属酸化物が、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、の2層構造である場合、当該金属酸化物は、例えば、スパッタリング法を用いて、第1の層、第2の層をこの順に形成することにより、作製することができる。スパッタリング法は、ALD法よりも成膜速度が高いため、生産性を向上することができる。また、例えば、金属酸化物が、第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、第2の層上の第3の層と、の3層構造である場合、スパッタリング法を用いて第1の層乃至第3の層を作製することもできる。さらに、第1の層乃至第3の層の一部をALD法で成膜することもできる。例えば、第2の層及び第3の層の一方又は両方をALD法で成膜することができる。 Note that when the metal oxide has a stacked structure of two or more layers, it can be produced by forming the metal oxide using a single film formation method. When the metal oxide has a two-layer structure consisting of a first layer and a second layer on the first layer, the metal oxide can be produced, for example, by forming the first layer and the second layer in this order using a sputtering method. Sputtering has a higher film formation rate than ALD, and therefore can improve productivity. For example, when the metal oxide has a three-layer structure consisting of a first layer, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer, the first layer to the third layer can be produced using a sputtering method. Furthermore, portions of the first layer to the third layer can also be deposited using ALD. For example, one or both of the second layer and the third layer can be deposited using ALD.
[トランジスタの金属酸化物層]
本実施の形態の金属酸化物は、トランジスタの半導体層として用いることができる。例えば、トランジスタ120の半導体層112に用いることができる。
[Metal oxide layer of transistor]
The metal oxide of this embodiment can be used as a semiconductor layer of a transistor, for example, as the semiconductor layer 112 of the transistor 120.
トランジスタの半導体層とし用いる金属酸化物は、CAAC構造を有することが好ましい。CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物は、結晶部において金属原子が被形成面に平行、又は概略平行な方向に層状に配列する。 Metal oxides used as semiconductor layers of transistors preferably have a CAAC structure. In metal oxides with a CAAC structure, metal atoms in the crystalline portion are arranged in layers parallel or approximately parallel to the surface on which they are formed.
CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物は、電流異方性が発現すると推定される。例えば、IGZO結晶において、電流はc軸方向と比較してa軸方向に流れ易い。つまり、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物において、電流は縦方向よりも横方向に流れ易いと推定される。 Metal oxides with a CAAC structure are presumed to exhibit current anisotropy. For example, in IGZO crystals, current flows more easily in the a-axis direction than in the c-axis direction. In other words, in metal oxides with a CAAC structure, current flows more easily in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction.
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置において、半導体層112にCAAC構造を有する金属酸化物を用いる場合は、被形成面(例えば、絶縁層108の側面)に平行又は概略平行な方向に金属原子が層状に配列する。CAAC構造のa−b面が、被形成面に平行又は概略平行な方向に設けられる、と表現することもできる。このような構成にすることで、トランジスタのチャネルにおいて、電流が流れる向きに沿って、CAAC構造のa−b面を設けることができる。これにより、トランジスタのオン電流を大きくすることができる。 In a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention, when a metal oxide having a CAAC structure is used for the semiconductor layer 112, metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner parallel to or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed (e.g., the side surface of the insulating layer 108). It can also be expressed as the a-b plane of the CAAC structure being provided parallel to or approximately parallel to the surface on which the metal oxide is to be formed. With this structure, the a-b plane of the CAAC structure can be provided along the direction of current flow in the channel of the transistor. This allows the on-state current of the transistor to be increased.
金属酸化物をトランジスタの半導体層として用いる場合、金属酸化物の厚さは、例えば、3nm以上200nm以下であることが好ましく、3nm以上100nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには5nm以上100nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには10nm以上100nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには10nm以上70nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには15nm以上70nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには15nm以上50nm以下であることが好ましく、さらには20nm以上50nm以下であることが好ましい。また、より微細な半導体装置に用いるトランジスタにおいては、半導体層として用いる金属酸化物の厚さは、1nm以上20nm以下であることが好ましく、3nm以上15nm以下であることが好ましく、5nm以上12nm以下であることが好ましく、5nm以上10nm以下であることが好ましい。また、トランジスタのチャネル形成領域における金属酸化物の平均の厚さは、2nm以上15nm以下であることが特に好ましい。 When a metal oxide is used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor, the thickness of the metal oxide is, for example, preferably 3 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 5 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 10 nm to 100 nm, even more preferably 10 nm to 70 nm, even more preferably 15 nm to 70 nm, even more preferably 15 nm to 50 nm, and even more preferably 20 nm to 50 nm. Furthermore, in transistors used in smaller semiconductor devices, the thickness of the metal oxide used as the semiconductor layer is preferably 1 nm to 20 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 15 nm, even more preferably 5 nm to 12 nm, and even more preferably 5 nm to 10 nm. Furthermore, the average thickness of the metal oxide in the channel formation region of the transistor is particularly preferably 2 nm to 15 nm.
第1の層は、例えば、0.5nm以上50nm以下であることが好ましく、0.5nm以上30nm以下であることがより好ましく、0.5nm以上20nm以下であることがより好ましく、1nm以上50nm以下であることがより好ましく、1nm以上30nm以下であることがより好ましく、1nm以上20nm以下であることがより好ましく、2nm以上20nm以下であることがより好ましい。また、第1の層は、0.5nm以上3nm以下であることがさらに好ましい。 The first layer preferably has a thickness of, for example, 0.5 nm or more and 50 nm or less, more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 30 nm or less, even more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 50 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 30 nm or less, even more preferably 1 nm or more and 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 2 nm or more and 20 nm or less. Furthermore, the first layer preferably has a thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 3 nm or less.
また、第1の層は、膜厚が0.1nm以上3nm以下である領域を有することが好ましく、膜厚が0.1nm以上2nm以下である領域を有することがより好ましい。又は、膜厚が0.5nm以上3nm以下である領域を有することがより好ましく、膜厚が0.5nm以上2nm以下である領域を有することがさらに好ましい。 Furthermore, the first layer preferably has a region with a film thickness of 0.1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, and more preferably has a region with a film thickness of 0.1 nm or more and 2 nm or less. Alternatively, it is more preferable that the first layer has a region with a film thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 3 nm or less, and even more preferable that the first layer has a region with a film thickness of 0.5 nm or more and 2 nm or less.
第2の層は、例えば、200nm以下であることが好ましい。また、第2の層が層状である場合には、例えば、1nm以上200nm以下であることが好ましく、1nm以上100nm以下であることがより好ましく、2nm以上100nm以下であることが好ましい。 The second layer preferably has a thickness of, for example, 200 nm or less. Furthermore, if the second layer is layer-like, it preferably has a thickness of, for example, 1 nm or more and 200 nm or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and 100 nm or less, and more preferably 2 nm or more and 100 nm or less.
又は、第2の層が結晶核として機能し得るのであれば、第2の層が層状に存在せず、島状の領域の集合体となる場合もある。このような場合には例えば、第2の層が有する島状の領域は、離散的に存在する。 Alternatively, if the second layer can function as a crystal nucleus, the second layer may not exist in a layered structure, but may be a collection of island-like regions. In such cases, for example, the island-like regions of the second layer exist discretely.
第3の層の膜厚の好ましい範囲は、第1の層の膜厚についての説明を参照できる。 For the preferred range of film thickness for the third layer, please refer to the explanation for the film thickness of the first layer.
[金属酸化物中の不純物]
ここで、金属酸化物層中における各不純物の影響について説明する。
[Impurities in metal oxides]
Here, the influence of each impurity in the metal oxide layer will be described.
トランジスタの半導体層として用いた金属酸化物中のチャネル形成領域に酸素欠損(VO)及び不純物が存在すると、トランジスタの電気特性が変動しやすく、信頼性が悪くなる場合がある。したがって、OSトランジスタの電気特性を安定にするためには、半導体層として用いた金属酸化物中の不純物濃度を低減することが有効である。また、半導体層として用いた金属酸化物中の不純物濃度を低減するためには、近接する膜中の不純物濃度も低減することが好ましい。半導体層として用いた金属酸化物の不純物としては、水素、炭素、窒素等が挙げられる。なお、金属酸化物中の不純物とは、例えば、金属酸化物を構成する主成分以外をいう。例えば、濃度が0.1atomic%未満の元素は不純物といえる。 If oxygen vacancies ( VO ) and impurities are present in the channel formation region of a metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer of a transistor, the electrical characteristics of the transistor are likely to fluctuate, which may result in poor reliability. Therefore, in order to stabilize the electrical characteristics of an OS transistor, it is effective to reduce the impurity concentration in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer. Furthermore, in order to reduce the impurity concentration in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer, it is preferable to also reduce the impurity concentration in a nearby film. Examples of impurities in the metal oxide used as a semiconductor layer include hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen. Note that the impurities in the metal oxide refer to, for example, elements other than the main component constituting the metal oxide. For example, an element with a concentration of less than 0.1 atomic % can be considered an impurity.
金属酸化物において、第14族元素の一つであるシリコン又は炭素が含まれると、金属酸化物において欠陥準位が形成される。このため、SIMSにより得られる金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域における炭素の濃度は、1×1020atoms/cm3以下、好ましくは5×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは3×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは1×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは3×1018atoms/cm3以下、さらに好ましくは1×1018atoms/cm3以下とする。また、SIMSにより得られる金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域におけるシリコンの濃度は、1×1020atoms/cm3以下、好ましくは5×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは3×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは1×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは3×1018atoms/cm3以下、さらに好ましくは1×1018atoms/cm3以下とする。 When a metal oxide contains silicon or carbon, which is one of the Group 14 elements, defect levels are formed in the metal oxide. Therefore, the carbon concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1× 10 atoms/cm or less, preferably 5× 10 atoms/cm or less, more preferably 3× 10 atoms/cm or less, more preferably 1× 10 atoms/ cm or less, more preferably 3 × 10 atoms/cm or less, and even more preferably 1× 10 atoms/cm or less . The silicon concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is 1×10 20 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 3×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 3×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, and even more preferably 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less.
また、金属酸化物において、窒素が含まれると、キャリアである電子が生じ、キャリア濃度が増加し、n型化しやすい。この結果、窒素が含まれている金属酸化物を半導体に用いたトランジスタはノーマリーオン特性となりやすい。又は、金属酸化物において、窒素が含まれると、トラップ準位が形成される場合がある。この結果、トランジスタの電気特性が不安定となる場合がある。このため、SIMSにより得られる金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域における窒素濃度は、1×1020atoms/cm3以下、好ましくは5×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは1×1019atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは5×1018atoms/cm3以下、より好ましくは1×1018atoms/cm3以下、さらに好ましくは5×1017atoms/cm3以下とする。 Furthermore, when nitrogen is contained in a metal oxide, electrons serving as carriers are generated, the carrier concentration increases, and the metal oxide is likely to become n-type. As a result, a transistor using a nitrogen-containing metal oxide as a semiconductor is likely to have normally-on characteristics. Alternatively, when nitrogen is contained in a metal oxide, trap levels may be formed. As a result, the electrical characteristics of the transistor may become unstable. Therefore, the nitrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1×10 20 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 5×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, and even more preferably 5×10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
また、金属酸化物に含まれる水素は、金属原子と結合する酸素と反応して水になるため、酸素欠損を形成する場合がある。該酸素欠損に水素が入ることで、キャリアである電子が生成される場合がある。また、水素の一部が金属原子と結合する酸素と結合して、キャリアである電子を生成することがある。従って、水素が含まれている金属酸化物を用いたトランジスタはノーマリーオン特性となりやすい。このため、金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域における水素はできる限り低減されていることが好ましい。具体的には、SIMSにより得られる金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域における水素濃度は、1×1020atoms/cm3未満、好ましくは5×1019atoms/cm3未満、より好ましくは1×1019atoms/cm3未満、より好ましくは5×1018atoms/cm3未満、より好ましくは1×1018atoms/cm3未満、さらに好ましくは1×1017atoms/cm3未満とする。 Furthermore, hydrogen contained in the metal oxide may react with oxygen bonded to metal atoms to form water, thereby forming oxygen vacancies. Hydrogen entering the oxygen vacancies may generate electrons as carriers. Furthermore, some of the hydrogen may bond with oxygen bonded to metal atoms to generate electrons as carriers. Therefore, a transistor using a metal oxide containing hydrogen is likely to exhibit normally-on characteristics. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce hydrogen as much as possible in the channel formation region of the metal oxide. Specifically, the hydrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is less than 1×10 20 atoms/cm 3 , preferably less than 5×10 19 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 1×10 19 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 5×10 18 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 , and even more preferably less than 1×10 17 atoms/cm 3 .
また、金属酸化物にアルカリ金属又はアルカリ土類金属が含まれると、欠陥準位を形成し、キャリアを生成する場合がある。従って、アルカリ金属又はアルカリ土類金属が含まれている金属酸化物を半導体層として用いたトランジスタはノーマリーオン特性となりやすい。このため、SIMSにより得られる金属酸化物のチャネル形成領域中のアルカリ金属又はアルカリ土類金属の濃度を、1×1018atoms/cm3以下、好ましくは2×1016atoms/cm3以下にする。 Furthermore, when a metal oxide contains an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, defect levels may be formed and carriers may be generated. Therefore, a transistor using a metal oxide containing an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal as a semiconductor layer tends to have normally-on characteristics. Therefore, the concentration of the alkali metal or alkaline earth metal in the channel formation region of the metal oxide obtained by SIMS is set to 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2×10 16 atoms/cm 3 or less.
不純物が十分に低減された金属酸化物をトランジスタのチャネル形成領域に用いることで、安定した電気特性を付与することができる。 By using metal oxides with sufficiently reduced impurities in the channel formation region of a transistor, stable electrical characteristics can be achieved.
本実施の形態に示す構成は、他の実施の形態に示した構成と適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 The configuration described in this embodiment can be used in appropriate combination with the configurations described in other embodiments.
(実施の形態3)
本実施の形態では、半導体装置10をメモリセルとして用いた半導体装置900の構成例について説明する。半導体装置900は記憶装置として機能できる。
(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment, a configuration example of a semiconductor device 900 using the semiconductor device 10 as a memory cell will be described. The semiconductor device 900 can function as a memory device.
図11に、半導体装置900の構成例を示すブロック図を示す。図11に示す半導体装置900は、駆動回路910と、メモリアレイ920と、を有する。メモリアレイ920は、メモリセルとして機能する複数の半導体装置10を有する。図11では、メモリアレイ920がp行q列の(p及びqのそれぞれは、2以上の整数)マトリクス状に配置された複数の半導体装置10を有する例を示している。複数の半導体装置10をマトリクス状に配置することで、記憶容量の大きい記憶装置が実現できる。 Figure 11 shows a block diagram illustrating an example configuration of a semiconductor device 900. The semiconductor device 900 shown in Figure 11 has a driver circuit 910 and a memory array 920. The memory array 920 has a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 that function as memory cells. Figure 11 shows an example in which the memory array 920 has a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 arranged in a matrix of p rows and q columns (p and q are each an integer of 2 or greater). By arranging a plurality of semiconductor devices 10 in a matrix, a memory device with a large storage capacity can be realized.
図11では、1行1列目の半導体装置10を半導体装置10[1,1]と示し、p行q列目の半導体装置10を半導体装置10[p,q]と示し、p行1列目の半導体装置10を半導体装置10[p,1]と示し、1行q列目の半導体装置10を半導体装置10[1,q]と示し、r行s列目(rは任意の行を示す1以上p以下の整数、sは任意の列を示す1以上q以下の整数)の半導体装置10を半導体装置10[r,s]と示している。 In FIG. 11, the semiconductor device 10 in the first row and first column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[1,1], the semiconductor device 10 in the pth row and qth column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[p,q], the semiconductor device 10 in the pth row and first column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[p,1], the semiconductor device 10 in the first row and qth column is indicated as semiconductor device 10[1,q], and the semiconductor device 10 in the rth row and sth column (r is an integer of 1 to p inclusive indicating an arbitrary row, and s is an integer of 1 to q inclusive indicating an arbitrary column) is indicated as semiconductor device 10[r,s].
なお、行と列は互いに直交する方向に延在する。本実施の形態では、X方向(X軸に沿う方向)を「行」とし、Y方向(Y軸に沿う方向)を「列」としているが、X方向を「列」とし、Y方向を「行」とすることも可能である。 Note that rows and columns extend in directions perpendicular to each other. In this embodiment, the X direction (direction along the X axis) is referred to as a "row" and the Y direction (direction along the Y axis) as a "column," but it is also possible to refer to the X direction as a "column" and the Y direction as a "row."
図12A及び図13Aはメモリアレイ920の一部を示すブロック図である。図12B及び図13Bはメモリアレイ920の一部を示す斜視模式図である。図12A及び図12Bに示すように、メモリセルとして機能する複数の半導体装置10を、メモリアレイ920内で行方向及び列方向に揃えて配置することが可能である。また、図13A及び図13Bに示すように、メモリセルとして機能する複数の半導体装置10を、メモリアレイ920内で互い違いに配置することも可能である。 FIGS. 12A and 13A are block diagrams showing a portion of the memory array 920. FIGS. 12B and 13B are schematic perspective views showing a portion of the memory array 920. As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, multiple semiconductor devices 10 functioning as memory cells can be aligned in the row and column directions within the memory array 920. Also, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, multiple semiconductor devices 10 functioning as memory cells can be staggered within the memory array 920.
駆動回路910は、PSW931(パワースイッチ)、PSW932及び周辺回路915を有する。周辺回路915は、周辺回路911、コントロール回路912(Control Circuit)、及び電圧生成回路928を有する。 The drive circuit 910 includes a PSW 931 (power switch), a PSW 932, and a peripheral circuit 915. The peripheral circuit 915 includes a peripheral circuit 911, a control circuit 912, and a voltage generation circuit 928.
半導体装置900において、各回路、各信号及び各電圧は、必要に応じて、適宜取捨することができる。あるいは、他の回路又は他の信号を追加することも可能である。信号BW、信号CE、信号GW、信号CLK、信号WAKE、信号ADDR、信号WDA、信号PON1、信号PON2は外部からの入力信号であり、信号RDAは外部への出力信号である。信号CLKはクロック信号である。 In the semiconductor device 900, each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals can be added. Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside. Signal CLK is a clock signal.
また、信号BW、信号CE及び信号GWは制御信号である。信号CEはチップイネーブル信号であり、信号GWはグローバル書き込みイネーブル信号であり、信号BWはバイト書き込みイネーブル信号である。信号ADDRはアドレス信号である。信号WDAは書き込みデータであり、信号RDAは読み出しデータである。信号PON1、信号PON2は、パワーゲーティング制御用信号である。なお、信号PON1、信号PON2は、コントロール回路912で生成することも可能である。 Furthermore, signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals. Signal CE is a chip enable signal, signal GW is a global write enable signal, and signal BW is a byte write enable signal. Signal ADDR is an address signal. Signal WDA is write data, and signal RDA is read data. Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 can also be generated by control circuit 912.
コントロール回路912は、半導体装置900の動作全般を制御する機能を有するロジック回路である。例えば、コントロール回路912は、信号CE、信号GW及び信号BWを論理演算して、半導体装置900の動作モード(例えば、書き込み動作、読み出し動作)を決定する。又は、コントロール回路912は、この動作モードが実行されるように、周辺回路911の制御信号を生成する。 The control circuit 912 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the semiconductor device 900. For example, the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900. Alternatively, the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
電圧生成回路928は負電圧を生成する機能を有する。信号WAKEは、信号CLKの電圧生成回路928への入力を制御する機能を有する。例えば、信号WAKEとしてHレベルの信号が与えられると、信号CLKが電圧生成回路928へ入力され、電圧生成回路928は負電圧を生成する。 The voltage generation circuit 928 has the function of generating a negative voltage. The signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of the signal CLK to the voltage generation circuit 928. For example, when an H-level signal is given as the signal WAKE, the signal CLK is input to the voltage generation circuit 928, and the voltage generation circuit 928 generates a negative voltage.
周辺回路911は、メモリアレイ920に対するデータの書き込み及び読み出しをするための回路である。周辺回路911は、行デコーダ941、列デコーダ942、行ドライバ923、列ドライバ924、入力回路925、出力回路926、及びセンスアンプ927を有する。 The peripheral circuit 911 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory array 920. The peripheral circuit 911 includes a row decoder 941, a column decoder 942, a row driver 923, a column driver 924, an input circuit 925, an output circuit 926, and a sense amplifier 927.
行デコーダ941及び列デコーダ942は、信号ADDRをデコードする機能を有する。行デコーダ941は、アクセスする行を指定するための回路であり、列デコーダ942は、アクセスする列を指定するための回路である。行ドライバ923は、行デコーダ941が指定する行を選択する機能を有する。列ドライバ924は、データをメモリアレイ920に書き込む機能、メモリアレイ920からデータを読み出す機能、読み出したデータを保持する機能等を有する。 The row decoder 941 and column decoder 942 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR. The row decoder 941 is a circuit for specifying the row to be accessed, and the column decoder 942 is a circuit for specifying the column to be accessed. The row driver 923 has the function of selecting the row specified by the row decoder 941. The column driver 924 has the function of writing data to the memory array 920, reading data from the memory array 920, and retaining the read data.
入力回路925は、信号WDAを保持する機能を有する。入力回路925が保持するデータは、列ドライバ924に出力される。入力回路925の出力データが、メモリアレイ920に書き込むデータ(Din)である。列ドライバ924がメモリアレイ920から読み出したデータ(Dout)は、出力回路926に出力される。出力回路926は、Doutを保持する機能を有する。また、出力回路926は、Doutを半導体装置900の外部に出力する機能を有する。出力回路926から出力されるデータが信号RDAである。 The input circuit 925 has the function of holding the signal WDA. The data held by the input circuit 925 is output to the column driver 924. The output data of the input circuit 925 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory array 920. The data (Dout) read from the memory array 920 by the column driver 924 is output to the output circuit 926. The output circuit 926 has the function of holding Dout. The output circuit 926 also has the function of outputting Dout externally from the semiconductor device 900. The data output from the output circuit 926 is the signal RDA.
PSW931は周辺回路915へのVDDの供給を制御する機能を有する。PSW932は、行ドライバ923へのVHMの供給を制御する機能を有する。ここでは、半導体装置900の高電源電位がVDDであり、低電源電位はGND(接地電位)である。また、VHMは、ワード線を高レベルにするために用いられる高電源電位であり、VDDよりも高い。信号PON1によってPSW931のオン・オフが制御され、信号PON2によってPSW932のオン・オフが制御される。図11では、周辺回路915において、VDDが供給される電源ドメインの数を1としているが、複数にすることもできる。この場合、各電源ドメインに対してパワースイッチを設ければよい。 PSW931 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 915. PSW932 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 923. Here, the high power supply potential of the semiconductor device 900 is VDD, and the low power supply potential is GND (ground potential). VHM is a high power supply potential used to set the word line to a high level and is higher than VDD. The on/off of PSW931 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW932 is controlled by signal PON2. In FIG. 11, the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 915 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.
図14A乃至図14Gを用いて、半導体装置900のメモリセルに適用できる回路構成例について説明する。 An example circuit configuration that can be applied to the memory cells of the semiconductor device 900 will be described using Figures 14A to 14G.
[DOSRAM]
図14Aに、DRAM(Dynamic Random Access Memory)のメモリセルの回路構成例を示す。本明細書等において、OSトランジスタを用いたDRAMを、DOSRAM(Dynamic Oxide Semiconductor Random Access Memory)と呼ぶ。
[DOSRAM]
14A shows an example of a circuit configuration of a memory cell of a dynamic random access memory (DRAM). In this specification and the like, a DRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as a dynamic oxide semiconductor random access memory (DOSRAM).
メモリセル951は、半導体装置10と同様の回路構成を有する。よって、半導体装置10は、DRAM又はDOSRAMとして機能する。 Memory cell 951 has the same circuit configuration as semiconductor device 10. Therefore, semiconductor device 10 functions as DRAM or DOSRAM.
メモリセル951は、トランジスタM1と、容量CAと、を有する。なお、トランジスタM1として、フロントゲート(単にゲートと呼ぶ場合がある。)及びバックゲートを有するトランジスタを用いることができる。このとき、バックゲートは定電位又は信号が与えられる配線に接続するとができるし、フロントゲートとバックゲートが互いに接続されてる構成にすることもできる。 Memory cell 951 includes a transistor M1 and a capacitor CA. Note that a transistor having a front gate (sometimes simply referred to as a gate) and a back gate can be used as transistor M1. In this case, the back gate can be connected to a wiring that supplies a constant potential or a signal, or the front gate and back gate can be connected to each other.
トランジスタM1の第1端子は、容量CAの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM1の第2端子は、配線BLと接続され、トランジスタM1のゲートは、配線WLと接続されている。容量CAの第2端子は、配線CALと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M1 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CA, the second terminal of transistor M1 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M1 is connected to wiring WL. The second terminal of capacitor CA is connected to wiring CAL.
配線BLは、ビット線として機能し、配線WLは、ワード線として機能する。配線CALは、容量CAの第2端子に所定の電位を印加するための配線として機能する。データの書き込み時、及び読み出し時において、配線CALには、低レベル電位(基準電位という場合がある。)を印加するのが好ましい。 The wiring BL functions as a bit line, and the wiring WL functions as a word line. The wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of the capacitor CA. When writing and reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to the wiring CAL.
データの書き込み及び読み出しは、配線WLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM1をオン状態にし、配線BLと容量CAの第1端子を導通状態(電流を流すことが可能な状態)にすることによって行われる。 Data is written and read by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on the transistor M1, and bringing the wiring BL and the first terminal of the capacitor CA into a conductive state (a state in which current can flow).
また、半導体装置900のメモリセルに適用できる回路構成は、メモリセル951として示した回路構成に限定されない。 Furthermore, the circuit configuration that can be applied to the memory cells of the semiconductor device 900 is not limited to the circuit configuration shown as memory cell 951.
なお、トランジスタM1としてOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が極めて小さいという特性を有している。トランジスタM1としてOSトランジスタを用いることによって、トランジスタM1のリーク電流を非常に低くすることができる。つまり、書き込んだデータをトランジスタM1によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。又は、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。また、リーク電流が非常に低いため、メモリセル951に対して多値データ、又はアナログデータを保持することができる。 Note that it is preferable to use an OS transistor as transistor M1. OS transistors have the characteristic of having an extremely low off-state current. By using an OS transistor as transistor M1, the leakage current of transistor M1 can be made extremely low. That is, written data can be held by transistor M1 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cell can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, because the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be held in memory cell 951.
[NOSRAM]
図14Bに、2トランジスタ1容量のゲインセル型のメモリセルの回路構成例を示す。メモリセル953は、トランジスタM2と、トランジスタM3と、容量CBと、を有する。本明細書等において、トランジスタM2にOSトランジスタを用いたゲインセル型のメモリセルを有する記憶装置を、NOSRAM(Nonvolatile Oxide Semiconductor RAM)と呼ぶ。
[NOSRAM]
14B shows an example circuit configuration of a two-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell memory cell. The memory cell 953 includes a transistor M2, a transistor M3, and a capacitor CB. In this specification and the like, a memory device having a gain cell memory cell in which the transistor M2 is an OS transistor is referred to as a nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM (NOSRAM).
トランジスタM2の第1端子は、容量CBの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM2の第2端子は、配線WBLと接続され、トランジスタM2のゲートは、配線WLと接続されている。容量CBの第2端子は、配線CALと接続されている。トランジスタM3の第1端子は、配線RBLと接続され、トランジスタM3の第2端子は、配線SLと接続され、トランジスタM3のゲートは、容量CBの第1端子と接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M2 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CB, the second terminal of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WBL, and the gate of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WL. The second terminal of capacitor CB is connected to wiring CAL. The first terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring RBL, the second terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring SL, and the gate of transistor M3 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CB.
配線WBLは、書き込みビット線として機能し、配線RBLは、読み出しビット線として機能し、配線WLは、ワード線として機能する。配線CALは、容量CBの第2端子に所定の電位を印加するための配線として機能する。データの書き込み時、データ保持の最中、データの読み出し時において、配線CALには、低レベル電位(基準電位という場合がある)を印加するのが好ましい。 Wiring WBL functions as a write bit line, wiring RBL functions as a read bit line, and wiring WL functions as a word line. Wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of capacitance CB. When writing data, while retaining data, and when reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to wiring CAL.
データの書き込みは、配線WLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM2をオン状態にし、配線WBLと容量CBの第1端子を導通状態にすることによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM2がオン状態のときに、配線WBLに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、容量CBの第1端子、及びトランジスタM3のゲートに該電位を書き込む。その後、配線WLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM2をオフ状態にすることによって、容量CBの第1端子の電位、及びトランジスタM3のゲートの電位を保持する。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on transistor M2, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring WBL and the first terminal of the capacitor CB. Specifically, when transistor M2 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring WBL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitor CB and the gate of transistor M3. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WL, turning off transistor M2, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CB and the potential of the gate of transistor M3.
データの読み出しは、配線SLに所定の電位を印加することによって行われる。トランジスタM3のソース−ドレイン間に流れる電流、及びトランジスタM3の第1端子の電位は、トランジスタM3のゲートの電位、及びトランジスタM3の第2端子の電位によって決まるため、トランジスタM3の第1端子に接続されている配線RBLの電位を読み出すことによって、容量CBの第1端子(又はトランジスタM3のゲート)に保持されている電位を読み出すことができる。つまり、容量CBの第1端子(又はトランジスタM3のゲート)に保持されている電位から、このメモリセルに書き込まれている情報を読み出すことができる。 Data is read by applying a predetermined potential to the wiring SL. The current flowing between the source and drain of transistor M3 and the potential of the first terminal of transistor M3 are determined by the potential of the gate of transistor M3 and the potential of the second terminal of transistor M3. Therefore, by reading the potential of the wiring RBL connected to the first terminal of transistor M3, the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3).
また、例えば、配線WBLと配線RBLを一本の配線BLとしてまとめた構成にすることが可能である。そのメモリセルの回路構成例を図14Cに示す。メモリセル954は、メモリセル953の配線WBLと配線RBLを一本の配線BLとして、トランジスタM2の第2端子、及びトランジスタM3の第1端子が、配線BLと接続されている構成となっている。つまり、メモリセル954は、書き込みビット線と、読み出しビット線と、を1本の配線BLとして動作する構成となっている。 Furthermore, for example, it is possible to combine the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL into a single wiring BL. An example circuit configuration of such a memory cell is shown in Figure 14C. In memory cell 954, the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL of memory cell 953 are combined into a single wiring BL, and the second terminal of transistor M2 and the first terminal of transistor M3 are connected to the wiring BL. In other words, memory cell 954 is configured to operate as a write bit line and a read bit line using a single wiring BL.
図14Dに示すメモリセル955は、メモリセル953における容量CB及び配線CALを省略した場合の例である。また、図14Eに示すメモリセル956は、メモリセル954における容量CB及び配線CALを省略した場合の例である。このような構成とすることで、メモリセルの集積度を高めることができる。 Memory cell 955 shown in Figure 14D is an example in which the capacitance CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 953 have been omitted. Furthermore, memory cell 956 shown in Figure 14E is an example in which the capacitance CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 954 have been omitted. This configuration allows for increased integration of the memory cells.
なお、少なくともトランジスタM2にはOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。特に、トランジスタM2及びトランジスタM3にOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。 Note that it is preferable to use an OS transistor for at least transistor M2. In particular, it is preferable to use OS transistors for transistors M2 and M3.
OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が極めて小さいという特性を有しているため、書き込んだデータをトランジスタM2によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。又は、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。また、リーク電流が非常に低いため、メモリセル953、メモリセル954、メモリセル955及びメモリセル956のそれぞれで多値データ又はアナログデータを保持することができる。 OS transistors have an extremely low off-state current, which allows written data to be retained by transistor M2 for a long time, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refresh operations of the memory cell can be eliminated. Furthermore, because the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be retained in each of memory cells 953, 954, 955, and 956.
トランジスタM2としてOSトランジスタを適用したメモリセル953、メモリセル954、メモリセル955及びメモリセル956は、NOSRAMの一態様である。 Memory cell 953, memory cell 954, memory cell 955, and memory cell 956, in which an OS transistor is used as transistor M2, are one embodiment of NOSRAM.
なお、トランジスタM3としてSiトランジスタを用いることができる。Siトランジスタは電界効果移動度を高めることができるほか、pチャネル型トランジスタとすることもできるため、回路設計の自由度を高めることができる。 It should be noted that a Si transistor can be used as transistor M3. Si transistors can increase field-effect mobility and can also be used as p-channel transistors, allowing for greater freedom in circuit design.
また、トランジスタM3としてOSトランジスタを用いた場合、メモリセルをn型のトランジスタのみで構成することができる。 Furthermore, when an OS transistor is used as transistor M3, the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
また、図14Fに、3トランジスタ1容量のゲインセル型のメモリセル957を示す。メモリセル957は、トランジスタM4乃至トランジスタM6と、容量CCと、を有する。メモリセル957もNOSRAMの一態様である。 Figure 14F also shows a three-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell type memory cell 957. Memory cell 957 has transistors M4 to M6 and a capacitor CC. Memory cell 957 is also a form of NOSRAM.
トランジスタM4の第1端子は、容量CCの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM4の第2端子は、配線BLと接続され、トランジスタM4のゲートは、配線WLと接続されている。容量CCの第2端子は、トランジスタM5の第1端子と、配線GNDLと、に接続されている。トランジスタM5の第2端子は、トランジスタM6の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM5のゲートは、容量CCの第1端子と接続されている。トランジスタM6の第2端子は、配線BLと接続され、トランジスタM6のゲートは配線RWLと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M4 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CC, the second terminal of transistor M4 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M4 is connected to wiring WL. The second terminal of capacitor CC is connected to the first terminal of transistor M5 and wiring GNDL. The second terminal of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of transistor M6, and the gate of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CC. The second terminal of transistor M6 is connected to wiring BL, and the gate of transistor M6 is connected to wiring RWL.
配線BLは、ビット線として機能し、配線WLは、書き込みワード線として機能し、配線RWLは、読み出しワード線として機能する。配線GNDLは、低レベル電位を与える配線である。 The wiring BL functions as a bit line, the wiring WL functions as a write word line, and the wiring RWL functions as a read word line. The wiring GNDL is a wiring that applies a low-level potential.
データの書き込みは、配線WLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM4をオン状態にし、配線BLと容量CCの第1端子を導通状態にすることによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM4がオン状態のときに、配線BLに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、容量CCの第1端子、及びトランジスタM5のゲートに該電位を書き込む。その後、配線WLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM4をオフ状態にすることによって、容量CCの第1端子の電位、及びトランジスタM5のゲートの電位を保持する。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL, turning on transistor M4, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring BL and the first terminal of the capacitor CC. Specifically, when transistor M4 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitor CC and the gate of transistor M5. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WL, turning off transistor M4, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CC and the potential of the gate of transistor M5.
データの読み出しは、配線BLに所定の電位をプリチャージした後、配線BLを電気的に浮遊状態にし、かつ配線RWLに高レベル電位を印加することによって行われる。配線RWLが高レベル電位となるため、トランジスタM6はオン状態となり、配線BLとトランジスタM5の第2端子が導通状態となる。このとき、トランジスタM5の第2端子には、配線BLの電位が印加されることになるが、容量CCの第1端子(又はトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位に応じて、トランジスタM5の第2端子の電位、及び配線BLの電位が変化する。ここで、配線BLの電位を読み出すことによって、容量CCの第1端子(又はトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位を読み出すことができる。つまり、容量CCの第1端子(又はトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位から、このメモリセルに書き込まれている情報を読み出すことができる。 Data is read by precharging the wiring BL to a predetermined potential, electrically floating the wiring BL, and applying a high-level potential to the wiring RWL. Because the wiring RWL is at a high-level potential, the transistor M6 is turned on, and the wiring BL and the second terminal of the transistor M5 are electrically connected. At this time, the potential of the wiring BL is applied to the second terminal of the transistor M5. The potential of the second terminal of the transistor M5 and the potential of the wiring BL change depending on the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5). By reading the potential of the wiring BL, the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5).
なお、少なくともトランジスタM4にOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。 Note that it is preferable to use an OS transistor for at least transistor M4.
なお、トランジスタM5及びM6としてSiトランジスタを用いることができる。前述した通り、Siトランジスタは、半導体層に用いるシリコンの結晶状態等によっては、OSトランジスタよりも電界効果移動度が高くなる場合がある。 Note that Si transistors can be used as transistors M5 and M6. As mentioned above, Si transistors may have higher field-effect mobility than OS transistors depending on the crystalline state of the silicon used in the semiconductor layer.
また、トランジスタM5及びM6としてOSトランジスタを用いた場合、メモリセルをn型のトランジスタのみで構成することができる。 Furthermore, when OS transistors are used as transistors M5 and M6, the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
[OS−SRAM]
図14Gに、OSトランジスタを用いたSRAM(Static Random Access Memory)の一例を示す。本明細書等において、OSトランジスタを用いたSRAMを、OS−SRAM(Oxide Semiconductor−SRAM)と呼ぶ。なお、図14Gに示すメモリセル958は、バックアップ可能なSRAMのメモリセルである。
[OS-SRAM]
14G shows an example of a static random access memory (SRAM) using an OS transistor. In this specification and the like, an SRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as an oxide semiconductor SRAM (OS-SRAM). Note that a memory cell 958 shown in FIG. 14G is a memory cell of an SRAM capable of backing up data.
メモリセル958は、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10と、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS4と、容量CD1と、容量CD2と、を有する。なお、トランジスタMS1、及びトランジスタMS2は、pチャネル型トランジスタであり、トランジスタMS3、及びトランジスタMS4は、nチャネル型トランジスタである。 Memory cell 958 includes transistors M7 to M10, transistors MS1 to MS4, and capacitors CD1 and CD2. Note that transistors MS1 and MS2 are p-channel transistors, and transistors MS3 and MS4 are n-channel transistors.
トランジスタM7の第1端子は、配線BLと接続され、トランジスタM7の第2端子は、トランジスタMS1の第1端子と、トランジスタMS3の第1端子と、トランジスタMS2のゲートと、トランジスタMS4のゲートと、トランジスタM10の第1端子と、に接続されている。トランジスタM7のゲートは、配線WLと接続されている。トランジスタM8の第1端子は、配線BLBと接続され、トランジスタM8の第2端子は、トランジスタMS2の第1端子と、トランジスタMS4の第1端子と、トランジスタMS1のゲートと、トランジスタMS3のゲートと、トランジスタM9の第1端子と、に接続されている。トランジスタM8のゲートは、配線WLと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M7 is connected to wiring BL, and the second terminal of transistor M7 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS1, the first terminal of transistor MS3, the gate of transistor MS2, the gate of transistor MS4, and the first terminal of transistor M10. The gate of transistor M7 is connected to wiring WL. The first terminal of transistor M8 is connected to wiring BLB, and the second terminal of transistor M8 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS2, the first terminal of transistor MS4, the gate of transistor MS1, the gate of transistor MS3, and the first terminal of transistor M9. The gate of transistor M8 is connected to wiring WL.
トランジスタMS1の第2端子は、配線VDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS2の第2端子は、配線VDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS3の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS4の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。 The second terminal of transistor MS1 is connected to the wiring VDL. The second terminal of transistor MS2 is connected to the wiring VDL. The second terminal of transistor MS3 is connected to the wiring GNDL. The second terminal of transistor MS4 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
トランジスタM9の第2端子は、容量CD1の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM9のゲートは、配線BRLと接続されている。トランジスタM10の第2端子は、容量CD2の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM10のゲートは、配線BRLと接続されている。 The second terminal of transistor M9 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD1, and the gate of transistor M9 is connected to wiring BRL. The second terminal of transistor M10 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD2, and the gate of transistor M10 is connected to wiring BRL.
容量CD1の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続され、容量CD2の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。 The second terminal of capacitor CD1 is connected to wiring GNDL, and the second terminal of capacitor CD2 is connected to wiring GNDL.
配線BL及び配線BLBは、ビット線として機能し、配線WLは、ワード線として機能し、配線BRLは、トランジスタM9、及びトランジスタM10のオン状態、オフ状態を制御する配線である。 Wiring BL and wiring BLB function as bit lines, wiring WL functions as a word line, and wiring BRL is a wiring that controls the on/off states of transistors M9 and M10.
配線VDLは、高レベル電位を与える配線であり、配線GNDLは、低レベル電位を与える配線である。 The wiring VDL is a wiring that supplies a high-level potential, and the wiring GNDL is a wiring that supplies a low-level potential.
データの書き込みは、配線WLに高レベル電位を印加し、かつ配線BRLに高レベル電位を印加することによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM10がオン状態のときに、配線BLに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、トランジスタM10の第2端子側に該電位を書き込む。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL. Specifically, when the transistor M10 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BL, and the potential is written to the second terminal of the transistor M10.
ところで、メモリセル958は、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS2によってインバータループを構成しているため、トランジスタM8の第2端子側に、該電位に対応するデータ信号の反転信号が入力される。トランジスタM8がオン状態であるため、配線BLBには、配線BLに印加されている電位、すなわち配線BLに入力されている信号の反転信号が出力される。また、トランジスタM9、及びトランジスタM10がオン状態であるため、トランジスタM7の第2端子の電位、及びトランジスタM8の第2端子の電位は、それぞれ容量CD2の第1端子、及び容量CD1の第1端子に保持される。その後、配線WLに低レベル電位を印加し、かつ配線BRLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10をオフ状態にすることによって、容量CD1の第1端子、及び容量CD2の第1端子の電位を保持する。 Meanwhile, since memory cell 958 forms an inverter loop using transistors MS1 and MS2, an inverted signal of the data signal corresponding to the potential is input to the second terminal of transistor M8. Because transistor M8 is on, the potential applied to wiring BL, i.e., the inverted signal of the signal input to wiring BL, is output to wiring BLB. Because transistors M9 and M10 are on, the potentials of the second terminals of transistors M7 and M8 are held in the first terminals of capacitors CD2 and CD1, respectively. Subsequently, a low-level potential is applied to wiring WL and a low-level potential is applied to wiring BRL, turning off transistors M7 to M10, thereby holding the potentials of the first terminals of capacitors CD1 and CD2.
データの読み出しは、あらかじめ配線BL及び配線BLBを所定の電位にプリチャージした後に、配線WLに高レベル電位を印加し、配線BRLに高レベル電位を印加することによって、容量CD1の第1端子の電位が、メモリセル958のインバータループによってリフレッシュされ、配線BLBに出力される。また、容量CD2の第1端子の電位が、メモリセル958のインバータループによってリフレッシュされ、配線BLに出力される。配線BL及び配線BLBでは、それぞれプリチャージされた電位から容量CD2の第1端子の電位、及び容量CD1の第1端子の電位に変動するため、配線BL又は配線BLBの電位から、メモリセルに保持された電位を読み出すことができる。 Data is read by precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to a predetermined potential, then applying a high-level potential to the wiring WL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL. The potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CD1 is refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BLB. The potential of the first terminal of the capacitor CD2 is also refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BL. The potentials of the wiring BL and wiring BLB change from the precharged potentials to the potentials of the first terminal of the capacitor CD2 and the first terminal of the capacitor CD1, respectively, so the potential held in the memory cell can be read from the potential of the wiring BL or wiring BLB.
なお、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10としてOSトランジスタを適用することが好ましい。これにより書き込んだデータをトランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。又は、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。 Note that it is preferable to use OS transistors as transistors M7 to M10. This allows written data to be held for a long time by transistors M7 to M10, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cells can be eliminated.
なお、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS4としてSiトランジスタを用いることができる。 Note that Si transistors can be used as transistors MS1 to MS4.
半導体装置900が有する駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920は同一平面上に設けることができる。また、図15Aに示すように、駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920を重ねて設けることが好ましい。駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920を重ねて設けることで、信号伝搬距離を短くすることができる。また、図15Bに示すように、駆動回路910上にメモリアレイ920を複数層重ねて設けることも可能である。 The drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 can be provided on the same plane. It is also preferable to provide the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 in an overlapping manner, as shown in Figure 15A. By providing the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 in an overlapping manner, the signal propagation distance can be shortened. It is also possible to provide multiple layers of memory arrays 920 on top of the drive circuit 910, as shown in Figure 15B.
続いて、上記記憶装置等の半導体装置を備えることができる演算処理装置の一例について説明する。 Next, we will explain an example of a processing device that can be equipped with a semiconductor device such as the above-mentioned memory device.
図16に、演算装置960のブロック図を示す。図16に示す演算装置960は、例えばCPU(Central Processing Unit)に適用することができる。また、演算装置960は、CPUよりも並列処理可能なプロセッサコアを多数(数10~数100個)有するGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)、TPU(Tensor Processing Unit)、NPU(Neural Processing Unit)等のプロセッサにも適用することができる。 Figure 16 shows a block diagram of the arithmetic unit 960. The arithmetic unit 960 shown in Figure 16 can be applied to, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). The arithmetic unit 960 can also be applied to processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
図16に示す演算装置960は、基板990上に、ALU991(ALU:Arithmetic logic unit、演算回路)、ALUコントローラ992、インストラクションデコーダ993、インタラプトコントローラ994、タイミングコントローラ995、レジスタ996、レジスタコントローラ997、バスインターフェイス998、キャッシュ999、及びキャッシュインターフェイス989を有している。基板990は、半導体基板、SOI基板、ガラス基板等を用いる。書き換え可能なROM及びROMインターフェイスを有することもできる。また、キャッシュ999及びキャッシュインターフェイス989は、別チップに設けることも可能である。 The arithmetic device 960 shown in Figure 16 has an ALU 991 (ALU: Arithmetic logic unit, arithmetic circuit), an ALU controller 992, an instruction decoder 993, an interrupt controller 994, a timing controller 995, a register 996, a register controller 997, a bus interface 998, a cache 999, and a cache interface 989 on a substrate 990. The substrate 990 may be a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, or the like. It may also have a rewritable ROM and a ROM interface. The cache 999 and cache interface 989 may also be provided on separate chips.
キャッシュ999は、別チップに設けられたメインメモリとキャッシュインターフェイス989を介して接続される。キャッシュインターフェイス989は、メインメモリに保持されているデータの一部をキャッシュ999に供給する機能を有する。またキャッシュインターフェイス989は、キャッシュ999に保持されているデータの一部を、バスインターフェイス998を介してALU991又はレジスタ996等に出力する機能を有する。 The cache 999 is connected to the main memory provided on a separate chip via a cache interface 989. The cache interface 989 has the function of supplying a portion of the data held in the main memory to the cache 999. The cache interface 989 also has the function of outputting a portion of the data held in the cache 999 to the ALU 991 or register 996, etc. via the bus interface 998.
後述するように、演算装置960上に積層して、メモリアレイ920を設けることができる。メモリアレイ920はキャッシュとして用いることができる。このとき、キャッシュインターフェイス989はメモリアレイ920に保持されているデータをキャッシュ999に供給する機能を有していてよい。またこのとき、キャッシュインターフェイス989の一部に、駆動回路910を有することが好ましい。 As will be described later, a memory array 920 can be provided stacked on the arithmetic unit 960. The memory array 920 can be used as a cache. In this case, the cache interface 989 may have the function of supplying data held in the memory array 920 to the cache 999. In this case, it is also preferable that a drive circuit 910 be included as part of the cache interface 989.
なお、キャッシュ999を設けず、メモリアレイ920のみをキャッシュとして用いることもできる。 It is also possible to use only the memory array 920 as a cache without providing the cache 999.
図16に示す演算装置960は、その構成を簡略化して示した一例にすぎず、実際の演算装置960はその用途によって多種多様な構成を有している。例えば、図16に示す演算装置960を含む構成を一つのコアとし、当該コアを複数含み、それぞれのコアが並列で動作する、いわゆるマルチコアの構成とすることが好ましい。コアの数が多いほど、演算性能を高めることができる。コアの数は多いほど好ましいが、例えば2個、好ましくは4個、より好ましくは8個、さらに好ましくは12個、さらに好ましくは16個又はそれ以上とすることが好ましい。また、サーバー用途等非常に高い演算性能が求められる場合には、16個以上、好ましくは32個以上、さらに好ましくは64個以上のコアを有するマルチコアの構成とすることが好ましい。また、演算装置960が内部演算回路、データバス等で扱えるビット数は、例えば8ビット、16ビット、32ビット、64ビット等とすることができる。 The arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 16 is merely one example of a simplified configuration, and actual arithmetic devices 960 have a wide variety of configurations depending on their applications. For example, it is preferable to use a configuration including the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 16 as one core, and to include multiple such cores, each of which operates in parallel, in a so-called multi-core configuration. The greater the number of cores, the higher the computational performance. The more cores there are, the better, and for example, two, preferably four, more preferably eight, even more preferably twelve, and even more preferably sixteen or more cores are preferable. Furthermore, when extremely high computational performance is required, such as for server applications, a multi-core configuration with 16 or more, preferably 32 or more, and even more preferably 64 or more cores is preferable. Furthermore, the number of bits that the arithmetic device 960 can handle in its internal computation circuit, data bus, etc. can be, for example, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, 64 bits, etc.
バスインターフェイス998を介して演算装置960に入力された命令は、インストラクションデコーダ993に入力され、デコードされた後、ALUコントローラ992、インタラプトコントローラ994、レジスタコントローラ997、タイミングコントローラ995に入力される。 Instructions input to the arithmetic unit 960 via the bus interface 998 are input to the instruction decoder 993, decoded, and then input to the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995.
ALUコントローラ992、インタラプトコントローラ994、レジスタコントローラ997、タイミングコントローラ995は、デコードされた命令に基づき、各種制御を行う。具体的にALUコントローラ992は、ALU991の動作を制御するための信号を生成する。また、インタラプトコントローラ994は、演算装置960のプログラム実行中に、外部の入出力装置、周辺回路等からの割り込み要求を、その優先度、マスク状態等から判断し、処理する。レジスタコントローラ997は、レジスタ996のアドレスを生成し、演算装置960の状態に応じてレジスタ996の読み出し、書き込み等を行う。 The ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995 perform various controls based on the decoded instructions. Specifically, the ALU controller 992 generates signals to control the operation of the ALU 991. Furthermore, while the arithmetic unit 960 is executing a program, the interrupt controller 994 determines and processes interrupt requests from external input/output devices, peripheral circuits, etc. based on their priority, mask status, etc. The register controller 997 generates the address of the register 996 and performs read and write operations on the register 996 depending on the state of the arithmetic unit 960.
また、タイミングコントローラ995は、ALU991、ALUコントローラ992、インストラクションデコーダ993、インタラプトコントローラ994、及びレジスタコントローラ997の動作のタイミングを制御する信号を生成する。例えばタイミングコントローラ995は、基準クロック信号を元に、内部クロック信号を生成する内部クロック生成部を備えており、内部クロック信号を上記各種回路に供給する。 The timing controller 995 also generates signals that control the timing of the operations of the ALU 991, ALU controller 992, instruction decoder 993, interrupt controller 994, and register controller 997. For example, the timing controller 995 includes an internal clock generation unit that generates an internal clock signal based on a reference clock signal, and supplies the internal clock signal to the various circuits mentioned above.
図16に示す演算装置960において、レジスタコントローラ997は、ALU991からの指示に従い、レジスタ996における保持動作の選択を行う。すなわち、レジスタ996が有するメモリセルにおいて、フリップフロップによるデータの保持を行うか、容量によるデータの保持を行うかを、選択する。フリップフロップによるデータの保持が選択されている場合、レジスタ996内のメモリセルへの、電力供給が行われる。容量におけるデータの保持が選択されている場合、容量へのデータの書き換えが行われ、レジスタ996内のメモリセルへの電力供給を停止することができる。 In the arithmetic unit 960 shown in FIG. 16, the register controller 997 selects the holding operation in the register 996 in accordance with instructions from the ALU 991. That is, it selects whether the memory cells in the register 996 will hold data using flip-flops or capacitance. If holding data using flip-flops is selected, power is supplied to the memory cells in the register 996. If holding data using capacitance is selected, the data is rewritten to the capacitance, and the power supply to the memory cells in the register 996 can be stopped.
メモリアレイ920と演算装置960は、重ねて設けることができる。図17A及び図17Bに半導体装置970Aの斜視図を示す。半導体装置970Aは、演算装置960上に、メモリアレイが設けられた素子層930を有する。素子層930には、メモリアレイ920L1、メモリアレイ920L2、及びメモリアレイ920L3が設けられている。演算装置960と各メモリアレイは、互いに重なる領域を有する。半導体装置970Aの構成を分かりやすくするため、図17Bでは演算装置960及び素子層930を分離して示している。 The memory array 920 and the computing device 960 can be provided overlapping each other. Figures 17A and 17B show perspective views of a semiconductor device 970A. The semiconductor device 970A has an element layer 930 on which a memory array is provided above the computing device 960. The element layer 930 is provided with memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3. The computing device 960 and each memory array have overlapping regions. To make the configuration of the semiconductor device 970A easier to understand, Figure 17B shows the computing device 960 and element layer 930 separated.
メモリアレイを有する素子層930と演算装置960を重ねて設けることで、両者の接続距離を短くすることができる。よって、両者間の通信速度を高めることができる。また、接続距離が短いため消費電力を低減できる。 By stacking the element layer 930 having the memory array and the computing device 960, the connection distance between them can be shortened. This increases the communication speed between them. In addition, the short connection distance reduces power consumption.
メモリアレイを有する素子層930と演算装置960とを積層する方法としては、演算装置960上に直接メモリアレイを有する素子層930を積層する方法(モノリシック積層ともいう)を用いることも可能であるし、演算装置960と素子層930とをそれぞれ異なる基板上に形成し、2つの基板を貼り合せ、貫通ビア又は導電膜の接合技術(Cu−Cu接合等)を用いて接続する方法を用いることも可能である。前者は貼合わせにおける位置ずれを考慮する必要がないため、チップサイズを小さくできるだけでなく、作製コストを削減できる。 As a method for stacking the element layer 930 having a memory array and the arithmetic device 960, it is possible to use a method in which the element layer 930 having a memory array is stacked directly on the arithmetic device 960 (also known as monolithic stacking), or a method in which the arithmetic device 960 and the element layer 930 are formed on different substrates, the two substrates are bonded together, and the connection is made using through-vias or conductive film bonding technology (such as Cu-Cu bonding). The former method does not require consideration of misalignment during bonding, and therefore not only can the chip size be reduced, but manufacturing costs can also be reduced.
ここで、演算装置960にキャッシュ999を有さず、素子層930に設けられるメモリアレイ920L1、920L2、及び920L3は、それぞれキャッシュとして用いることができる。このとき、例えばメモリアレイ920L1をL1キャッシュ(レベル1キャッシュともいう)として用い、メモリアレイ920L2をL2キャッシュ(レベル2キャッシュともいう)として用い、メモリアレイ920L3をL3キャッシュ(レベル3キャッシュともいう)として用いることができる。3つのメモリアレイのうち、メモリアレイ920L3が最も容量が大きく、且つ、最もアクセス頻度が低い。また、メモリアレイ920L1が最も容量が小さく、且つ最もアクセス頻度が高い。 Here, the arithmetic device 960 does not have a cache 999, and the memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3 provided in the element layer 930 can each be used as a cache. In this case, for example, memory array 920L1 can be used as an L1 cache (also called a level 1 cache), memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache), and memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache). Of the three memory arrays, memory array 920L3 has the largest capacity and is accessed least frequently. Furthermore, memory array 920L1 has the smallest capacity and is accessed most frequently.
なお、演算装置960に設けられるキャッシュ999をL1キャッシュとして用いる場合は、素子層930に設けられる各メモリアレイを、それぞれ下位のキャッシュ、又はメインメモリとして用いることができる。メインメモリはキャッシュよりも容量が大きく、アクセス頻度の低いメモリである。 Note that when the cache 999 provided in the arithmetic device 960 is used as an L1 cache, each memory array provided in the element layer 930 can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. Main memory has a larger capacity than the cache and is accessed less frequently.
また、図17Bに示すように、駆動回路910L1、駆動回路910L2、及び駆動回路910L3が設けられている。駆動回路910L1は接続電極940L1を介してメモリアレイ920L1と接続されている。同様に駆動回路910L2は接続電極940L2を介してメモリアレイ920L2と、駆動回路910L3は接続電極940L3を介してメモリアレイ920L3と接続されている。 Also, as shown in FIG. 17B, drive circuits 910L1, 910L2, and 910L3 are provided. Drive circuit 910L1 is connected to memory array 920L1 via connection electrode 940L1. Similarly, drive circuit 910L2 is connected to memory array 920L2 via connection electrode 940L2, and drive circuit 910L3 is connected to memory array 920L3 via connection electrode 940L3.
なお、ここではキャッシュとして機能するメモリアレイを3つとした場合を示したが、当該メモリアレイは1つ又は2つにすることも可能であるし、4つ以上にすることも可能である。 Note that while three memory arrays functioning as caches are shown here, it is also possible to have one or two memory arrays, or even four or more.
メモリアレイ920L1をキャッシュとして用いる場合、駆動回路910L1はキャッシュインターフェイス989の一部として機能することができる。また、駆動回路910L1がキャッシュインターフェイス989と接続される構成にすることも可能である。同様に、駆動回路910L2、駆動回路910L3も、キャッシュインターフェイス989の一部として機能する、又はこれと接続される構成にすることも可能である。 When the memory array 920L1 is used as a cache, the drive circuit 910L1 can function as part of the cache interface 989. It is also possible to configure the drive circuit 910L1 to be connected to the cache interface 989. Similarly, the drive circuit 910L2 and the drive circuit 910L3 can also function as part of the cache interface 989 or be configured to be connected to it.
メモリアレイ920をキャッシュとして機能させるか、メインメモリとして機能させるかは、各駆動回路910が有するコントロール回路912によって決定される。コントロール回路912は、演算装置960から供給された信号に基づいて、半導体装置900が有するメモリアレイ920の一部をRAMとして機能させることができる。 Whether the memory array 920 functions as a cache or as main memory is determined by the control circuit 912 of each drive circuit 910. Based on a signal supplied from the arithmetic device 960, the control circuit 912 can cause part of the memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 to function as RAM.
半導体装置900は、メモリアレイ920の一部をキャッシュとして機能させ、他の一部をメインメモリとして機能させることができる。すなわち半導体装置900はキャッシュとしての機能と、メインメモリとしての機能を併せ持つことができる。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置900は、例えば、ユニバーサルメモリとして機能できる。 The semiconductor device 900 can cause part of the memory array 920 to function as a cache, and the other part to function as main memory. In other words, the semiconductor device 900 can function as both a cache and a main memory. The semiconductor device 900 according to one aspect of the present invention can function as, for example, a universal memory.
また、一つのメモリアレイ920を有する素子層930を演算装置960に重ねて設けることも可能である。図18Aに半導体装置970Bの斜視図を示す。 It is also possible to provide an element layer 930 having one memory array 920 stacked on the computing device 960. Figure 18A shows a perspective view of the semiconductor device 970B.
半導体装置970Bでは、一つのメモリアレイ920を複数のエリアに分けて、それぞれ異なる機能で使用することができる。図18Aでは、領域L1をL1キャッシュとして、領域L2をL2キャッシュとして、領域L3をL3キャッシュとして用いる場合の例を示している。 In the semiconductor device 970B, one memory array 920 can be divided into multiple areas, each of which can be used for different functions. Figure 18A shows an example in which area L1 is used as an L1 cache, area L2 as an L2 cache, and area L3 as an L3 cache.
また半導体装置970Bでは、領域L1乃至領域L3のそれぞれの容量を状況に応じて変えることができる。例えばL1キャッシュの容量を増やしたい場合には、領域L1の面積を大きくすることにより実現する。このような構成とすることで、演算処理の効率化を図ることができ、処理速度を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, in semiconductor device 970B, the capacity of each of areas L1 to L3 can be changed depending on the situation. For example, if you want to increase the capacity of the L1 cache, you can achieve this by increasing the area of area L1. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the efficiency of calculation processing and increase processing speed.
また、複数のメモリアレイを積層することも可能である。図18Bに半導体装置970Cの斜視図を示している。 It is also possible to stack multiple memory arrays. Figure 18B shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 970C.
半導体装置970Cは、メモリアレイ920L1を有する素子層930L1と、その上にメモリアレイ920L2を有する素子層930L2と、その上にメモリアレイ920L3を有する素子層930L3とが積層されている。最も演算装置960に物理的に近いメモリアレイ920L1を上位のキャッシュに用い、最も遠いメモリアレイ920L3を下位のキャッシュ又はメインメモリに用いることができる。このような構成とすることで、各メモリアレイの容量を増大させることができるため、より処理能力を向上させることができる。 Semiconductor device 970C has an element layer 930L1 having memory array 920L1 stacked on top of it, an element layer 930L2 having memory array 920L2 on top of that, and an element layer 930L3 having memory array 920L3 on top of that. Memory array 920L1, which is physically closest to the computing device 960, can be used as a higher-level cache, and memory array 920L3, which is farthest, can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. With this configuration, the capacity of each memory array can be increased, thereby further improving processing power.
本実施の形態は、他の実施の形態、又は実施例と適宜組み合わせることができる。また、本明細書において、1つの実施の形態の中に、複数の構成例が示される場合は、構成例を適宜組み合わせることが可能である。 This embodiment can be combined with other embodiments or examples as appropriate. Furthermore, in this specification, when multiple configuration examples are shown in one embodiment, the configuration examples can be combined as appropriate.
本実施の形態に示す構成は、他の実施の形態に示した構成と適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 The configuration described in this embodiment can be used in appropriate combination with the configurations described in other embodiments.
(実施の形態4)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の適用可能な範囲の一例について、図19を用いて説明する。
(Fourth embodiment)
In this embodiment, an example of the applicability of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
コンピュータなどの半導体装置では、用途に応じて様々な記憶装置が用いられる。図19に、コンピュータなどの半導体装置に用いられる記憶装置の階層を説明する概念図を示す。図19において、記憶装置の階層を説明する概念図は、三角形で示しており、三角形の上層に位置する記憶装置ほど速い動作速度が求められ、三角形の下層に位置する記憶装置ほど大きな記憶容量と高い記録密度が求められる。 Semiconductor devices such as computers use a variety of memory devices depending on the application. Figure 19 shows a conceptual diagram explaining the hierarchy of memory devices used in semiconductor devices such as computers. In Figure 19, the conceptual diagram explaining the hierarchy of memory devices is represented by a triangle, with memory devices located higher in the triangle requiring faster operating speeds, and memory devices located lower in the triangle requiring larger memory capacities and higher recording densities.
図19では、三角形の最上層から順に、CPU、GPU、NPUの演算処理装置にレジスタとして混載されるメモリ、キャッシュメモリ(単にcacheと表す場合もある。また、代表的には、L1、L2、L3キャッシュ)、DRAMに代表されるメインメモリ、3D NAND及びHard Disk(HDD:Hard Disk Driveともいう)に代表されるストレージメモリを示している。 In Figure 19, from the top layer of the triangle, there are memories integrated as registers into the CPU, GPU, and NPU processing units, cache memory (sometimes simply referred to as cache, and typically L1, L2, and L3 caches), main memory such as DRAM, and storage memory such as 3D NAND and hard disks (also known as HDDs: hard disk drives).
CPU、GPU、NPUなどの演算処理装置にレジスタとして混載されるメモリは、演算結果の一時保存などに用いられるため、演算処理装置からのアクセス頻度が高い。よって、大きな記憶容量よりも速い動作速度が求められる。また、レジスタは演算処理装置の設定情報などを保持する機能も有する。 Memory integrated as registers into arithmetic processing units such as CPUs, GPUs, and NPUs is used for temporary storage of calculation results, and is therefore frequently accessed by the arithmetic processing unit. Therefore, fast operating speeds are required rather than large storage capacities. Registers also have the function of storing setting information for the arithmetic processing unit.
キャッシュメモリは、DRAMに保持されているデータの一部を複製して保持する機能を有する。使用頻繁が高いデータを複製してキャッシュメモリに保持しておくことで、データへのアクセス速度を高めることができる。キャッシュメモリに求められる記憶容量はDRAMより少ないが、DRAMよりも速い動作速度が求められる。また、キャッシュメモリで書き換えられたデータは複製されてDRAMに供給される。なお、図19において、キャッシュメモリは、L3キャッシュまでしか図示していないが、これに限定されない。例えば、キャッシュのうち、最も下位に位置するLLC(Last Level cache)又はFLC(Final Level cache)にも本発明の一態様に係るOSメモリが好適である。 Cache memory has the function of duplicating and storing a portion of the data stored in DRAM. By duplicating frequently used data and storing it in cache memory, it is possible to increase the speed of access to the data. Cache memory requires less storage capacity than DRAM, but is required to have a faster operating speed than DRAM. Data rewritten in cache memory is duplicated and supplied to DRAM. Note that while Figure 19 only shows up to the L3 cache, the cache memory is not limited to this. For example, an OS memory according to one aspect of the present invention is also suitable for the LLC (Last Level cache) or FLC (Final Level cache), which are the lowest level caches.
DRAMは、3D NANDから読み出されたプログラム、データなどを保持する機能を有する。 DRAM has the function of storing programs, data, etc. read from 3D NAND.
3D NANDは、長期保存が必要なデータ、演算装置で使用する各種のプログラム(例えば、人工ニューラルネットワークのモデル)などを保持する機能を有する。よって、3D NANDには速い動作速度よりも大きな記憶容量と高い記録密度が求められる。 3D NAND has the ability to store data that requires long-term storage, various programs used in computing devices (for example, artificial neural network models), and more. Therefore, 3D NAND requires large storage capacity and high recording density rather than fast operating speeds.
Hard Diskは、大容量、且つ不揮発性の機能を有する。また、Hard Diskの代わりとして、SSD(Solid State Drive)などを用いることができる。 Hard disks have large storage capacity and are non-volatile. Alternatively, solid-state drives (SSDs) can be used instead of hard disks.
本発明の一態様に係るOSメモリは、長期間のデータ保持が可能である。そのため、図19に示すTarget1の領域に好適である。なお、図19の斜線のハッチングで示すように、Target1は、cache(L1、L2、L3)の一部及び3D NANDの一部も含む。別言すると、Target1は、DRAM及び3D NANDの境界領域と、DRAM及びcache(L1、L2、L3)の境界領域と、を含む。また、本発明の一態様に係るOSメモリは、動作速度が速いため、優れた書き込み動作及び読み出し動作を実現することができる。そのため、図19に示すTarget2の領域に用いることも可能である。 The OS memory according to one embodiment of the present invention is capable of long-term data retention. Therefore, it is suitable for the Target 1 area shown in Figure 19. Note that, as indicated by the diagonal hatching in Figure 19, Target 1 also includes part of the cache (L1, L2, L3) and part of the 3D NAND. In other words, Target 1 includes the boundary area between the DRAM and 3D NAND, and the boundary area between the DRAM and the cache (L1, L2, L3). Furthermore, because the OS memory according to one embodiment of the present invention has a high operating speed, it can achieve excellent write and read operations. Therefore, it can also be used for the Target 2 area shown in Figure 19.
例えば、図19に示すDRAMを、本発明の一態様に係るOSメモリに置き換えると好適である。ここで、DRAMは、リフレッシュ動作が不可欠であり、かつ破壊読出しの記憶装置であるため、他の記憶装置に比べて消費電力が高い。そのためDRAMを用いない構成とすることで、消費電力の削減を図ることができる。当該構成とすることで、DRAMを用いた構成と比較して、100分の1、または1000分の1以下まで消費電力を低減することができる。そのため、このような構成が適用されたスーパーコンピュータ(HPC(High Performance Computer)ともいう)、コンピュータ、サーバなどを含む情報処理装置を全世界に展開することにより、地球温暖化の抑制を図ることができる。 For example, it is preferable to replace the DRAM shown in FIG. 19 with an OS memory according to one embodiment of the present invention. Here, DRAM requires refresh operations and is a destructive readout storage device, so it consumes more power than other storage devices. Therefore, a configuration that does not use DRAM can reduce power consumption. This configuration can reduce power consumption to one-hundredth or even one-thousandth of that of a configuration that uses DRAM. Therefore, by deploying information processing devices, including supercomputers (also called high performance computers (HPCs)), computers, servers, and the like, that employ such a configuration worldwide, global warming can be mitigated.
このように、本発明の一態様に係るOSメモリは、CPU、GPU、NPUなどの演算処理装置にレジスタとして混載されるメモリから、DRAMと3D NANDとの境界領域のメモリまで、幅広い範囲のメモリに適用することができる。 In this way, the OS memory according to one aspect of the present invention can be applied to a wide range of memories, from memories integrated as registers in arithmetic processing units such as CPUs, GPUs, and NPUs, to memories in the boundary area between DRAM and 3D NAND.
本実施の形態に示す構成は、他の実施の形態に示した構成と適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 The configuration described in this embodiment can be used in appropriate combination with the configurations described in other embodiments.
(実施の形態5)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様に係るの半導体装置の応用例について説明する。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置は、例えば、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器及びデータセンター(Data Center:DCとも呼称する)に用いることができる。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置を用いた、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンターは、低消費電力化といった高性能化に有効である。
Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, an application example of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)). The electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.
[電子部品]
電子部品700が実装された基板(実装基板704)の斜視図を、図20Aに示す。図20Aに示す電子部品700は、モールド711内に半導体装置710を有している。図20Aは、電子部品700の内部を示すために、一部の記載を省略している。電子部品700は、モールド711の外側にランド712を有する。ランド712は電極パッド713と接続され、電極パッド713は半導体装置710とワイヤ714を介して接続されている。電子部品700は、例えばプリント基板702に実装される。このような電子部品が複数組み合わされて、それぞれがプリント基板702上で接続されることで実装基板704が完成する。
[Electronic Components]
FIG. 20A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted. Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 20A has semiconductor device 710 inside mold 711. FIG. 20A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700. Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714. Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.
また、半導体装置710は、駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、を有する。なお、記憶層716は、複数のメモリセルアレイが積層された構成である。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、が積層された構成は、モノリシック積層の構成とすることができる。モノリシック積層の構成では、TSV(Through Silicon Via)等の貫通電極技術、及び、Cu−Cu直接接合等の接合技術、を用いることなく、各層間を接続することができる。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、をモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、例えば、プロセッサ上にメモリが直接形成される、いわゆるオンチップメモリの構成とすることができる。オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、プロセッサと、メモリとのインターフェース部分の動作を高速にすることが可能となる。 The semiconductor device 710 also includes a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716. The memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other. The stacked configuration of the drive circuit layer 715 and the memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration. In a monolithic stacked configuration, the layers can be connected without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding. By configuring the drive circuit layer 715 and the memory layer 716 as a monolithic stack, it is possible to achieve a so-called on-chip memory configuration, in which the memory is formed directly on the processor. The on-chip memory configuration enables faster operation of the interface between the processor and the memory.
半導体装置710として、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置900などを用いることが可能である。よって、駆動回路層715として駆動回路910を用いることが可能である。また、記憶層716としてメモリアレイ920を用いることが可能である。また、半導体装置710として、半導体装置970A、半導体装置970B、半導体装置970Cなどを用いることが可能である。 The semiconductor device 900 according to one embodiment of the present invention or the like can be used as the semiconductor device 710. Therefore, the driver circuit 910 can be used as the driver circuit layer 715. The memory array 920 can be used as the memory layer 716. The semiconductor device 970A, the semiconductor device 970B, the semiconductor device 970C, or the like can be used as the semiconductor device 710.
また、オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、TSV等の貫通電極を用いる技術と比較し、接続配線等のサイズを小さくできるため、接続ピン数を増加させることも可能となる。接続ピン数を増加させることで、並列動作が可能となるため、メモリのバンド幅(メモリバンド幅ともいう)を向上させることが可能となる。 Furthermore, by using an on-chip memory configuration, the size of connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins. Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).
また、記憶層716が有する、複数のメモリセルアレイを、OSトランジスタを用いて形成し、当該複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシックで積層することが好ましい。複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、メモリのバンド幅及びメモリのアクセスレイテンシの一方又は双方を向上させることができる。なお、バンド幅とは、単位時間あたりのデータ転送量であり、アクセスレイテンシとは、アクセスしてからデータのやり取りが始まるまでの時間である。なお、記憶層716にSiトランジスタを用いる構成の場合、OSトランジスタと比較し、モノリシック積層の構成とすることが困難である。そのため、モノリシック積層の構成において、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタよりも優れた構造であるといえる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked. By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency. Note that the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time, and the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange. Note that when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.
また、半導体装置710を、ダイと呼称する場合がある。なお、本明細書等において、ダイとは、半導体チップの製造工程で、例えば円盤状の基板(ウエハともいう)等に回路パターンを形成し、さいの目状に切り分けて得られたチップ片を表す。なお、ダイに用いることのできる半導体材料として、例えば、シリコン(Si)、炭化ケイ素(SiC)、又は窒化ガリウム(GaN)等が挙げられる。例えば、シリコン基板(シリコンウエハともいう)から得られたダイを、シリコンダイという場合がある。 The semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die. In this specification, a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes. Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN). For example, a die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.
次に、電子部品730の斜視図を図20Bに示す。電子部品730は、SiP(System in Package)又はMCM(Multi Chip Module)の一例である。電子部品730は、パッケージ基板732(プリント基板)上にインターポーザ731が設けられ、インターポーザ731上に半導体装置735、及び複数の半導体装置710が設けられている。 Next, Figure 20B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730. Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module). Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.
電子部品730では、半導体装置710を広帯域メモリ(HBM:High Bandwidth Memory)として用いる例を示している。また、半導体装置735は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、GPU(Graphics Processing Unit)、NPU(Neural Processing Unit)又はFPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)等の集積回路に用いることができる。 Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM). Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), NPU (Neural Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
パッケージ基板732は、例えば、セラミック基板、プラスチック基板、又は、ガラスエポキシ基板を用いることができる。インターポーザ731は、例えば、シリコンインターポーザ又は樹脂インターポーザを用いることができる。 The package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate. The interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.
インターポーザ731は、複数の配線を有し、端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を接続する機能を有する。複数の配線は、単層又は多層で設けられる。また、インターポーザ731は、インターポーザ731上に設けられた集積回路をパッケージ基板732に設けられた電極と接続する機能を有する。これらのことから、インターポーザを「再配線基板」又は「中間基板」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、インターポーザ731に貫通電極を設けて、当該貫通電極を用いて集積回路とパッケージ基板732を接続する場合もある。また、シリコンインターポーザでは、貫通電極として、TSVを用いることもできる。 The interposer 731 has multiple wiring lines and functions to connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches. The multiple wiring lines are provided in a single layer or multiple layers. The interposer 731 also functions to connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732. For these reasons, the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate" or "intermediate substrate." In some cases, through electrodes are provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 are connected using these through electrodes. In addition, with silicon interposers, TSVs can also be used as through electrodes.
HBMでは、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために多くの配線を接続する必要がある。このため、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、微細かつ高密度の配線形成が求められる。よって、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 HBM requires the connection of many wires to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. For this reason, the interposer on which the HBM is mounted must have fine, high-density wiring. Therefore, it is preferable to use a silicon interposer for the interposer on which the HBM is mounted.
また、シリコンインターポーザを用いた、SiP及びMCM等では、集積回路とインターポーザ間の膨張係数の違いによる信頼性の低下が生じにくい。また、シリコンインターポーザは表面の平坦性が高いため、シリコンインターポーザ上に設ける集積回路とシリコンインターポーザ間の接続不良が生じにくい。特に、インターポーザ上に複数の集積回路を横に並べて配置する2.5Dパッケージ(2.5次元実装)では、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 Furthermore, in SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.
一方で、シリコンインターポーザ及びTSV等を用いて端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を接続する場合、当該端子ピッチの幅等のスペースが必要となる。そのため、電子部品730のサイズを小さくしようとした場合、上記の端子ピッチの幅が問題になり、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために必要な多くの配線を設けることが困難になる場合がある。そこで、前述したように、OSトランジスタを用いたモノリシック積層の構成が好適である。TSVを用いて積層したメモリセルアレイと、モノリシック積層したメモリセルアレイと、を組み合わせた複合化構造にすることも可能である。 On the other hand, when connecting multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches using a silicon interposer, TSVs, or the like, space is required to accommodate the width of the terminal pitch. Therefore, when attempting to reduce the size of the electronic component 730, the terminal pitch becomes an issue, and it may become difficult to provide the large number of wirings required to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. Therefore, as mentioned above, a monolithic stacked configuration using OS transistors is preferable. It is also possible to create a composite structure that combines a memory cell array stacked using TSVs with a monolithic stacked memory cell array.
また、電子部品730と重ねてヒートシンク(放熱板)を設けることも可能である。ヒートシンクを設ける場合は、インターポーザ731上に設ける集積回路の高さを揃えることが好ましい。例えば、本実施の形態に示す電子部品730では、半導体装置710と半導体装置735の高さを揃えることが好ましい。 It is also possible to provide a heat sink (heat sink) overlapping the electronic component 730. When providing a heat sink, it is preferable to align the height of the integrated circuit provided on the interposer 731. For example, in the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment, it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.
電子部品730を他の基板に実装するため、パッケージ基板732の底部に電極733を設けることも可能である。図20Bでは、電極733を半田ボールで形成する例を示している。パッケージ基板732の底部に半田ボールをマトリクス状に設けることで、BGA(Ball Grid Array)実装を実現できる。また、電極733を導電性のピンで形成することも可能である。パッケージ基板732の底部に導電性のピンをマトリクス状に設けることで、PGA(Pin Grid Array)実装を実現できる。 In order to mount the electronic component 730 on another substrate, electrodes 733 can also be provided on the bottom of the package substrate 732. Figure 20B shows an example in which the electrodes 733 are formed from solder balls. By providing solder balls in a matrix on the bottom of the package substrate 732, BGA (Ball Grid Array) mounting can be achieved. The electrodes 733 can also be formed from conductive pins. By providing conductive pins in a matrix on the bottom of the package substrate 732, PGA (Pin Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.
電子部品730は、BGA及びPGAに限らず様々な実装方法を用いて他の基板に実装することができる。実装方法としては、例えば、SPGA(Staggered Pin Grid Array)、LGA(Land Grid Array)、QFP(Quad Flat Package)、QFJ(Quad Flat J−leaded package)、及び、QFN(Quad Flat Non−leaded package)が挙げられる。 Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA. Examples of mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).
[大型計算機]
大型計算機5600の斜視図を図21Aに示す。大型計算機5600には、ラック5610にラックマウント型の計算機5620が複数格納されている。なお、大型計算機5600を、スーパーコンピュータと呼称する場合がある。
[Large computer]
21A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600. The mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620. The mainframe computer 5600 is sometimes called a supercomputer.
図21Bに計算機5620の一例の斜視図を示す。計算機5620は、マザーボード5630する。マザーボード5630には複数のスロット5631、及び複数の接続端子が設けられる。スロット5631には、PCカード5621が挿入されている。加えて、PCカード5621は、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625を有し、それぞれ、マザーボード5630に接続されている。 Figure 21B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620. The computer 5620 is mounted on a motherboard 5630. The motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals. A PC card 5621 is inserted into the slot 5631. In addition, the PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to the motherboard 5630.
図21CにPCカード5621の一例を示す。PCカード5621は、例えばCPU、GPU、記憶装置等を備えた処理ボードである。PCカード5621は、ボード5622と、ボード5622に実装される、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、電子部品5628、接続端子5629等を有する。なお、図21Cには、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、及び電子部品5628以外の部品を図示している。 Figure 21C shows an example of a PC card 5621. PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, storage device, etc. PC card 5621 has board 5622 and connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629 mounted on board 5622. Note that Figure 21C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.
接続端子5629は、マザーボード5630のスロット5631に挿入することができる形状を有しており、接続端子5629は、PCカード5621とマザーボード5630とを接続するためのインターフェースとして機能する。接続端子5629の規格としては、例えば、PCIe等が挙げられる。 The connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630. The connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.
接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625は、例えば、PCカード5621に対して電力供給、信号入力等を行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。また、例えば、PCカード5621によって計算された信号の出力等を行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625のそれぞれの規格としては、例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)、SATA(Serial ATA)、SCSI(Small Computer System Interface)等が挙げられる。また、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625から映像信号を出力する場合、それぞれの規格としては、HDMI(登録商標)等が挙げられる。 Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621. Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface). Also, when outputting video signals from connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).
電子部品5626は、信号の入出力を行う端子(図示しない)を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備えるソケット(図示しない)に対して差し込むことで、電子部品5626とボード5622を接続することができる。 The electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and the electronic component 5626 can be connected to the board 5622 by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on the board 5622.
電子部品5627及び電子部品5628は、複数の端子を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備える配線に対して、例えば、リフロー方式のはんだ付けを行うことで、実装することができる。電子部品5627としては、例えば、FPGA、GPU、CPU等が挙げられる。電子部品5627として、例えば、電子部品730を用いることができる。電子部品5628としては、例えば、記憶装置等が挙げられる。電子部品5628として、例えば、電子部品700を用いることができる。 Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering. Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs. Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.
大型計算機5600は並列計算機としても機能できる。大型計算機5600を並列計算機として用いることで、例えば、人工知能の学習、及び推論に必要な大規模の計算を行うことができる。 The mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for, for example, artificial intelligence learning and inference.
[宇宙用機器]
本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、宇宙用機器に好適である。
[Space equipment]
The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitable for space equipment.
宇宙用機器に本発明の一態様に係るの半導体装置は、OSトランジスタを含むことが好ましい。OSトランジスタは、放射線照射による電気特性の変動が小さい。つまり放射線に対する耐性が高いため、放射線が入射しうる環境に好適である。例えば、OSトランジスタは、宇宙空間にて使用する場合に好適である。具体的には、OSトランジスタを、スペースシャトル、人工衛星又は宇宙探査機に設けられる半導体装置を構成するトランジスタに用いることができる。放射線として、例えば、X線、及び中性子線が挙げられる。なお、宇宙空間とは、例えば、高度100km以上を指すが、本明細書に記載の宇宙空間は、熱圏、中間圏、及び成層圏のうち一つ又は複数を含む。 A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention for use in space equipment preferably includes an OS transistor. OS transistors exhibit small changes in electrical characteristics due to radiation exposure. That is, they have high radiation resistance and are therefore suitable for environments where radiation may be incident. For example, OS transistors are suitable for use in outer space. Specifically, OS transistors can be used as transistors constituting semiconductor devices installed in space shuttles, artificial satellites, or space probes. Examples of radiation include X-rays and neutron rays. Note that outer space refers to an altitude of 100 km or higher, for example, and the outer space described in this specification includes one or more of the thermosphere, mesosphere, and stratosphere.
図22Aには、宇宙用機器の一例として、人工衛星6800を示している。人工衛星6800は、機体6801と、ソーラーパネル6802と、アンテナ6803と、二次電池6805と、制御装置6807と、を有する。なお、図22Aにおいては、宇宙空間に惑星6804を例示している。 Figure 22A shows an artificial satellite 6800 as an example of space equipment. The artificial satellite 6800 has a body 6801, a solar panel 6802, an antenna 6803, a secondary battery 6805, and a control device 6807. Note that Figure 22A also shows a planet 6804 in space.
また、図22Aには、図示していないが、二次電池6805に、バッテリマネジメントシステム(BMSともいう)又はバッテリ制御回路を設けることも可能である。前述のバッテリマネジメントシステム又はバッテリ制御回路にOSトランジスタを用いると、消費電力が低く、かつ宇宙空間においても高い信頼性を有するため好適である。 Although not shown in FIG. 22A, the secondary battery 6805 can also be provided with a battery management system (also referred to as BMS) or a battery control circuit. Using an OS transistor in the battery management system or battery control circuit described above is preferable because it consumes low power and has high reliability even in space.
また、宇宙空間は、地上に比べて100倍以上、放射線量の高い環境である。なお、放射線として、例えば、X線及びガンマ線に代表される電磁波(電磁放射線)、並びに、アルファ線、ベータ線、中性子線、陽子線、重イオン線、中間子線等に代表される粒子放射線が挙げられる。 In addition, outer space is an environment with radiation levels more than 100 times higher than on Earth. Examples of radiation include electromagnetic waves (electromagnetic radiation) such as X-rays and gamma rays, as well as particle radiation such as alpha rays, beta rays, neutron rays, proton rays, heavy ion rays, and meson rays.
ソーラーパネル6802に太陽光が照射されることにより、人工衛星6800が動作するために必要な電力が生成される。しかしながら、例えばソーラーパネルに太陽光が照射されない状況又はソーラーパネルに照射される太陽光の光量が少ない状況では、生成される電力が少なくなる。よって、人工衛星6800が動作するために必要な電力が生成されない可能性がある。生成される電力が少ない状況下であっても人工衛星6800を動作させるために、人工衛星6800に二次電池6805を設けるとよい。なお、ソーラーパネルは、太陽電池モジュールと呼ばれる場合がある。 When sunlight is irradiated onto the solar panel 6802, the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate is generated. However, for example, in situations where sunlight is not irradiated onto the solar panel or where the amount of sunlight irradiating the solar panel is low, the amount of power generated is small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate will not be generated. In order to operate the satellite 6800 even in situations where the amount of power generated is low, it is recommended that a secondary battery 6805 be provided on the satellite 6800. Note that the solar panel is sometimes called a solar cell module.
人工衛星6800は、信号を生成することができる。当該信号は、アンテナ6803を介して送信され、例えば地上に設けられた受信機、又は他の人工衛星が当該信号を受信することができる。人工衛星6800が送信した信号を受信することにより、当該信号を受信した受信機の位置を測定することができる。以上より、人工衛星6800は、衛星測位システムを構成することができる。 Satellite 6800 can generate a signal. The signal is transmitted via antenna 6803, and can be received, for example, by a receiver located on the ground or by another satellite. By receiving the signal transmitted by satellite 6800, the position of the receiver that received the signal can be determined. As described above, satellite 6800 can constitute a satellite positioning system.
また、制御装置6807は、人工衛星6800を制御する機能を有する。制御装置6807としては、例えば、CPU、GPU及び記憶装置の中から選ばれるいずれか一又は複数を用いて構成される。なお、制御装置6807には、本発明の一態様であるOSトランジスタを含む半導体装置を用いると好適である。OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタと比較し、放射線照射による電気特性の変動が小さい。つまり放射線が入射しうる環境においても信頼性が高く、好適である。 The control device 6807 also has a function of controlling the satellite 6800. The control device 6807 is configured using, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device. Note that a semiconductor device including an OS transistor, which is one embodiment of the present invention, is preferably used for the control device 6807. The electrical characteristics of an OS transistor change less when exposed to radiation than those of a Si transistor. In other words, an OS transistor is highly reliable and suitable even in an environment where radiation may be incident.
また、人工衛星6800は、センサを有する構成とすることができる。例えば、可視光センサを有する構成とすることにより、人工衛星6800は、地上に設けられている物体に当たって反射された太陽光を検出する機能を有することができる。又は、熱赤外センサを有する構成とすることにより、人工衛星6800は、地表から放出される熱赤外線を検出する機能を有することができる。以上より、人工衛星6800は、例えば地球観測衛星としての機能を有することができる。 Furthermore, the artificial satellite 6800 can be configured to include a sensor. For example, by configuring the artificial satellite 6800 with a visible light sensor, the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting sunlight reflected off an object on the ground. Or, by configuring the artificial satellite 6800 with a thermal infrared sensor, the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting thermal infrared rays emitted from the earth's surface. As described above, the artificial satellite 6800 can function as, for example, an Earth observation satellite.
なお、本実施の形態においては、宇宙用機器の一例として、人工衛星について例示したがこれに限定されない。例えば、本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、宇宙船、宇宙カプセル、宇宙探査機等の宇宙用機器に好適である。 Note that in this embodiment, an artificial satellite is used as an example of space equipment; however, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitable for space equipment such as a spaceship, a space capsule, or a space probe.
以上の説明の通り、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタと比較し、広いメモリバンド幅の実現が可能なこと、放射線耐性が高いこと、といった優れた効果を有する。 As explained above, OS transistors have the advantages of being able to achieve a wider memory bandwidth and having higher radiation resistance compared to Si transistors.
[データセンター]
本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置は、例えば、データセンター等に適用されるストレージシステムに好適である。データセンターは、データの不変性を保障する等、データの長期的な管理を行うことが求められる。長期的なデータを管理する場合、膨大なデータを記憶するためのストレージ及びサーバの設置、データを保持するための安定した電源の確保、あるいはデータの保持に要する冷却設備の確保、等建屋の大型化が必要となる。
[Data Center]
A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitable for a storage system applied to, for example, a data center. Data centers are required to perform long-term management of data, such as ensuring the immutability of data. Managing long-term data requires larger buildings, such as installing storage and servers for storing huge amounts of data, ensuring a stable power supply for maintaining the data, and ensuring cooling equipment required for maintaining the data.
データセンターに適用されるストレージシステムに本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置を用いることにより、データの保持に要する電力の低減、データを保持する半導体装置の小型化を図ることができる。そのため、ストレージシステムの小型化、データを保持するための電源の小型化、冷却設備の小規模化、等を図ることができる。そのため、データセンターの省スペース化を図ることができる。 By using a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention in a storage system applied to a data center, it is possible to reduce the power required to store data and to miniaturize the semiconductor device that stores the data. This makes it possible to miniaturize the storage system, the power supply for storing data, and the cooling equipment. This allows for space savings in the data center.
また、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置は、消費電力が少ないため、回路からの発熱を低減することができる。よって、当該発熱によるその回路自体、周辺回路、及びモジュールへの悪影響を低減できる。また、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置を用いることにより、高温環境下においても動作が安定したデータセンターを実現できる。よってデータセンターの信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention consumes less power, and therefore heat generation from the circuit can be reduced. This reduces adverse effects of the heat generation on the circuit itself, peripheral circuits, and modules. Furthermore, by using a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention, a data center that operates stably even in a high-temperature environment can be realized. This improves the reliability of the data center.
図22Bにデータセンターに適用可能なストレージシステムを示す。図22Bに示すストレージシステム6000は、ホスト6001(Host Computerと図示)として複数のサーバ6001sbを有する。また、ストレージ6003(Storageと図示)として複数の記憶装置6003mdを有する。ホスト6001とストレージ6003とは、ストレージエリアネットワーク6004(SAN:Storage Area Networkと図示)及びストレージ制御回路6002(Storage Controllerと図示)を介して接続されている形態を図示している。 Figure 22B shows a storage system applicable to a data center. The storage system 6000 shown in Figure 22B has multiple servers 6001sb as hosts 6001 (illustrated as Host Computers). It also has multiple storage devices 6003md as storage 6003 (illustrated as Storage). The host 6001 and storage 6003 are shown connected via a storage area network 6004 (illustrated as SAN: Storage Area Network) and a storage control circuit 6002 (illustrated as Storage Controller).
ホスト6001は、ストレージ6003に記憶されたデータにアクセスするコンピュータに相当する。ホスト6001同士は、ネットワークで互いに接続することができる。 The host 6001 corresponds to a computer that accesses data stored in the storage 6003. The hosts 6001 can be connected to each other via a network.
ストレージ6003は、フラッシュメモリを用いることで、データのアクセススピード、つまりデータの記憶及び出力に要する時間を短くしているものの、当該時間は、ストレージ内のキャッシュメモリとして用いることのできるDRAMが要する時間に比べて格段に長い。ストレージシステムでは、ストレージ6003のアクセススピードの長さの問題を解決するために、通常ストレージ内にキャッシュメモリを設けてデータの記憶及び出力に要する時間を短くしている。 Storage 6003 uses flash memory to reduce data access speed, i.e., the time required to store and output data, but this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage. In order to solve the problem of the slow access speed of storage 6003, storage systems typically provide cache memory within the storage to reduce the time required to store and output data.
前述のキャッシュメモリは、ストレージ制御回路6002及びストレージ6003内に用いられる。ホスト6001とストレージ6003との間でやり取りされるデータは、ストレージ制御回路6002及びストレージ6003内の当該キャッシュメモリに記憶されたのち、ホスト6001又はストレージ6003に出力される。 The aforementioned cache memory is used within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003. Data exchanged between the host 6001 and storage 6003 is stored in the cache memory within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003, and then output to the host 6001 or storage 6003.
前述のキャッシュメモリのデータを記憶するためのトランジスタとして、OSトランジスタを用いてデータに応じた電位を保持する構成とすることで、リフレッシュする頻度を減らし、消費電力を小さくすることができる。またメモリセルアレイを積層する構成とすることで小型化が可能である。 By using OS transistors as transistors for storing data in the cache memory and maintaining a potential corresponding to the data, the frequency of refreshes can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, by stacking the memory cell array, miniaturization is possible.
なお、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置を、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンターの中から選ばれるいずれか一又は複数に適用することで、消費電力を低減させる効果が期待される。そのため、半導体装置の高性能化又は高集積化に伴うエネルギー需要の増加が見込まれる中、本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いることで、二酸化炭素(CO2)に代表される、温室効果ガスの排出量を低減させることも可能となる。また、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置は、低消費電力であるため地球温暖化対策としても有効である。 Note that by applying a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention to one or more selected from electronic components, electronic devices, mainframe computers, space equipment, and data centers, it is expected that power consumption can be reduced. Therefore, while energy demand is expected to increase with the improvement in performance or integration of semiconductor devices, the use of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can also reduce emissions of greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide (CO 2 ). Furthermore, the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is effective as a countermeasure against global warming due to its low power consumption.
本実施の形態に示す構成は、他の実施の形態に示した構成と適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 The configuration described in this embodiment can be used in appropriate combination with the configurations described in other embodiments.
10:半導体装置、101:絶縁層、102:導電層、103:絶縁層、104:開口、105:導電層、106:絶縁層、107:導電層、108:絶縁層、109:導電層、110:容量素子、111:開口、112:半導体層、113:絶縁層、114:導電層、115:絶縁層、120:トランジスタ、121:端部、122:領域、151:長さ、152:長さ、700:電子部品、702:プリント基板、704:実装基板、710:半導体装置、711:モールド、712:ランド、713:電極パッド、714:ワイヤ、715:駆動回路層、716:記憶層、730:電子部品、731:インターポーザ、732:パッケージ基板、733:電極、735:半導体装置、900:半導体装置、910:駆動回路、911:周辺回路、912:コントロール回路、915:周辺回路、920:メモリアレイ、923:行ドライバ、924:列ドライバ、925:入力回路、926:出力回路、927:センスアンプ、928:電圧生成回路、930:素子層、931:PSW、932:PSW、941:行デコーダ、942:列デコーダ、951:メモリセル、953:メモリセル、954:メモリセル、955:メモリセル、956:メモリセル、957:メモリセル、958:メモリセル、960:演算装置、989:キャッシュインターフェイス、990:基板、991:ALU、992:ALUコントローラ、993:インストラクションデコーダ、994:インタラプトコントローラ、995:タイミングコントローラ、996:レジスタ、997:レジスタコントローラ、998:バスインターフェイス、999:キャッシュ 10: semiconductor device, 101: insulating layer, 102: conductive layer, 103: insulating layer, 104: opening, 105: conductive layer, 106: insulating layer, 107: conductive layer, 108: insulating layer, 109: conductive layer, 110: capacitance element, 111: opening, 112: semiconductor layer, 113: insulating layer, 114: conductive layer, 115: insulating layer, 120: transistor, 121: end, 122: region, 151: length, 152: length, 700: electronic part 702: printed circuit board, 704: mounting board, 710: semiconductor device, 711: mold, 712: land, 713: electrode pad, 714: wire, 715: drive circuit layer, 716: memory layer, 730: electronic component, 731: interposer, 732: package substrate, 733: electrode, 735: semiconductor device, 900: semiconductor device, 910: drive circuit, 911: peripheral circuit, 912: control circuit 915: Peripheral circuit, 920: Memory array, 923: Row driver, 924: Column driver, 925: Input circuit, 926: Output circuit, 927: Sense amplifier, 928: Voltage generation circuit, 930: Element layer, 931: PSW, 932: PSW, 941: Row decoder, 942: Column decoder, 951: Memory cell, 953: Memory cell, 954: Memory cell, 955: Memory cell, 956: Memory cell, 957: Memory cell, 958: Memory cell, 960: Arithmetic unit, 989: Cache interface, 990: Substrate, 991: ALU, 992: ALU controller, 993: Instruction decoder, 994: Interrupt controller, 995: Timing controller, 996: Register, 997: Register controller, 998: Bus interface, 999: Cache
Claims (9)
第1導電層上に設けられた第1絶縁層と、
前記第1絶縁層を貫通し前記第1導電層に達する第1開口と、
前記第1導電層と重なる領域及び前記第1開口において前記第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第2導電層と、
前記第2導電層上に設けられた第2絶縁層と、
前記第2絶縁層の一部を介して前記第2導電層と重なる領域及び前記第2絶縁層の他の一部を介して前記第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第3導電層と、
前記第3導電層上に設けられた第3絶縁層と、
前記第3絶縁層上に設けられた第4導電層と、
前記第3絶縁層を貫通し前記第3導電層に達する第2開口と、
前記第3導電層と電気的に接続する領域、前記第4導電層と電気的に接続する領域及び前記第2開口において前記第3絶縁層の側面に沿うチャネル形成領域を有する半導体層と、
前記半導体層上に設けられた第4絶縁層と、
前記第4絶縁層の一部を介して前記第1トランジスタのチャネル形成領域と重なる領域を有する第5導電層と、を有し、
前記第2開口の平面視において、第1方向の長さと、前記第1方向と直交する第2方向の長さが異なる半導体装置。 A semiconductor device having a first capacitance element and a first transistor,
a first insulating layer provided on the first conductive layer;
a first opening that penetrates the first insulating layer and reaches the first conductive layer;
a second conductive layer having a region overlapping the first conductive layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer in the first opening;
a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer;
a third conductive layer having a region overlapping the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer via another portion of the second insulating layer;
a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer;
a fourth conductive layer provided on the third insulating layer;
a second opening that penetrates the third insulating layer and reaches the third conductive layer;
a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer, and a channel formation region along a side surface of the third insulating layer in the second opening;
a fourth insulating layer provided on the semiconductor layer;
a fifth conductive layer having a region overlapping with a channel formation region of the first transistor via a part of the fourth insulating layer;
The semiconductor device has a length in a first direction different from a length in a second direction perpendicular to the first direction when viewed from above.
前記第2導電層は前記第1容量素子の一方の電極として機能し、
前記第3導電層は前記第1容量素子の他方の電極として機能し、
前記第3導電層は前記第1トランジスタのソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、
前記第4導電層は前記第1トランジスタのソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する半導体装置。 In claim 1,
the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element;
the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element,
the third conductive layer functions as one of a source electrode or a drain electrode of the first transistor;
The fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor.
前記第2方向の長さが第1方向の長さの2倍以上5倍以下である半導体装置。 In claim 1 or claim 2,
The length in the second direction is between two and five times the length in the first direction.
前記第1容量素子と前記第1トランジスタは、平面視において互いに重なる領域を有する半導体装置。 In claim 1 or claim 2,
The semiconductor device has a region where the first capacitive element and the first transistor overlap each other in a plan view.
前記半導体層は、酸化物半導体を含む半導体装置。 In claim 1 or claim 2,
The semiconductor device, wherein the semiconductor layer includes an oxide semiconductor.
第1導電層上に設けられた第1絶縁層と、
前記第1導電層と重なる領域及び前記第1絶縁層の側面と重なる領域を有する第2導電層と、
前記第2導電層上に設けられた第2絶縁層と、
前記第2絶縁層の一部を介して前記第2導電層と重なる領域を有する第3導電層と、
前記第3導電層上に設けられた第3絶縁層と、
前記第3絶縁層上に設けられた第4導電層と、
前記第3導電層と電気的に接続する領域、前記第4導電層と電気的に接続する領域、前記第1トランジスタのチャネル形成領域及び前記第2トランジスタのチャネル形成領域を有する半導体層と、
前記半導体層上に設けられた第4絶縁層と、
前記第4絶縁層の一部を介して前記第1トランジスタのチャネル形成領域と重なる領域及び前記第4絶縁層の他の一部を介して前記第2トランジスタのチャネル形成領域を有する第5導電層と、
を有する半導体装置。 A semiconductor device having a first capacitance element, a first transistor, and a second transistor,
a first insulating layer provided on the first conductive layer;
a second conductive layer having a region overlapping the first conductive layer and a region overlapping a side surface of the first insulating layer;
a second insulating layer provided on the second conductive layer;
a third conductive layer having a region overlapping the second conductive layer via a portion of the second insulating layer;
a third insulating layer provided on the third conductive layer;
a fourth conductive layer provided on the third insulating layer;
a semiconductor layer having a region electrically connected to the third conductive layer, a region electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer, a channel formation region of the first transistor, and a channel formation region of the second transistor;
a fourth insulating layer provided on the semiconductor layer;
a fifth conductive layer having a region overlapping with a channel formation region of the first transistor via a portion of the fourth insulating layer and a channel formation region of the second transistor via another portion of the fourth insulating layer;
A semiconductor device having:
前記第2導電層は前記第1容量素子の一方の電極として機能し、
前記第3導電層は前記第1容量素子の他方の電極として機能し、
前記第3導電層は前記第1トランジスタ及び前記第2トランジスタそれぞれのソース電極又はドレイン電極の一方として機能し、
前記第4導電層は前記第1トランジスタ及び前記第2トランジスタそれぞれのソース電極又はドレイン電極の他方として機能する半導体装置。 In claim 6,
the second conductive layer functions as one electrode of the first capacitance element;
the third conductive layer functions as the other electrode of the first capacitance element,
the third conductive layer functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of each of the first transistor and the second transistor;
The fourth conductive layer functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of each of the first transistor and the second transistor.
前記第1容量素子は、平面視において前記第1トランジスタと重なる第1領域と、平面視において前記第2トランジスタと重なる第2領域と、を有する半導体装置。 In claim 6 or claim 7,
The first capacitive element has a first region that overlaps with the first transistor in a plan view and a second region that overlaps with the second transistor in a plan view.
前記半導体層は、酸化物半導体を含む半導体装置。 In claim 6 or claim 7,
The semiconductor device, wherein the semiconductor layer includes an oxide semiconductor.
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2024031355 | 2024-03-01 | ||
| JP2024-031355 | 2024-03-01 | ||
| JP2025-012750 | 2025-01-29 | ||
| JP2025012750 | 2025-01-29 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025181637A1 true WO2025181637A1 (en) | 2025-09-04 |
Family
ID=96920056
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/IB2025/051857 Pending WO2025181637A1 (en) | 2024-03-01 | 2025-02-21 | Semiconductor device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025181637A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20050007804A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-01-13 | Infineon Technologies North America Corp. | Structure and method of multiplexing bitline signals within a memory array |
| US20180197862A1 (en) * | 2017-01-12 | 2018-07-12 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Memory Cell, An Array Of Memory Cells Individually Comprising A Capacitor And A Transistor With The Array Comprising Rows Of Access Lines And Columns Of Digit Lines, A 2T-1C Memory Cell, And Methods Of Forming An Array Of Capacitors And Access Transistors There-Above |
| WO2023187543A1 (en) * | 2022-03-31 | 2023-10-05 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
| JP2024012148A (en) * | 2022-07-15 | 2024-01-25 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Metal oxide film formation method |
| JP2024504425A (en) * | 2021-01-26 | 2024-01-31 | 華為技術有限公司 | Thin film transistors and manufacturing methods, memories and manufacturing methods, and electronic devices |
-
2025
- 2025-02-21 WO PCT/IB2025/051857 patent/WO2025181637A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20050007804A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-01-13 | Infineon Technologies North America Corp. | Structure and method of multiplexing bitline signals within a memory array |
| US20180197862A1 (en) * | 2017-01-12 | 2018-07-12 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Memory Cell, An Array Of Memory Cells Individually Comprising A Capacitor And A Transistor With The Array Comprising Rows Of Access Lines And Columns Of Digit Lines, A 2T-1C Memory Cell, And Methods Of Forming An Array Of Capacitors And Access Transistors There-Above |
| JP2024504425A (en) * | 2021-01-26 | 2024-01-31 | 華為技術有限公司 | Thin film transistors and manufacturing methods, memories and manufacturing methods, and electronic devices |
| WO2023187543A1 (en) * | 2022-03-31 | 2023-10-05 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
| JP2024012148A (en) * | 2022-07-15 | 2024-01-25 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Metal oxide film formation method |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2024057166A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| JP2025079799A (en) | Storage device and method for driving storage device | |
| WO2025181637A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163447A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163448A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| US20260020289A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device | |
| US20250040116A1 (en) | Memory device | |
| WO2025172811A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2024180432A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor device | |
| WO2024194726A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor device | |
| WO2025083532A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025243155A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| JP2025126148A (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025248409A1 (en) | Storage device and method for driving storage device | |
| WO2025219842A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025219839A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for driving same | |
| WO2025163452A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2026013522A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor device | |
| WO2025186691A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2024176064A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and storage device | |
| WO2025153928A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| TW202424973A (en) | Semiconductor device and method for driving the same | |
| WO2025032444A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device | |
| WO2025243161A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| KR20260009222A (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25761773 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |